Sanskrit Dictionary

Select your preferred input and type any Sanskrit or English word. Enclose the word in “” for an EXACT match e.g. “yoga”.

Amarakosha Search

3 results

Word	Reference	Gender	Number	Synonyms	Definition

śīghram	1.1.65	Neuter	Singular	avilambitam, satvaram, kṣipram, tūrṇam, drutam, laghu, āśu, capalam, aram, tvaritam	swiftly

śraddhā	3.3.109	Feminine	Singular	avalambitaḥ, avidūraḥ

avilambitam	3.1.82	Masculine	Singular	uccaṇḍam

Monier-Williams Search

336 results for bita

अभी

( i-), abhy-/eti- (Imper. 2. sg. abh/īhi-; imperfect tense 3. plural -āyan-,3. sg. A1. -āyata-; ind.p. abh/ītya-) to come near, approach, go up to or towards (accusative)

etc. ; (with sakāśam-or samīpam-or pārśve-) idem or '([ ]) or a-bhīr/uṇa- ([ ]), mfn. not terrific.'

; to go along or after (accusative)

etc. ; to enter, join, go over to

; (with a pr. p.) to begin to, (perf. 3. plural abhīy/uḥ-)

; to reach, obtain

etc. ; to get or fall into (accusative)

etc. ; to come to, fall to one's share (with accusative)

; (said of the sun) to rise (as if he came nearer;also with abhitarām-[ q.v ] instead of abhi-)

(with astam-) to set

(see abhy-aya-): Passive voice abhīyate- to be perceived, known

: Intensive (1. plural -īmahe-) to ask, request

अभिरभ्

A1. (perf. 3. plural -rebhire-) to embrace

: Causal perf. Pass. p. -rambhita- See below.

आदानी

f. Name of a cucurbitaceous plant

अधिवास

m. an inhabitant

अधिवास

m. a habitation, abode, settlement, site

अधिवसति

f. a dwelling, habitation,

अध्यास्

to sit down or lie down upon, to settle upon ; to occupy as one's seat or habitation ; to get into, enter upon ; to be directed to or upon ; to affect, concern ; to preside over, influence, rule ; to cohabit with: Causal P. adhy-āsayati-, to cause to sit down

: Desiderative (parasmE-pada adhyāsisiṣamāṇa-) to be about to rise up to (accusative)

अगम्या

f. a woman with whom cohabitation is forbidden.

अगृभीतशोचिस्

mfn. (/agṛbhīta--) "having unsubdued splendour", Name of agni- and the marut-s

आहिच्छत्त्रिक

m. an inhabitant of the country ahicchattra- or its city.

अजामि

n. "(co-habitation) not allowed between relations", incest

आलाबु

f. the pumpkin gourd, Cucurbita Pepo

अलक

m. of the Inhabitants of kubera-'s residence alakā-

अम्बष्ठ

m. (fr. amba-and stha-?

) Name of a country and of its inhabitants

etc.

अम्बि

f. mother

: Superl. vocative case /ambitame-, O dearest mother!

, (see amb/ī-.)

आनर्त

m. plural Name of the inhabitants of the above country

आनर्तक

mfn. belonging to the inhabitants of ānarta-, (gaRa dhūmādi-

)

आन्ध्र

m. plural the inhabitants of that country

अङ्ग

m. sg. or plural Name of Bengal proper or its inhabitants

अन्तद्वीप

Name (also title or epithet) of a country to the north of madhyadeśa- (pin-,an inhabitant of it),

अन्तद्वीपिन्

m. an inhabitant of it

अन्तर्जन

m. plural the inhabitants of a house,

अन्योकस्

mfn. not remaining in one's habitation (okas-)

अपरजन

sg. or plural m. inhabitants of the west

अपरान्त

m. the western extremity, the country or the inhabitants of the western border

आरण्यक

m. a forester, an inhabitant of the woods

आर्य

m. (fr. ary/a-, ṛ-), a respectable or honourable or faithful man, an inhabitant of āryāvarta-

आर्यावर्त

m. plural the inhabitants of that country.

आश्रमालय

m. an inhabitant of a hermitage, an ascetic

आश्रमसद्

m. an inhabitant of a hermitage, an ascetic

आश्रमवासिन्

m. an inhabitant of a hermitage, an ascetic

आटविक

m. (fr. aṭavī-), the inhabitant of a forest

etc.

आटविक

mfn. consisting of inhabitants of the forest (as an army)

आतिवाहिक

m. an inhabitant of the other world,

अतिवाहिक

m. an inhabitant of the lower world.

अत्यर्थ

mfn. "beyond the proper worth", exorbitant, excessive

अउपस्थ्य

n. cohabitation, sexual enjoyment

आवन्तक

m. plural the inhabitants of avanti-

अवन्ति

m. plural Name of a country and its in habitants

आवन्त्य

m. a king or inhabitant of avanti-

अवसथ

m. (for ā-vasatha- q.v) habitation

आवसथ

m. (

) dwelling-place, abode, habitation, night's lodging

etc.

अवसथिन्

mfn. having a habitation

अविलम्बम्

ind. without delay

(varia lectio lambitam-)

बहिर्गिरि

m. plural the inhabitants of that country

(also girya- plural

)

बहुफला

f. Name of various plants (Solanum Indicum or another variety of Solanum;Glycine Debilis;a species of Convolvulus Turpethum;various kinds of cucurbitaceous plants, Flacourtia Cataphracta)

बैल्ववन

m. (prob.) an inhabitant of bilvavana- or a wood of bilva- trees gaRa rājanyādi-.

बाल्हव

m. an inhabitant of Balkh (f(ī-).)

बेदरकर

m. (prob.) an inhabitant of the city Bedar or Bidar

(also proper N.)

भैरव

m. Name of a form of śiva- (cf

)

(in the latter 8 bhairava-'s are enumerated, viz. mahā--, saṃhāra--, asitāṅga--, ruru-- kāla--, krodha--, tāmracūḍa--,or kapāla--, candracūḍa--or rudra-bh-;sometimes other names are given exempli gratia, 'for example' vidyā-rāja-, kāma-r-, nāga-r-, svacchanda-r-, lambita-r-, deva-r-, ugra-r-, vighna-r-)

भरुकच्छनिवासिन्

m. an inhabitant of bharu-kaccha-

भी

cl.3 P. (

) bibh/eti- (dual number bibhītas-or bibhitas- Potential bibhīyāt-or bibhiyāt-

; Potential 3. plural bibhyeyuḥ-

; imperfect tense 3. plural abibhayuḥ-

; Epic also A1.1. sg. bibhye-and and P.3. sg. bibhyati- plural bibhyanti-;Ved. also cl.1 A1. bh/ayate-,and accord, to

,cl.10. P. bhāyayati-; perfect tense bibhāya-,3. plural bibhyuḥ-

etc.; bībhāya-

; bibhay/āṃ cakara-

confer, compare

; Aorist abhaiṣīt-, ṣma-, ṣuḥ-

etc., 2. sg. bhaiṣīs-

, bhais-

etc., especially in mābhais-,"do not be afraid";once for plural equals mā bhaiṣṭa-

; bhes-

; bhema-

, parasmE-pada A1. bhiyān/a-

,; future bhetā- grammar;cond, abheṣyat-

; infinitive mood bhiy/ase-

; bhetum-

etc.) , to fear, be afraid of (ablative or genitive case,rarely instr, or accusative)

etc. ; to fear for, be anxious about (ablative)

: Passive voice bhīyate-, Aorist , abhāyi- grammar : Causal bhīṣ/ayate- (

etc.; confer, compare

), bhīṣayati- (

;once mc. bhiṣ-

; parasmE-pada bhīṣayāṇa-

; Aorist bībhiṣaḥ-

, ṣathāḥ-

), bhāyayati-, te- (

; Potential bhāyayes-

; varia lectio bhīṣayes-; Aorist bībhayat-, /abībhayanta-

; ind.p. -bhāyya-

), bhāpayate- (

), to terrify, put in a fright, intimidate

etc. etc.: Desiderative bibhīṣati- grammar : Intensive bebhīyate-, bebhayīti-, bebheti-

[ confer, compare bhyas-; Lithuanian bijo4tis; Slavonic or Slavonian bojati; German biben,beben.]

भीतचारिन्

mfn. acting timidly (a-bhītac-)

भोजकट

m. plural the inhabitants of the town of bhoja-kaṭa-

भोजकटीय

m. plural the inhabitants of bhojakaṭa-

भृगुकच्छ

m. plural its inhabitants

भूमिगोचर

m. an inhabitant of the earth a man

भुवनौकस्

m. "inhabitant of heaven", a god

बिशायक

(or viś-) m. a species of Euphorbia

(see bitākara-).

ब्राह्म

mf(ī-)n. belonging to an inhabitant of brahmā-'s world

ब्रह्मन्

m. an inhabitant of brahmā-'s heaven

ब्रह्मपुरी

f. of any city the inhabitants of which are mostly Brahmans

चान्द्रपुर

m. plural the inhabitants of candrapura-

चिन्तिसुराष्ट्र

m. plural the cinti-s and the inhabitants of su-rāṣṭra- gaRa kārta-kaujapādi-.

चित्रकूट

m. "wonderful peak", Name of a hill and district (the modern Citrakote or Catarkot near Ka1mta1, situated on the river Paisuni about 50 miles S.E. of the Bandah in Bundelkhund;first habitation of the exiled rāma- and lakṣmaṇa-, crowded with temples as the holiest spot of rāma-'s worshippers)

दभ्

or dambh- cl.1. (subjunctive d/abhat-and bhāti-

; plural bhanti-,

, bhan-,

and

; Potential bheyam-

and cl.5.) dabhn/oti- ("to go"

; imperative nuhi-

; see A1., Passive voice dabhyate-

; perfect tense dadābha-,

; d/ambha-[

]

; plural debhur-[

Va1rtt. 4

]

;also dadambhur-and 2.sg. debhitha-or dadambhitha-

; Aorist plural dadabhanta-

; adambhiṣur-

) to hurt, injure, destroy

; to deceive, abandon

: Causal (subjunctive and p. damebh/ayat-;2. sg. yas-, ya-) to destroy

; dambhayati- or dābh-, to impel

; dambkayate-, to accumulate,

: Desiderative d/ipsati- (subjunctive [

] and parasmE-pada d/ipsat-) to intend to injure or destroy

; dhips-, dhīps-, didambhiṣati- Pa1n2. 7-2, 49 and 4, 56 (i, 2, 10

)

दाक्षिणाज

m. inhabitant of the Deccan

दाक्षिणात्य

m. plural inhabitants of the Deccan

दानव्रत

m. plural Name of inhabitants of śāka-dvīpa-,

दण्डक

m. plural the inhabitants of kāraṇya-

देवमिथुन

n. cohabitation of the gods

देवतामिथुन

n. the cohabitation of deities

देवावसथ

m. "habitation of the gods", temple

धान

n. the site of a habitation

धर्मप्रस्थ

m. "habitation of the god dharma-", Name of a place of pilgrimage

दीर्घपटोलिका

f. a kind of cucurbitaceous fruit

दिविचारिन्

m. an inhabitant of the sky

द्रविण

m. plural the inhabitants of a varṣa- in krauñca-dvīpa-

द्रोणक

m. plural "the inhabitants of a valley."Name of a people

द्युचर

mfn. walking or moving in heaven, an inhabitant of heaven

द्युमैथुन

n. cohabitation by day

(see divā-maithunin-).

द्युनिवास

m. inhabitant of heaven, a deity

(also sin-, siddhānta-s.)

गगनगति

m. "moving in the air", a sky-inhabitant

गगनसद्

m. an inhabitant of the air, celestial being

गजाह्वय

m. plural the inhabitants of hāstina-pura-

गम्य

mfn. accessible to men (a woman), fit for cohabitation

गन्धर्व

m. a gandharva- [though in later times the gandharva-s are regarded as a class, yet in

rarely more than one is mentioned;he is designated as the heavenly gandharva-(divy/a g-

),and is also called viśvā-vasu-(

)and vāyu-keśa- (in plural

);his habitation is the sky, or the region of the air and the heavenly waters(

);his especial duty is to guard the heavenly soma-(

) , which the gods obtain through his intervention(

; see

);it is obtained for the human race by indra-, who conquers the gandharva- and takes it by force(

);the heavenly gandharva- is supposed to be a good physician, because the soma- is considered as the best medicine;possibly, however, the word soma- originally denoted not the beverage so called, but the moon, and the heavenly gandharva- may have been the genius or tutelary deity of the moon;in one passage(

) the heavenly gandharva- and the soma- are identified;he is also regarded as one of the genii who regulate the course of the Sun's horses (

; see

);he knows and makes known the secrets of heaven and divine truths generally (

);he is the parent of the first pair of human beings, yama- and yamī-(

) , and has a peculiar mystical power over women and a right to possess them(

);for this reason he is invoked in marriage ceremonies(

);ecstatic states of mind and possession by evil spirits are supposed to be derived from the heavenly gandharva-(see -gṛhīta-, -graha-);the gandharva-s as a class have the same characteristic features as the one gandharva-;they live in the sky(

) , guard the soma-(

),are governed by varuṇa- (just as the āpsarasa-s are governed by soma-)

,know the best medicines(

),regulate the course of the asterisms(

;hence twenty-seven are mentioned

),follow after women and are desirous of intercourse with them(

);as soon as a girl becomes marriageable, she belongs to soma-, the gandharva-s, and agni-(

);the wives of the gandharva-s are the āpsarasa-s(see gandharvāpsar/as-),and like them the gandharva-s are invoked in gambling with dice(

);they are also feared as evil beings together with the rākṣasa-s, kimīdin-s, piśāca-s, etc., amulets being worn as a protection against them(

);they are said to have revealed the veda-s to vāc-(

; see

),and are called the preceptors of the ṛṣi-s(

); purūravas- is called among them(

);in epic poetry the gandharva-s are the celestial musicians or heavenly singers(see

)who form the orchestra at the banquets of the gods, and they belong together with the āpsarasa-s to indra-'s heaven, sharing also in his battles(

etc.; see

);in the more systematic mythology the gandharva-s constitute one of the classes into which the higher creation is divided(id est gods, manes, gandharva-s

;or gods, asura-s, gandharva-s, men

; see

;or gods, men, gandharva-s, āpsarasa-s, sarpa-s, and manes

;for other enumerations see

[

]

etc.);divine and human gandharva-s are distinguished(

;the divine or deva-gandharva-s are enumerated

);another passage names 11 classes of gandharva-s(

);the chief or leader of the gandharva-s is named citra-ratha-(

);they are called the creatures of prajāpati-(

) or of brahmā-(

) or of kaśyapa- (

) or of the muni-s(

) or of prādhā-(

) or of ariṣṭā-(

)or of vāc-(

);with jaina-s the gandharva-s constitute one of the eight classes of the vyantara-s]

गौड

m. plural the inhabitants of that country

गेह

n. (corrupted fr. gṛh/a-), a house, dwelling, habitation

etc.

गेह

n. dual number "the two habitations", the house and the body

घण्टालि

f. Name of several cucurbitaceous plants

घातन

m. Name of an inhabitant of a hell

घोर

m. Name of a cucurbitaceous plant

घोष

m. (plural) the inhabitants of a station of herdsmen

गोकुल

n. a village or tract on the yamunā- (residence of nanda- and of kṛṣṇa- during his youth

;[

] the inhabitants of that place)

गोपालकक्ष

m. plural the inhabitants of that country

(varia lectio -kaccha-)

गोरक्ष

m. a Gorkha or inhabitant of Nepal

ग्राम

m. the collective inhabitants of a place, community, race

etc.

ग्राम

m. plural inhabitants, people

ग्रामचर

m. inhabitant of a village, husbandman

ग्रामद्रुम

m. a single tree in a village held sacred by the inhabitants

ग्रामवास्तव्य

m. the inhabitant of a village, villager

ग्राम्यकोशातकी

f. Name of a cucurbitaceous plant

गृह

m. (m. sg. and plural,in later language m. plural and n. sg.) a house, habitation, home

(mṛn-m/aya g-,"house of earth", grave,

)

(adhar/ād g-,"the lower world",

) etc.

गृह

m. the inhabitants of a house, family

गृहपोतक

m. the site of a habitation

गृहीभू

to become a house or habitation

गुण्डित

mfn. equals karambita-, khacita-

हैमगिरिक

m. plural the inhabitants of hema-giri-

हैमकूट

m. plural the inhabitants of hema-kūṭa-

हैमवत

m. plural the inhabitants of the himālaya- mountains

हैमवतिक

m. plural the inhabitants of the himālaya- mountains

हारव

m. Name of an inhabitant of hell

हस्तिघोषा

f. a kind of Cucurbitaceous plant

हस्तिघोषातकी

f. a kind of Cucurbitaceous plant

हस्तिकोशातकी

f. a kind of Cucurbitaceous plant

हृद्गोलीय

n. plural the inhabitants of the above mountain

जलजाजीव

m. plural "living on fishes", the inhabitants of the east coast

जलौकस्

m. inhabitant of water, aquatic animal

जनालय

m. an inhabitant of the jana-loka-

जानपद

m. inhabitant of the country

(

)

जानपद

m. belonging to or suited for the inhabitants of the country

कब्

cl.1 A1. kabate-, cakabe-, kabitā-, etc., to colour, tinge with various hues

; to praise

(see kav-.)

कचदुग्धिका

f. Cucurbita Hispida

कलिङ्ग

m. an inhabitant of kaliṅga-

कामावचर

m. the gods or inhabitants of the worlds of desire (1. cāturmahārāja-kāyikās-;2. trāyastriṃśās-;3. tuṣitās-;4. yāmās-;5. nirmāṇa-ratayas-;6. paranirmitavaśa-vartinas-)

काम्पिल्यक

m. an inhabitant of kāmpilya-

कन्दफला

f. Name of a cucurbitaceous plant

कण्टफला

f. a sort of Cucurbita

कान्यकुब्जी

f. a princess or a female inhabitant of kānyakubja- commentator or commentary on

[In

wrongly printed kānyākubja-.]

कर्णाट

m. a king or inhabitant of karṇāṭa-

काश्मीर

m. plural the inhabitants of kaśmīra-

काश्मीरक

m. plural the inhabitants of kaśmīra-

कौरुक्षेत्र

m. plural the inhabitants of kuru-kṣetra- (wrong reading kur-),

काय

m. a house, habitation

केरल

m. plural Name of the inhabitants of Malabar

(once keraka-,

)

केरलक

m. plural Name of the inhabitants of Malabar

केतुगण

m. the dwarfish inhabitants of kuśa-dvīpa- (children of jaimini-)

खञ्जनरत

n. the secret pleasures of the yati-s, cohabitation of saints

किम्पाक

m. a Cucurbitaceous plant (of a very bad taste, Trichosanthes palmata)

कोशफला

f. a cucurbitaceous plant (equals pīta-ghoṣā-)

कृष्ण

m. Name of a celebrated Avatar of the god viṣṇu-, or sometimes identified with viṣṇu- himself ([

]) as distinct from his ten Avata1rsAvatars or incarnations (in the earlier legends he appears as a great hero and teacher[

];in the more recent he is deified, and is often represented as a young and amorous shepherd with flowing hair and a flute in his hand;the following are a few particulars of his birth and history as related in

and in the purāṇa-s etc.: vasu-deva-, who was a descendant of yadu- and yayāti-, had two wives, rohiṇī- and devakī-;the latter had eight sons of whom the eighth was kṛṣṇa-; kaṃsa-, king of mathurā- and cousin of devakī-, was informed by a prediction that one of these sons would kill him;he therefore kept vasu-deva- and his wife in confinement, and slew their first six children;the seventh was balarāma- who was saved by being abstracted from the womb of devakī- and transferred to that of rohiṇī-;the eighth was kṛṣṇa- who was born with black skin and a peculiar mark on his breast;his father vasu-deva- managed to escape from mathurā- with the child, and favoured by the gods found a herdsman named nanda- whose wife yaśo-dā- had just been delivered of a son which vasu-deva- conveyed to devakī- after substituting his own in its place. nanda- with his wife yaśo-dā- took the infant kṛṣṇa- and settled first in gokula- or vraja-, and afterwards in vṛndāvana-, where kṛṣṇa- and bala-rāma- grew up together, roaming in the woods and joining in the sports of the herdsmen's sons; kṛṣṇa- as a youth contested the sovereignty of indra-, and was victorious over that god, who descended from heaven to praise kṛṣṇa-, and made him lord over the cattle[

]; kṛṣṇa- is described as sporting constantly with the gopī-s or shepherdesses[

]of whom a thousand became his wives, though only eight are specified, rādhā- being the favourite[

]; kṛṣṇa- built and fortified a city called dvārakā- in Gujarat, and thither transported the inhabitants of mathurā- after killing kaṃsa-; kṛṣṇa- had various wives besides the gopī-s, and by rukmiṇī- had a son pradyumna- who is usually identified with kāma-deva-;with Jains, kṛṣṇa- is one of the nine black vasu-deva-s;with Buddhists he is the chief of the black demons, who are the enemies of buddha- and the white demons)

कृष्टि

f. plural (once only sg.

) men, races of men (sometimes with the epithet m/ānuṣīs-[

] or n/āhuṣīs-[

] or mānav/īs-[

]; see carṣaṇ/i-;originally the word may have meant cultivated ground, then an inhabited land, next its inhabitants, and lastly any race of men; indra- and agni- have the N. r/ājā-or p/atiḥ kṛṣṭīn/ām-;the term p/añca kṛṣṭ/ayas-,perhaps originally designating the five Aryan tribes of the yadu-s, turvaśa-s, druhyu-s, anu-s, and pūru-s, comprehends the whole human race, not only the Aryan tribes)

कृतालय

mfn. one who has taken up his abode in any place (locative case or in compound exempli gratia, 'for example' svarga-k-,an inhabitant of heaven)

etc.

क्षयण

mfn. habitable [? m."a place with tranquil water" commentator or commentary ]

क्षेम

mf(ā-)n. (2. kṣi-) habitable

क्षित्

mfn. in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' "dwelling, inhabitant of (in compound) ", See acyuta--, apsu--, ā--, upa--, giri--, divi--, dhruva--, pari--, bandhu--, vraja-- and sa-kṣ/it-

क्षिति

f. an abode, dwelling, habitation, house (see also uru--and su-kṣit/i-, dhruv/a-.)

क्षितिस्पृश्

m. an inhabitant of the earth

क्षोणी

f.Ved. Nominal verb dual number "the two sets of people" id est the inhabitants of heaven and earth ["heaven and earth"

]

; 99, 6.

क्षुद्रकारलिका

f. a kind of Cucurbitaceous plant

क्ष्वेड

m. a Cucurbitaceous plant (Luffa pentandra or acutangula, = pīta-ghoṣā-)

क्ष्वेड

m. a kind of Cucurbitaceous plant (equals kośātakī-)

कुम्भफला

f. the plant Cucurbita Pepo

कुन्तिसुराष्ट्र

m. plural the kunti-s and the inhabitants of surāṣṭra- gaRa kārtakaujapādi-.

कुरुजाङ्गल

m. plural the inhabitants of that country

कुरुक्षेत्र

m. plural the inhabitants of that country (renowned for their bravery)

कुरुक्षेत्रक

m. plural the inhabitants of the kuru-kṣetra-

लभ्

(confer, compare rabh-) cl.1 A1. (

) labhate- (Epic also ti-and lambhate-; perfect tense lebh/e-, Epic also lalābha-; Aorist alabdha-, alapsata-

; preceding lapsīya-

; future labdhā- grammar; lapsyate-, ti-

etc.; labhiṣyati-

; infinitive mood labdhum-

; ind.p. labdhv/ā-

etc.; -labhya-, -lambham-

etc.; lābham-

), to take, seize, catch ; catch sight of, meet with, find

etc. etc. (with antaram-,to find an opportunity, make an impression, be effective;with avakāśam-,to find scope, be appropriate;with kālam-,to find the right time or moment) ; to gain possession of, obtain, receive, conceive, get, receive ("from" ablative;"as" accusative), recover

(with garbham-,"to conceive an embryo","become pregnant";with padam-,to obtain a footing) ; to gain the power of (doing anything), succeed in, be permitted or allowed to (infinitive mood or dative case exempli gratia, 'for example' labhate draṣṭum-,or darśanāya-,"he is able or allowed to see")

etc. ; to possess, have

; to perceive, know, understand, learn, find out

: Passive voice labhy/ate- (Epic also ti-; Aorist alābhi-or alambhi-,with preposition only alambhi-; confer, compare

), to be taken or caught or met with or found or got or obtained

etc. ; to be allowed or permitted (infinitive mood sometimes with pass. sense exempli gratia, 'for example' nādharmo labhyate kartum-,"injustice ought not to be done", confer, compare above)

; to follow, result

; to be comprehended by (ablative)

: Causal lambhayati-, te- (Aorist alalambhat-), to cause to take or receive or obtain, give, bestow (generally with two accusative;rarely with accusative and instrumental case = to present with;in

with two accusative and instrumental case; confer, compare

)

etc. ; to get, procure (confer, compare lambhita-) ; to find out, discover

; to cause to suffer

; Desiderative l/ipsate- (mc. also ti-

līpsate-), to wish to seize or take or catch or obtain or receive (with accusative or genitive case;"from" ablative)

: Intensive lālabhyate-, lālambhīti- or lālabdhi- grammar ([ Greek , ; Latin labor; Lithuanian la4bas, l/obis-.])

लम्ब्

(confer, compare 1. ramb-) cl.1 A1. (

) l/ambate- (mc. also ti-; perfect tense lalambe-

etc.; Aorist alambiṣṭa- grammar; future lambitā-

; lambiṣyati-

; infinitive mood lambitum-

; ind.p. -lambya-

), to hang down, depend, dangle, hang from or on (locative case)

etc. ; to sink, go down, decline, fall, set (as the sun)

etc. ; to be fastened or attached to, cling to, hold or rest on (locative case)

; to fall or stay behind, be retarded

; to tag, loiter, delay, tarry

: Causal lambayati- (Aorist alalambat-), to cause to hang down or depend, let down

; to hang up, suspend

; to cause to be attached or joined

; to stretch out, extend (the hand) for (dative case)

; (prob.) to depress, discourage

(Calcutta edition laṅghayitvā-for lambayitvā-): Desiderative lilambiṣate-, to be about to sink or decline

varia lectio ([ confer, compare Greek ; Latin labi,labare,labes; German lappa,Lappen; English lap,limp.])

लम्बित

mfn. equals vi-lambita-, slow (of time in music)

लाटजन

m. an inhabitant of lāṭa- or the people of lāṭa-

लय

m. (in music) time (regarded as of 3 kinds, viz. druta-,"quick", madhya-,"mean or moderate", and vilambita-,"slow"),

etc.

लोक

m. (also plural) the inhabitants of the world, mankind, folk, people (sometimes opp. to"king")

etc.

लोकिन्

m. plural the inhabitants of the universe

लुभ्

cl.6 P. lubhati- (only

) or cl.4 P.

l/ubhyati- (perfect tense lulubhe-

; Aorist alubhat-,or alobhīt- grammar; future lobdhā-,or lobhitā-, lobhiṣyati-

; infinitive mood lobdhum-

; ind.p. lobhitvā- lubhitvā-, lubdhvā- grammar), to be perplexed or disturbed, become disordered, go astray

; to desire greatly or eagerly, long for, be interested in (dative case or locative case)

etc. ; to entice, allure

: Causal lobh/ayati-, te- (Aorist alūlubhat-

; Passive voice lobhyate-

), to confound, bewilder, perplex, derange

; to cause to desire or long for, excite lust, allure, entice, attract

etc. ; to efface

(confer, compare Causal of lup-): Desiderative of Causal lulobhayiṣati-, see, ā- - lubh-: Desiderative lulubhiṣati- or lulobhiṣati- grammar : Intensive lolubhyate- (grammar also lolobdhi-), to have a vehement desire for (locative case)

[ confer, compare Latin lubet,libet,libido; Gothic liufs; German liob,lieb,lieben; Anglo-Saxon leo4f; English lief,love.]

मा

a particle of prohibition or negation = Greek , most commonly joined with the Subjunctive id est the augmentless form of a past tense (especially of the Aorist exempli gratia, 'for example' m/ā no vadhīr indra-,do not slay us, O indra-

; mā bhaiṣīḥ-or mā bhaiḥ-,do not be afraid

; tapovana-vāsinām uparodho mā bhūt-,let there not be any disturbance of the inhabitants of the sacred grove

;often also with sma- exempli gratia, 'for example' mā sma gamaḥ-,do not go

confer, compare

in the sense of,"that not, lest"also yathā mā- exempli gratia, 'for example' yathā mā vo mṛtyuḥ pari-vyatkā iti-,that death may not disturb you,

;or māyathā- exempli gratia, 'for example' mā bhūt kālātyayo yathā-,lest there be any loss of time

; mā na-with Aorist subjunctive = Ind, without a negative exempli gratia, 'for example' mā dviṣo na vadhīr mama-,do slay my enemies

confer, compare

;rarely with the augmentless imperfect tense with or without sma- exempli gratia, 'for example' maīnam abhibhāṣathāḥ-,do not speak to him

; mā sma karot-,let him not do it

;exceptionally also with the Ind. of the Aorist exempli gratia, 'for example', mā-, kālas tvām aty-agāt-,may not the season pass by thee

; confer, compare

)

माधुमत

m. plural the inhabitants of kaśmīra-

मध्यदेश

m. plural the inhabitants of the midland country

मद्रक

m. (sg.) a prince or an inhabitant of madra-

महाचीन

m. plural the inhabitants of that country

महाराजिकदेव

m. plural (with Buddhists) Name of a class of gods (the inhabitants of the lowest heaven)

महीतलविसर्पिन्

m. "earth-walker", an inhabitant of the earth

मैथिलिक

m. plural the inhabitants of mithilā-

मालव

m. Name of a country (Malwa in central India; plural its inhabitants)

etc.

मलय

m. of the country Malabar and (plural) its inhabitants

मांसफल

m. Cucurbita Citrullus

मन्दिर

n. any waiting or abiding-place, habitation, dwelling, house, palace, temple, town, camp etc. (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' dwelling in)

etc.

मणित

n. an inarticulate sound said to be uttered (by women

) during cohabitation, murmur libidinosum

मर

m. plural the inhabitants of hell

मर्त्यनिवासिन्

m. a mortal inhabitant (of the world), man, mankind

मरु

m. plural Name of a country (Marwar) and its inhabitants

[ confer, compare Latin mare(?); Anglo-Saxon mo7r; German and English moor.]

मरुभव

m. the inhabitant of a desert

मरुजुष्

m. the inhabitant of a desert

मरुस्थित

m. the inhabitant of a desert

माथुर

m. an inhabitant of mathurā-

माथुरक

m. plural the inhabitants of mathurā-

मौल

m. plural aboriginal inhabitants who have emigrated

माविलम्बम्

bitam- See under 1. mā-, .

मेरुधामन्

mfn. having meru- for a habitation (said of śiva-)

मिथिल

m. plural Name of a people (prob. the inhabitants of mithilā-)

मिथुनव्रतिन्

mfn. devoted to cohabitation, practising copulation

मूल

n. an old or hereditary servant, a native inhabitant

नागरिक

m. inhabitant of a town, (especially) chief of a town, police-officer

(

raka-)

नैमिष

m. plural the inhabitants of the naimiṣa- wood

नैमिषीय

m. plural the inhabitants of naimiṣa-

नैरयिक

mfn. hellish, an inhabitant of hell

नारक

m. inhabitant of hell

नरकार्णव

m. an inhabitant of hell

नारकिक

m. an inhabitant of hell

नासायोनि

m. a weak or passionless man who has no desire for cohabitation without smelling the genitals

नवराष्ट्र

n. plural its inhabitants

निकाय

m. habitation, dwelling, hiding-place

(see

)

निकेत

m. a house, habitation

etc.

निकेतन

n. a house, mansion, habitation, temple,

etc.

निरयिन्

m. an inhabitant of hell

निर्विचिकित्स

mf(ā-)n. indubitable

निशान्त

n. a house, dwelling, habitation

नीवर

m. an inhabitant

निवास

m. dwelling-place, abode, house, habitation, night-quarters

etc.

निवासभूय

n. habitation or inhabiting

निवसन

n. dwelling, habitation

निवसति

f. habitation, abode

निवासिन्

m. an inhabitant

निवेश

m. a dwelling-place, habitation of any kind (as a house, camp, palace etc.)

etc. (śam-kṛ-,to take up one's residence, settle, encamp)

नियतमैथुन

mfn. abstaining from cohabitation

ओड्र

m. plural the inhabitants of that country

etc.

पांसुराष्ट्र

m. plural its inhabitants (Bombay edition pāṇḍu-r-)

पञ्चनद

m. a prince of pañca-nada-

(plural the inhabitants of pañca-nada-

)

पाञ्चनद

m. plural the inhabitants of the Panjab

पारियात्रिक

m. an inhabitant of the pāri- range

पार्थिव

m. an inhabitant of the earth

पस्त्यावत्

mfn. having a fixed habitation (m.a wealthy man)

पस्त्यावत्

mfn. forming or offering a fixed habitation

पातालनिलय

m. an inhabitant of pātāla-, an asura-

पातालौकस्

m. an inhabitant of pātāla-, an asura-

पाटलिपुत्र

m. plural the inhabitants of this city

पिण्डी

f. Cucurbita Lagenaria

प्राच्य

m. (plural) the inhabitants of the east, the eastern country

etc.

प्राच्य

m. (plural) the inhabitants of the east, the eastern country

etc.

प्रतिबिम्बय

Nom. P. yati-, to reflect, mirror

(see bita-above) .

प्रतिवसति

ind. in every habitation or house

प्रयाग

m. "place of sacrifice", Name of a celebrated place of pilgrimage (now called Allahabad) at the confluence of the gaṅgā- and yamunā- with the supposed subterranean sarasvatī- (also -ka-

; see tri-veṇī-; in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' also in deva--pilgrimage, rudra--pilgrimage, karṇa- pilgrimage and nanda--pilgrimage)

etc. (see

;as Name of a country

; plural the inhabitants of prayāga-

)

पुरौकस्

m. an inhabitant of a town or of tripura-

पूर्वनिवास

m. "former habitation", a former existence

पूर्वनिवासानुस्मृति

f. "recollection of former habitations", reminiscence of formerly existence (one of the 10 powers of a buddha-)

पुष्कलावत

m. an inhabitant of puṣkalā-vatī-

(also taka-)

पुष्कर

m. of the inhabitants of kuśa-dvīpa- corresponding to Brahmans

पुत्रनिवेशन

n. the habitation or abode of a son

रैवतक

m. Name of a mountain (equals raivata-)

(plural the inhabitants of it

)

राष्ट्रवासिन्

m. an inhabitant of a kingdom, subject

राष्ट्रिक

m. an inhabitant of a kingdom, subject

रातिकुल

n. a house (whose inhabitants are) disposed to give (alms),

रौमक

mfn. Roman, spoken by the inhabitants of the Roman empire

रिभ्

or rebh- cl.1 P. r/ebhati- (according to to

A1. te-; perfect tense rirebha-

; Aorist arebhīt- grammar; future rebhitā-, rebhiṣyati-

), to crackle (as fire)

; to creak (as a car)

; to murmur (as fluids)

; to chatter, talk aloud

; to shout, sing, praise

रोहितगिरीय

m. plural its inhabitants

ऋषभ

m. plural the inhabitants of krauñca-dvīpa-

ऋतुसमावेशन

n. cohabitation during the fortnight after menstruation,

सागरक

m. plural "inhabitants of the sea-coast", Name of a people

शैलवास

m. a mountain-habitation

सैन्धव

m. (plural) the inhabitants of Sindh

etc.

सैन्धवक

m. a miserable inhabitant of sindhu-

शाकल

m. the inhabitants of the town śākala-

साकेत

m. plural the inhabitants of sāketa-

सलोक

mfn. with the people or inhabitants

समाश्रय

m. dwelling-place, habitation, home (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' ="living or dwelling or situated or being in")

सम्भव

m. (or s/am-bhava-) (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' f(ā-).) being or coming together, meeting, union, intercourse (especially sexual intercourse, cohabitation)

समिद्धशरन

mfn. having (its) habitations set on fire (as a town)

संकर

m. mixing together, commingling, intermixture, confusion (especially of castes or races, proceeding from the intermarriage of a man with a woman of a higher caste or from the promiscuous intercourse of the four tribes, and again from the indiscriminate cohabitation of their descendants; see yoni-s-)

etc.

संनिवास

m. common habitation, a nest

संस्थ

m. a dweller, resident, inhabitant

संस्थान

n. abode, dwelling-place, habitation

etc.

संस्त्याय

m. a habitation, house,

सामुद्रनिष्कुट

m. plural inhabitants of the coast (a people; see samudra-n-)

समुपभोग

m. cohabitation, sexual union

समुपवेशन

n. a habitation, building

संवास

m. cohabitation, sexual connexion with (compound)

शरण

n. (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' f(ā-).), shelter, place of shelter or refuge or rest, hut, house, habitation, abode, lair (of an animal), home, asylum

etc.

सर्वर्तुक

mfn. (va-+ ṛt-) adapted to every season, habitable in every seasons, existing in every seasons

etc.

सौभनिवासिन्

m. plural the inhabitants of Saubha

सौभेय

m. an inhabitant of saubha-

सौराष्ट्र

m. plural the inhabitants of Surat

सौराष्ट्रक

m. plural the inhabitants of saurāṣṭra-

सौराष्ट्रिक

m. plural the inhabitants of Surat

सिंहपुरक

m. an inhabitant of that town

सिंहविजृम्भित

m. (with Buddhists) a kind of samādhi-

(see -viṣkambhita-).

सिंहविष्कम्भित

m. (with Buddhists) a kind of samādhi-

(perhaps only wrong reading for -vijṛmbhita-).

सिन्धु

m. the country around the indu-s (commonly called Sindh; plural"the inhabitants of Sindh")

etc.

स्कम्भ्

or skabh- (prob. a mere phonetic variety of stambh- q.v;in native lists written skanbh-) cl.5.9. P. (

) skabhn/oti-, skabhn/āti- (according to to

also cl.1 A1. skambhate-; pr. p. skabhnuv/at-

; skabh/at-

; perfect tense cask/ambha-,2. dual number -skambh/athuḥ-

; parasmE-pada caskabhān/a-

; Aorist askambhīt- grammar; future skambhitā-, skambhiṣyati-

; infinitive mood skambhitum-

; -sk/abhe-

; ind.p. skabhitv/ī-

) to prop, support, make firm, fix, establish

: Causal skambhayati- (Aorist acaskambhat-, grammar;See skambhita-) or skabhāy/ati- (

Va1rtt. 1

;See skabhita-), to prop, support, fix

; to impede, check

श्रमघ्नी

f. the fruit of Cucurbita Lagenaria

श्रम्भ्

(also written srambh-;generally found with the prefix vi-;See vi-śrambh-,and see also ni-śṛmbh/a-, pra-śrabdhi-) cl.1 A1. śrambhate- (grammar also perfect tense śaśrambhe- future śrambhitā-etc.) , to be careless or negligent

; to trust, confide,

श्रोणापरान्त

m. Name of a town ( śroṇāparāntaka ta-ka- m. plural its inhabitants)

स्तम्भ्

or stabh- (connected with skambh- q.v;in native lists written stanbh-) cl.5.9. P. (

) stabhn/oti-, stabhn/āti- (confer, compare

), or cl.1 A1. (

) st/ambhate- (pr. p. also stambhat-

, stabhamāna-[ q.v ]

; perfect tense tast/ambha-, mbhat-, tastabh/uḥ-, parasmE-pada tastabhv/as-, vānd-

; tastabhān/a-, tastambhe-

; Aorist /astambhīt-; astāmpsīt-

; astabhat- grammar; future stambhitā-, bhiṣyati-

; infinitive mood stabdhum-

; ind.p. stabdhv/ā-

etc.; stambhitvā-

; -st/abhya-and -stambham-

), to fix firmly, support, sustain, prop (especially the heavens)

; to support or hold up by contact with, reach up to (accusative)

; to stop, stop up, arrest, make stiff or immovable, paralyze

etc. ; (A1.) to rest or lean on (locative case)

; to become stiff or immovable

; to become solid

: Passive voice stabhyate- (Aorist astambhi-), to be firmly fixed or supported or propped etc.

etc.: Causal stabhāy/ati-, to make firm, support

; to stop, arrest

; stambhayati-, te- (Aorist atastambhat-), to fix, establish, erect

etc. ; to make stiff or rigid, paralyze

; to make solid

; to stop, arrest (also by magic) , suppress, check, restrain

: Desiderative tistambhiṣati- grammar : Intensive tāstabhyate-

[ confer, compare Greek , ; Lithuanian stambras,stimbras; German stampfo7n,stampfen; English stamp,stump.]

स्थानासनविहारवत्

mfn. (a pupil) occupying the habitation and seat and place of recreation (of his preceptor)

स्थापन

n. a dwelling, habitation

स्तिमित

mfn. fixed, motionless (see stambhita-)

etc.

स्त्रैराजक

m. plural the inhabitants of strī-rājya-

स्तुभ्

(connected with1. stu-and stumbh-) cl.1 P. (

) st/obhati- (only in present tense base;3. sg. stobdhi-

; parasmE-pada A1. -stubhāna-

; grammar also perfect tense tuṣṭubhe-; future stobhitā-etc.), to utter a joyful sound, hum, make a succession of exclamations, shout (especially applied to the chanted interjections in a sāman-)

; cl.1 A1. stobhate-, to pause, stop, cause to stop, paralyze etc. (stambhe-)

: Causal stobhayati- (Aorist atuṣṭubhat-), to praise in successive exclamations, celebrate

[ confer, compare English stop.]

शुभ्

(or 1. śumbh-) cl.1 A1. or cl.6 P. (

) ś/obhate-, śumbh/ati- or ś/umbhati- (Epic also śobhati-,and Vedic or Veda ś/umbhate-;3. sg. ś/obhe-

; perfect tense śuśobha-, śuśubhe-

etc.; śuśumbha- grammar; Aorist, aśubhat-, aśobhiṣṭa-, aśumbhīt-

; parasmE-pada ś/umbhāna-, śubhān/a-

; future śobhitā-or śumbhitā- grammar; śobhiṣyati-

; śumbhiṣyati- grammar; infinitive mood śubh/e-, śobhāse-

; śobhitum- grammar), to beautify, embellish, adorn, beautify one's self. (A1.) look beautiful or handsome, shine, be bright or splendid ; (with iva-or yathā-,"to shine or look like";with na-,"to look bad, have a bad appearance, appear to disadvantage")

etc. ; to prepare, make fit or ready, (A1.) prepare one's self.

; (ś/umbhate- according to to some) to flash or flit id est glide rapidly past or along

(see śubhān/a-, śumbh/amāna-,and pra-śumbh-) ; (śumbhati-) wrongly for śundhati- (to be connected with śudh-,to purify)

; (śumbhati-) to harm, injure

(in this sense rather to be regarded as a second śumbh- see 2. śumbh-, ni-śumbh-): Passive voice Aorist aśobhi-tarām-

: Causal śobhayati- (Aorist aśūśubhat-; see śobhita-), to cause to shine beautify, ornament, decorate

etc. ; (śubh/ayati-, te-) to ornament, decorate, (A1.) decorate one's self.

; (only pr. p. śubh/ayat-), to fly rapidly along

: Desiderative śuśobhiṣate- (according to to grammar also ti-,and śuśubhiṣati-, te-), to wish to prepare or make ready

: Intensive śośubhyate- (grammar also śośobdhi-), to shine brightly or in tensely, be very splendid or beautiful

सुन्दरीमन्दिर

n. women's habitation or apartments

सुराष्ट्र

m. plural the country or the inhabitants of Surat

etc.

सुराष्ट्रावन्ति

m. plural the inhabitants or the countries of Surat and avanti-

शूर्पारक

m. Name of a country and (plural) its inhabitants

सुषिर

mf(ā-)n. slow in articulation (equals vilambita-) idem or 'mf(ā-)n. having spaces '

सुवास्तु

m. plural the inhabitants of the country near the river suvāstu-

स्वदेश

m. plural the inhabitants of one's own country, one's own subjects

तैलङ्ग

m. plural its inhabitants

तैलस्पन्दा

f. Cucurbita Pepo

तक्षशिल

m. plural the inhabitants of lā-

(in compound)

ताम्रपर्णीय

m. an inhabitant of Ceylon, especially a Buddhist.

त्रैपुर

m. plural the inhabitants of Tri-pura

त्रैपुर

m. the inhabitants of tripurī- or the cedi-s

त्रैविक्रम

m. a kind of cohabitation

त्रैविष्टप

m. plural "inhabitants of tri-v- ", the gods

त्रिलोक

m. sg. the inhabitants of the 3 worlds

उभ्

cl.9 P. ubhnāti- (imperfect tense 2. sg. ubhn/ās-) to hurt, kill

: cl.6 P. ubhati-, umbhati-, umbhāṃ-cakāra-, umbhitā-, aumbhīt-, to cover over, fill with

vArttika on

उदीच्य

m. plural the inhabitants of that country

etc.

उपसत्तृ

m. one who has seated himself near or at (especially at the domestic fire), any person who is domiciled, the inhabitant of a house (with and without gṛha-)

उरुक्षय

m. a spacious dwelling, wide habitation

उरुक्षिति

f. spacious dwelling or habitation

उत्कल

m. plural the inhabitants of the above country.

वैभीत

mfn. (fr. vi-bhīta-) derived from or made of Terminalia Bellerica

वैदिश

m. plural the inhabitants of vidiśā-

वनग

m. inhabitant of a forest

वनगोचर

mf(ā-)n. dwelling in a forest, denizen or inhabitant of forests (said of men and animals)

etc.

वनालय

m. forest-habitation

वनेचर

mf(ī-)n. wandering or dwelling in a wood, inhabitant of a forest (applied to men, animals and demons)

etc.

वङ्ग

m. Bengal proper or the eastern parts of the modern province (plural its inhabitants)

etc.

वारिनाथ

m. the habitation of the nāga- or serpent race

वर्षपुरुष

m. an inhabitant of a varṣa-

वरुणालय

m. " varuṇa-'s habitation", the sea, ocean

वास

m. (fr.5. vas-) staying, remaining (especially "overnight"), abiding, dwelling, residence, living in (locative case or compound; see

), abode, habitation

etc.

वासक

mf(ikā-)n. (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound') abode, habitation

वास्तव्य

mfn. settled, resident, an inhabitant

वास्तु

n. (m.only in

) the site or foundation of a house, site, ground, building or dwelling-place, habitation, homestead, house

etc.

वत्स

m. the inhabitants of the country called vatsa-

वेश्मभू

f. building-ground, the site of a habitation

विदर्भ

m. plural the inhabitants of vidarbha- and also the country itself

विन्ध्यान्तवासिन्

m. plural the inhabitants of the inner vindhya-

विषयवासिन्

mfn. inhabiting a country (anya-viṣaya-v-,the inhabitant of another country)

वितस्ता

f. Name of a river in the Panjab (now called Jhelum or Bitasta or Bihat = the Hydaspes or Bidaspes [Ptolemy] of the Greeks;it rises in Kashmir; see pañca-nada-)

etc. ( vitastātva -tva- n.

)

वितस्ताख्य

n. Name of the habitation of the serpent-demon takṣaka- in kaśmīra-

विवरेसद्

mfn. abiding in intermediate space, an inhabitant of the sky

वृजन

n. (once v/ṛj-) an enclosure, cleared or fenced or fortified place (especially "sacrificial enclosure";but also "pasture or camping ground, settlement, town or village and its inhabitants")

वृत्ति

f. mode or measure of pronunciation and recitation (said to be threefold, viz. vilambitā-, madhyamā-,and drutā- q.v)

यात्य

m. (fr. Causal of2. yat-) "to be tormented", an inhabitant of hell

Apte Search

154 results


akṣaya	अक्षय a. [नास्ति क्षयो यस्य] 1 Undecaying, exempt from decay, imperishable, undying, unfailing, inexhaustible; सदोपयोगे$पि गुरुस्त्वमक्षयो निधिः Śi 1.28; स संधार्यः प्रयत्नेन स्वर्गमक्षयमिच्छता Ms.3.79; यज्ञनिर्वृत्तिमक्षयां 4.23; गया- यामक्षयवटे पितॄणां दत्तमक्षयं Vāyu P.; त्रिसाधना शक्तिरिवार्थमक्षयं R.3. 13; मुनिभिः सार्धमक्षयैः Rām.7.18.12; Mb.9.176. -2 Poor, without house or habitation, such as a hermit or संन्यासिन् (क्षयो वासः तच्छून्यः अनिकेतनः संन्यासी दरिद्रो वा.) -यः 1 The Supreme Spirit परमात्मन्. -2 N. of the 2th year in the cycle of Jupiter. -या [अक्षयं पुण्यं यत्रास्ति-अच्] N. of a day which is said to confer undying religious merit; अमैव सोमवारेण रविवारेण सप्तमी । चतुर्थी भौमवारेण अक्षयादपि चाक्षया. -Comp. -गुणः, -पुरुहूतः Śiva (possessing imperishable qualities). -तृतीया the festival falling on the _x001F_1third day of the bright half of Vaiśākha (the first day of (सत्ययुग), which is said to secure permanence to all actions performed on that day (वैशाखे मासि राजेन्द्र शुक्ल- पक्षे तृतीयिका । अक्षया सा तिथिः प्रोक्ता कृत्तिकारोहिणीयुता ॥ तस्यां दानादिकं सर्वपक्षयं समुदाहृतम्). -नीवी f. a permanent endowment. Buddhist Inser. -मतिः name of a Buddhist. -लोकः the heaven.

agamyā	अगम्या A woman not deserving to be approached (for cohabitation), one of the low castes; ˚म्यां च स्त्रियं गत्वा, ˚गमनं चैव जातिभ्रंशकराणि वा &c. -Comp. -गमनम् illicit intercourse. -गामिन् a. practising illicit intercourse. -गमनीय a. relating to illicit intercourse; ˚नीये तु (पापम्) व्रतैरेभिरपानुदेत् Ms.11.169.

ativāhita	अतिवाहित p. p. Spent, passed. -तः An inhabitant of the lower world. -तम् (सूक्ष्मशरीरम्) = अतिवाह. q. v.

atyartha	अत्यर्थ a. [अतिक्रान्तः अर्थम् अनुरूपस्वरूपम्] Beyond the proper worth or measure, excessive, very great, intense, exorbitant; ˚तापात् M.2.12. -र्थम् adv. Very much, exceedingly, excessively; अत्यर्थं परदास्यमेत्य निपुणं नीतौ मनो दीयते Mu.2.5; प्रियो हि ज्ञानिनोत्यर्थमहं स च मम प्रियः Bg.7.17; oft. in comp.; ˚वेदनः A type of the elephant having extreme sensibility; प्राजनाङ्कुशदण्डेभ्यो दूरादुद्विजते हि यः । स्पृष्टो वा व्यथते$त्यर्थं स गजो$त्यर्थवेदनः ॥ Mātaṅga L.8.19. ˚संपीडितः Ś.7.11. excessively pinched; ˚क्रुद्ध, ˚तृषित &c.

adhivāsaḥ	अधिवासः 1 Abode, residence; dwelling; सतत˚सुभगा- पिंतस्तनम् Māl.5.8; तस्यापि स एव गिरिरधिवासः K.137; लक्ष्मीभृतो$म्भोधितटाधिवासान् Śi.3.71 situated on; settlement, habitation. वसन्ति मन्नियोगेन अधिवासं च राक्षसाः Rām.3.36.4. -2 An inhabitant, neighbour. -3 Obstinate pertinacity in making a demand, sitting without food before a person's house till he ceases to oppose or refuse it (Mar. धरणें). -4 [अधिवासयति देवता अनेन, करणे घञ्] Consecration of an image especially before the commencement of a sacrificial rite; see अधिवासनम् also. शुद्धाधिवासाश्च विशुद्धसत्त्वाः Bu. Ch.1.39. -5 A garment, mantle (अधीवासः also). -6 A birth-place; जातिश्रेण्यधि- वासानां कुलधर्माश्च सर्वतः । वर्जयन्ति च ये धर्मं तेषां धर्मो न विद्यते ॥ Mb.12.36.19.

adhyās	अध्यास् 2 A. 1 (a) To lie down, settle upon; occupy, dwell in (as a seat or habitation:; seat oneself in or upon, enter upon, get into (as a path &c.) (with acc. of place); त्वरिततरमध्यास्यतामियं वनस्थली K.28;36,4; पर्णशालामध्यास्य R.1.95; द्वितीयमाश्रममध्या- सितुं समयः V.5; द्वारदेशमध्यास्ते Dk.3 is waiting at the door; R.2.17;4.74;6.1;12.85;13.22,76;15. 93; Me.78; Bk.1.5; Ms.7.77; अये सिंहासनमध्यास्ते वृषलः Mu.3; भगवत्या प्राश्निकपदमध्यासितव्यम् M.1 occupy the seat of judge, accept the office of judge. (b) To take possession of, grasp, seize; धेन्वा तदध्यासितकातराक्ष्या R.2. 52 with eyes tremulous on account of her being seized by him (अध्यासितम् = आक्रमणम्). (c) To resort to, inhabit; यदध्यासितमर्हद्भिस्तद्धि प्रचक्षते Ku.6.56. -2 To live in conjugal relation; cohabit with. -3 To be directed or fixed upon. -4 To rule, govern, influence; affect, concern (mostly Ved.). -Caus. To cause one to sit down upon; भवन्तमध्यासयन्नासनम् Bk.2.46.

antar	अन्तर् ind. [अम्-अरन्-तुडागमश्च Uṇ.5.6, अमेस्तुट् च] 1 (Used as a prefix to verbs and regarded as a preposition or गति) (a) In the middle, between; in, into, inside; ˚हन्, ˚धा, ˚गम्, ˚भू, ˚इ, ˚ली &c. (b) Under. -2 (Used adverbially) (a) Between, betwixt, amongst, within; in the middle or interior, inside (opp. वहिः); अदह्यतान्तः R.2.32 burnt within himself, at heart; अन्तरेव विहरन् दिवानिशम् R.19.6 in the palace, in the harem; so ˚भिन्नं भ्रमति हृदयम् Māl. 5.2; अन्तर्विभेद Dk.13; यदन्तस्तन्न जिह्वायाम् Pt.4.88; अन्तर्यश्च मृग्यते V.1.1 internally, in the mind. (b) By way of seizing or holding; अन्तर्हत्वा गतः (हतं परिगृह्य). -3 (As a separable preposition) (a) In, into, between, in the middle, inside, within, (with loc.); निवसन्नन्तर्दारुणि लङ्घ्यो वह्निः Pt.1.31; अन्तरादित्ये Ch. Up., अन्तर्वेश्मनि Ms.7 223; Y.3.31; अप्स्वन्तरमृतमप्सु Rv.1. 23.19. अप्सु मे सोमो$ब्रवीदन्तर् विश्वानि भेषजा ibid. (b) Between (with acc.) Ved. अन्तर्मही बृहती रोदसीमे Rv. 7.87.2; अन्तर्देवान् मर्त्यांश्च 8.2.4; हिरण्मय्योर्ह कुश्योरन्तर- वहित आस Śat. Br. (c) In, into, inside, in the interior, in the midst (with gen.); प्रतिबलजलधेरन्तरौर्वायमाणे Ve. 3.7; अन्तःकञ्चुकिकञ्चुकस्य Ratn.2.3; बहिरन्तश्च भूतानाम् Bg.13.15; त्वमग्ने सर्वभूतानामन्तश्चरसि साक्षिवत् Y.2.14; लघुवृत्तितया भिदां गतं बहिरन्तश्च नृपस्य मण्डलम् Ki.2.53; अन्तरीपं यदन्तर्वारिणस्तटम् Ak.; oft. in comp. at the end; कूपान्तः पतितः Pt.5; सभान्तः साक्षिणः प्राप्तान् Ms.8.79; दन्तान्तरधि- ष्ठितम् Ms.5.141 between the teeth; उत्पित्सवो$न्तर्नदभर्तुः Śi.3.77; also in compound with a following word; अहं सदा शरीरान्तर्वासिनी ते सरस्वती Ks.4.11. -4 It is frequently used as the first member of compounds in the sense of 'internally', 'inside', 'within', 'in the interior', 'having in the interior', 'filled with', 'having concealed within', or in the sense of 'inward', 'internal', 'secret', 'hidden' &c., forming Adverbial, Bahuvrīhi or Tatpuruṣa compounds; कुन्दमन्तस्तुषारम् (Bah. comp.) Ś.5.19 filled with dew; ˚स्तोयम् (Bah. comp.) Me.66; अन्तर्गिरि (Adv. comp.) Ki.1.34; ज्वलयति तनूमन्तर्दाहः (Tat. comp.) U.3.31; so ˚कोपः, ˚कोणः, ˚आकूतम् &c. -5 It is also supposed to be a particle of assent (स्वीकारार्थक). (Note. In comp. the र् of अन्तर् is changed to a visarga before hard consonants, as अन्तः- करणम्, अन्तःस्थ &c.). [cf. L. inter; Zend antare; Goth. undar; Pers. andar; Gr. entos;]. -Comp. -अंसः the breast (= अंतरा-अंस q. v.). -अग्निः inward fire, the fire which stimulates digestion; दीप्तान्तरग्निपरिशुद्धकोष्ठः Susr. -अंङ्ग a. 1 inward, internal, comprehended, included (with abl.); त्रयमन्तरङ्ग पूर्वेभ्यः Pat Sūtra. -2 proximate, related to, essential to or referring to the essential part of the अङ्ग or base of a word (opp. बहिरङ्ग); धातूपसर्गयोः कार्यमन्तरङ्गम् P.VIII.3.74 Sk. -3 dear, most beloved (अत्यन्तप्रिय); स्वपिति सुखमिदा- नीमन्तरङ्गः कुरङ्गः Ś.4.v.l. (-अङ्गम्) 1 the inmost limb or organ, the heart, mind; सन्तुष्टान्तरङ्गः Dk.11; ˚वृत्ति 21; the interior. -2 an intimate friend, near or confidential person (forming, as it were, part of oneself); मदन्तरङ्गभूताम् Dk.81,93,11; राजान्तरङ्गभावेन 135; अन्तरङ्गेषु राज्यभारं समर्प्य*** 159. -3 an essential or indispensable part, as श्रवण, मनन & निदिध्यासन in realizing Brahman. -4 What is intimately connected or related; अन्तरङ्गबहिरङ्ग- योरन्तरङ्ग बलीयः ŚB. on MS.12.2.29. -अवयव an inner part; P.V.4.62. -आकाशः the ether or Brahman that resides in the heart of man (a term often occurring in the Upaniṣads). -आकूतम् secret or hidden intention. -आगमः an additional augment between two letters, -आगारम् the interior of a house; स्त्रीनक्तमन्तरा- गारबहिःशत्रुकृतांस्तथा Y.2.31. -आत्मन् m. (त्मा) 1 the inmost spirit or soul, the soul or mind; also the internal feelings, the heart, अङ्गुष्ठमात्रपुरुषोन्तरात्मा Śvet.; नास्य प्रत्यक- रोद्वीर्यं विक्लवेनान्तरात्मना Rām.6.13.28. गतिमस्यान्तरात्मनः Ms.6.73; जीवसंज्ञोन्तरात्मान्यः सहजः सर्वदेहिनाम् 12.13; मद्- गतेनान्तरात्मना Bg.6.47 with the heart fixed on me; जातो ममायं विशदः प्रकामं ...... अन्तरात्मा Ś.4.22, U.3.38, प्रायः सर्वो भवति करुणावृत्तिरार्द्रान्तरात्मा Me.95. -2 (In phil.) the inherent supreme spirit or soul (residing in the interior of man); अन्तरात्मासि देहिनाम् Ku.6.21. -आपणः a market in the heart (inside) of a town. -आय, -आल; See s. v. -आराम a. rejoicing in oneself, finding pleasure in his soul or heart; यो$न्तःसुखोन्तरारामस्तथान्तर्जर्यो- तिरेव सः Bg.5.24. -इन्द्रियम् an internal organ or sense. -उष्यम् Ved. a secret abode. -करणम् the internal organ; the heart, soul; the seat of thought and feeling, thinking faculty, mind, conscience; प्रमाणं ˚प्रवृत्तयः Ś.1.22; सबाह्य ˚णः अन्तरात्मा V.4 the soul in all its senses external and internal, the inner and outer man; दयार्द्रभावमाख्यातमन्तःकरणैर्विशङ्कैः R.2.11. According to the Vedānta अन्तःकरण is of four kinds : मनो बुद्धिरहङ्कार- श्चित्तं करणमान्तरम् । संशयो निश्चयो गर्वः स्मरणं विषया इमे ॥ अन्तःकरणं त्रिविधम् Sāṅkhya 33, i. e. बुद्धयहङ्कारमनांसि; सान्तःकरणा बुद्धिः 35, i. e. अहङ्कारमनःसहिता. -कल्पः a certain number of years (with Buddhists). -कुटिल a. inwardly crooked (fig. also); fraudulent. (-लः) a conch-shell. -कृ(क्रि)मिः a disease of worms in the body. -कोटरपुष्पी = अण्ड- कोटरपुष्पी. -कोपः 1 internal disturbance; H.3. -2 inward wrath, secret anger. -कोशम् the interior of a storeroom. -गङ्गा the secret or hidden Ganges (supposed to communicate uuderground with a secret stream in Mysore). -गडु a. [अन्तर्मध्ये गडुरिव] useless, unprofitable, unnecessary, unavailing; किमनेनान्तर्गडुना Sar. S. (ग्रीवाप्रदेश- जातस्य गलमांसपिण्डस्य गडोर्यथा निरर्थकत्वं तद्वत्). -गम् -गत &c. See under अंतर्गम्. -गर्भ a. 1 bearing young, pregnant. -2 having a गर्भ or inside; so ˚गर्भिन्. -गिरम् -रि ind. in mountains. अध्यास्तेन्तर्गिरं यस्मात् करतन्नावैति कारणम् Bk.5.87. -गुडवलयः the sphincter muscle. -गूढ a. concealed inside, being inward; ˚घनव्यथः U.3.1; R.19.57; ˚विषः with poison concealed in the heart. -गृहम्, -गेहम्, -भवनम् [अन्तःस्थं गृहम् &c.] 1 the inner apartment of a house, the interior of a house. -2 N. of a holy place in Benares; पञ्चक्रोश्यां कृतं पापमन्तर्गेहे विनश्यति. -घणः -णम् [अन्तर्हन्यते क्रोडीभवत्यस्मिन्, निपातः] the open space before the house between the entrance-door and the house (= porch or court); तस्मिन्नन्तर्घणे पश्यन् प्रघाणे सौधसद्मनः Bk.7.62 द्वारमतिक्रम्य यः सावकाशप्रदेशः सो$न्तर्घणः). (-नः -णः) N. of a country of Bāhīka (or Bālhīka) (P.III.3.78 बाहीकग्रामविशेषस्य संज्ञेयम् Sk.). -घातः striking in the middle Kāsi. on P.III.3.78. -चर a. pervading the body. internally situated, internal, inward अन्तश्चराणां मरुतां निरोधात् Ku.3.48; U.7. -ज a. born or bred in the interior (as a worm &c.). -जठरम् the stomach. (ind.) in the stomach. -जम्भः the inner part of the jaws (खादनस्थानं जम्भः, दन्तपङ्क्त्यो- रन्तरालम्). -जात a. inborn, innate. -जानु ind. between the knees. -जानुशयः One sleeping with hands between the knees; अन्तर्जानुशयो यस्तु भुञ्जते सक्तभाजनः Mb.3.2.75. -ज्ञानम् inward or secret knowledge. -ज्योतिस् a. enlightened inwardly, with an enlightened soul. यो$न्तःसुखो$न्तरारामस्तथान्तर्ज्योतिरेव यः Bg.5.24. (-स् n.) the inward light, light of Brahman. -ज्वलनम् inflammation. (-नः) inward heat or fire; mental anxiety. -ताप a. burning inwardly (-पः) internal fever or heat Ś.3.13. -दधनम् [अन्तर्दध्यते आधीयते मादकतानेन] distillation of spirituous liquor, or a substance used to produce fermentation. -दशा a term in astrology, the time when a particular planet exercises its influence over man's destiny (ज्योतिषोक्तः महादशान्तर्गतो ग्रहाणां स्वाधिपत्यकालभेदः). -दशाहम् an interval of 1 days; ˚हात् before 1 days. Ms.8.222; ˚हे 5.79. -दहनम् -दाहः 1 inward heat; ज्वलयति तनूमन्तर्दाहः U.3.31; ˚हेन दहनः सन्तापयति राघवम् Rām. -2 inflammation. -दुःख a. sad or afflicted at heart; -दुष्ट a. internally bad, wicked or base at heart. -दृष्टिः f. examining one's own soul, insight into oneself. -देशः an intermediate region of the compass. -द्वारम् private or secret door within the house (प्रकोष्ठद्वारम्). -धा-धि, -हित &c. See. s. v. -नगरम् the palace of a king (being inside the town); cf. ˚पुरम्; दशाननान्तर्नगरं ददर्श Rām. -निवेशनम् inner part of the house; यथा चारोपितो वृक्षो जातश्चान्तर्निवेशने Rām.6.128.6. -निहित a. being concealed within; अङ्गैरन्तर्निहितवचनैः सूचितः सम्यगर्थः M.2.8. -निष्ठ a. engaged in internal meditation. -पटः, -टम् a screen of cloth held between two persons who are to be united (as a bride and bridegroom, or pupil and preceptor) until the acctual time of union arrives. -पथ a. Ved. being on the way. -पदम् ind. in the interior of an inflected word. -पदवी = सुषुम्णामध्यगतः पन्थाः -पिरधानम् the innermost garment. -पर्शव्य a. being between the ribs (as flesh). -पवित्रः the Soma when in the straining vessel. -पशुः [अन्तर्गाममध्ये पशवो यत्र] the time when the cattle are in the village or stables (from sunset to sunrise); अन्तःपशौ पशुकामस्य सायं प्रातः Kāty; (सायं पशुषु ग्राममध्ये आगतेषु प्रातश्च ग्रामादनिःसृतेषु com.). -पातः, पात्यः 1 insertion of a letter (in Gram.). -2 a post fixed in the middle of the sacrificial ground (used in ritual works); अन्तःपूर्वेण यूपं परीत्यान्तःपात्यदेशे स्थापयति Kāty. -पातित, -पातिन् a. 1 inserted. -2 included or comprised in; falling within; दण्डकारण्य˚ ति आश्रमपदम् K.2. -पात्रम् Ved. interior of a vessel. -पालः one who watches over the inner apartments of a palace. -पुरम् [अन्तः अभ्यन्तरं पुरं गृहम्, or पुरस्यान्तःस्थितम्] 1 inner apartment of a palace (set apart for women); female or women's apartments, seraglio, harem (so called from their being situated in the heart of the town, for purposes of safety); व्यायम्याप्लुत्य मध्याह्ने भोक्तुमन्तःपुरं विशेत् Ms.7.216,221,224; कन्यान्तःपुरे कश्चित्प्रविशति Pt.1. -2 inmates of the female apartments, a queen or queens, the ladies taken collectively; अन्तःपुराणि सर्वाणि रुदमानानि सत्वरम् Rām.6.111.111. ˚विरहपर्युत्सुकस्य राजर्षेः Ś.3; K.58; ततो राजा सान्तःपुरः स्वगृह- मानीयाभ्यर्चितः Pt.1; कस्यचिद्राज्ञो$न्तःपुरं जलक्रीडां कुरुते ibid. ˚प्रचारः gossip of the harem Ms.7.153; ˚समागतः Ś.4; also in pl.; कदाचिदस्मत्प्रार्थनामन्तःपुरेभ्यः कथयेत् Ś.2.; न ददाति वाचमुचितामन्तःपुरेभ्यो यदा Ś.6.5. ˚जन women of the palace; inmates of the female apartments; ˚चर, -अध्यक्षः-रक्षकः, -वर्ती guardian or superintendent of the harem, chamberlain; वृद्धः कुलोद्रतः शक्तः पितृपैतामहः शुचिः । राज्ञामन्तःपुरा- ध्यक्षो विनीतश्च तथेष्यते ॥ (of these five sorts are mentioned :- वामनक, जघन्य, कुब्ज, मण्डलक and सामिन् see Bṛi. S.) ˚सहायः one belonging to the harem. -पुरिकः [अन्तःपुरे नियुक्तः, ठक्] a chamberlain = ˚चर. (-कः, -का) a woman in the harem; अस्मत्प्रार्थनामन्तःपुरिके(का) भ्यो निवेदय Chaṇḍ. K. -पुष्पम् [कर्म.] the menstrual matter of women, before it regularly begins to flow every month; वर्षद्वादशकादूर्ध्वं यदि पुष्पं बहिर्न हि । अन्तःपुष्पं भवत्येव पनसोदुम्बरादिवत् Kāśyapa; ˚ष्पम् is therefore the age between 12 and the menstruation period. -पूय a. ulcerous. -पेयम् Ved. drinking up. -प्रकृतिः f. 1 the internal nature or constitution of man. -2 the ministry or body of ministers of a king. -3 heart or soul. ˚प्रकोपः internal dissensions or disaffection; अणुरप्युपहन्ति विग्रहः प्रभुमन्तःप्रकृतिप्रकोपजः Ki.2.51. -प्रको- पनम् sowing internal dissensions, causing internal revolts; अन्तःप्रकोपनं कार्यमभियोक्तुः स्थिरात्मनः H.3.93. -प्रज्ञ a. knowing oneself, with an enlightened soul. -प्रतिष्ठानम् residence in the interior. -बाष्प a. 1 with suppressed tears; अन्तर्बाष्पश्चिरमनुचरो राजराजस्य दध्यौ Me.3. -2 with tears gushing up inside, bedimmed with tears; कोपात्˚ ष्पे स्मरयति मां लोचने तस्याः V.4.15. (-ष्पः) suppressed tears, inward tears; निगृह्य ˚ष्पम् Bh.3.6; Māl.5. -भावः, भावना see under अन्तर्भू separately. -भिन्न a. split or broken inside, perforated, bored (said of a pearl) Pt.4 (also torn by dissensions). -भूमिः f. interior of the earth. -भेदः discord, internal dissensions; ˚जर्जरं राजकुलम् Mk.4 torn by internal dissensions; अन्तर्भेदाकुलं गेहं न चिराद्विनशिष्यति 'a house divided against itself cannot stand long.' -भौम a. subterranean, underground. -मदावस्थ a. having the rutting state concealed within; आसीदनाविष्कृतदानराजि- रन्तर्मदावस्थ इव द्विपेन्द्रः R.2.7. -मनस् a. 1 sad, disconsolate, dejected, distracted. -2 one who has concentrated and turned his mind inward, lost in abstract meditation. -मुख a. (-खी f.) 1 going into the mouth, pointing or turned inward; प्रचण्डपरिपिण्डितः स्तिमितवृत्तिरन्तर्मुखः Mv. 5.26. -2 having an inward entrance of opening (बाह्यवस्तुपरिहारेण परमात्मविषयकतया प्रवेशयुक्तं चित्तादि). -3 an epithet of the soul called प्राज्ञ, when it is enjoying the sweet bliss of sleep (आनन्दभुक् चेतोमुखः प्राज्ञः इति श्रुतेः). -4 Spiritual minded, looking inwardly into the soul; 'अन्तर्मुखाः सततमात्मविदो महान्तः' Viś. Guṇā.139. (-खम्) a sort of surgical scissors (having an opening inside), one of the 2 instruments mentioned by Suśruta in chapter 8 of Sūtrasthāna. -मातृका [अन्तःस्थाः ष़ट्चक्रस्थाः मातृकाः अकारादिवर्णाः] a name given in the Tantras for the letters of the alphabet assigned to the six lotuses (पद्म) of the body; ˚न्यासः a term used in Tantra literature for the mental assignment of the several letters of the alphabet to the different parts of the body. -मुद्र a. sealed inside; N. of a form of devotion. -मृत a. still-born. -यागः mental sacrifice or worship, a mode of worship referred to in the Tantras. -यामः 1 suppression of the breath and voice. -2 ˚पात्रम्, a sacrificial vessel (ग्रहरूपं सामापराख्यं यज्ञियपात्रम्); according to others, a Soma libation made during the suppression of breath and voice; सुहवा सूर्यायान्तर्याममनु- मन्त्रयेत् Ait. Br. -यामिन् m. 1 regulating the soul or internal feelings, soul; Providence, Supreme Spirit as guiding and regulating mankind. Brahman; (according to the Bṛi. Ār. Up. अन्तर्यामिन 'the internal check' is the Supreme Being and not the individual soul; who standing in the earth is other than the earth, whom the earth knows not, whose body the earth is, who internally restrains and governs the earth; the same is thy soul (and mine, the internal check अन्तर्यामिन्, &c. &c.); अन्तराविश्य भूतानि यो बिभर्त्यात्मकेतुभिः । अन्तर्या- मीश्वरः साक्षाद्भवेत् &c. -2 wind; ˚ब्राह्मणम् N. of a Brāhmaṇa included in the Bṛi. Ār. Up. -योगः deep meditation, abstraction -लम्ब a. acute-angular. (-बः) an acute-angled triangle (opp. बहिर्लम्ब) (the perpendicular from the vertex or लम्ब falling within अन्तर् the triangle). -लीन a. 1 latent, hidden, concealed inside; ˚नस्य दुःखाग्नेः U.3.9; ˚भुजङ्गमम् Pt.1. -2 inherent. -लोम a. (P.V.4.117) covered with hair on the inside; (-मम्) [अन्तर्गतमाज्छाद्यं लोम अच्] the hair to be covered. -वंशः = ˚पुरम् q. v. -वंशिकः, -वासिकः [अन्तर्वंशे वासे नियुक्तः ठक्] a superintendent of the women's apartment.; Pt.3, K.93. Ak.2.8.8. -वण (वन) a. situated in a forest; ˚णो देशः P.VI.2.179 Sk. (-णम्) ind. within a forest. P.VIII.4.5. -वत् a. being in the interior; having something in the interior. -वती (वत्नी) Ved. [अन्तरस्त्यस्यां गर्भः] a pregnant woman; अन्तर्वत्नी प्रजावती R.15.13. -वमिः [अन्तः स्थित एव उद्गारशब्दं कारयति, वम्-इन्] indigestion, flatulence; belching. -वर्तिन्, -वासिन् a. being or dwelling inside, included or comprised in -वसुः N. of a Soma sacrifice (for राज्यकाम and पशुकाम). -वस्त्रम्, -वासस् n. an undergarment; गृहीत्वा तत्र तस्यान्तर्वस्त्राण्याभरणानि च । चेलखण्डं तमेकं च दत्वान्तर्वाससः कृते ॥. Ks.4.52. -वा a. [अन्तः अन्तरङ्गभावं अन्तःकरणं वा वाति गच्छति स्निग्धत्वेन, वा-विच् Tv.] forming part of oneself such as children, cattle &c. ˚वत् a. (अस्त्यर्थे मतुप् मस्य वः) having progeny, cattle &c; अन्तर्वावत्क्षयं दधे Rv.1.4.7; abounding with precious things inside. -adv. inwardly. -वाणि a. [अन्तःस्थिता शास्त्रवाक्यात्मिका वाणी यस्य] skilled or versed in scriptures, very learned (शास्त्रविद्). -विगाहः, -हनम् entering within, penetration. -विद्वस् a. Ved. (विदुषी f.) knowing correctly or exactly (knowing the paths between heaven and earth) Rv.1.72.7. -वेगः inward uneasiness or anxiety, inward fever. -वेदि a. pertaining to the inside of the sacrificial ground. -adv. within this ground. (-दिः -दी f.) [अन्तर्गता वेदिर्यत्र देशे] the tract of land (the Doab) between the rivers Gaṅgā and Yamunā, regarded as a sacred region and the principal seat of Āryan Brāhmaṇas; cf. एते भगवत्यौ भूमिदेवानां मूलमायतनमन्तर्वेदिपूर्वेण कलिन्दकन्यामन्दाकिन्यौ संगच्छेते A.R.7; it is supposed to have extended from Prayāga to Haradvāra and is also known by the names of शशस्थली and ब्रह्मावर्त. -m. (pl.) inhabitants of this land. -वेश्मन् n. the inner apartments, interior of a house. -वेश्मिकः n. a chamberlain. -वैशिकः Officer in charge of the harem. समुद्रमुपकरणमन्तर्वैशिकहस्तादादाय परिचरेयुः Kau. A.1.21. -शरः internal arrow or disease. -शरीरम् internal and spiritual part of man; the interior of the body. -शल्य a. having in the interior an arrow, pin or any such extraneous matter; rankling inside. -शीला N. of a river rising from the Vindhya mountain. -श्लेषः, -श्लेषणम् Ved. internal support (scaffolding &c.) एतानि ह वै वेदानामन्तः- श्लेषणानि यदेता व्याहृतयः Ait. Br. -संज्ञ a. inwardly conscious (said of trees &c.); ˚ज्ञा भवन्त्येते सुखदुःखसमन्विताः Ms.1.49. -सत्त्व a. having inward strength &c. (˚त्त्वा) 1 a pregnant woman. -2 the marking nut. -सन्तापः internal pain, sorrow, regret. -सरल a. upright at heart, or having Sarala trees inside; K.51. -सलिल a. with water (flowing) underground; नदीमिवान्तःसलिलां सरस्वतीम् R.3.9. -सार a. having inward strength and vigour, full of strong inside; powerful, strong, heavy or ponderous; ˚रैर्मन्त्रिभिर्घार्यते राज्यं सुस्तम्भैरिव मन्दिरम् Pt.1. 126; साराणि इन्धनानि Dk.132; ˚रं घन तुलयितुं नानिलः शक्ष्यति त्वाम् Me.2. (-रः) internal treasure or store, inner store or contents; वमन्त्युच्चैरन्तःसारम् H.2.13 internal matter or essence (and pus). -सुख a. whose delight is in self, inwardly happy यो$न्तःसुखो$न्तरारामः Bg. 5.24 -सेनम् ind. into the midst of armies. -स्थ a. (also written अन्तःस्थ) being between or in the midst. (-स्थः, -स्था) a term applied to the semivowels, य्, र्, ल्, व् as standing between vowels and consonants and being formed by a slight contact of the vocal organs (ईषत्स्पृष्टं अन्तस्थानाम्); or they are so called because they stand between स्पर्श (क-म) letters and ऊष्मन् (श, ष, स, ह). -स्था 1 a deity of the vital organs. -2 N. of one of the Ṛigveda hymns. ˚मुद्गरः the malleus of the ear. -स्वेदः [अन्तः स्वेदो मदजलस्यन्दनं यस्य] an elephant (in rut). -हणनम् striking in the middle. -हननम् N. of a country बाहीक P.VIII.4.24 Sk. -हस्तम् ind. in the hand, within reach of the hand. -हस्तीन a. being in the hand or within reach of the hand. -हासः laughing inwardly (in the sleeves), a secret or suppressed laugh; सान्तर्हासं कथितम् Me.113 with a suppressed laugh, with a gentle smile. -हृदयम् the interior of the heart.

apara	अपर a. (treated as a pronoun in some senses) 1 Having nothing higher or superior, unrivalled. matchless; without rival or second (नास्ति परो यस्मात्); स्त्रीरत्नसृष्टिर- परा प्रतिभाति सा मे Ś.2.1; cf. अनुत्तम, अनुत्तर. -2 [न पृणाति संतोषयति पृ अच्] (a) Another, other (used as adj. or subst.). वासांसि जीर्णानि यथा विहाय नवानि गृह्णाति नरो$पराणि Bg.2.22. (b) More, additional; कृतदारो$परान् दारान् Ms.11.5. (c) Second, another Pt.4.37; स्वं केशवो$पर इवाक्रमितुं प्रवृत्तः Mk.5.2 like another (rival) Keśava. (d) Different; other; अन्ये कृतयुगे धर्मास्त्रेतायां द्वापरे$परे Ms. 1.85; Ks.26.235; Pt.4.6 (with gen.). (e) Ordinary, of the middle sort (मध्यम); परितप्तो$प्यपरः सुसंवृतिः Śi. 16.23. -3 Belonging to another, not one's own (opp. स्व); यदि स्वाश्चापराश्चैव विन्देरन् योषितो द्विजाः Ms.9.85 of another caste. -4 Hinder, posterior, latter, later, (in time space) (opp. पूर्व); the last; पूर्वां सन्ध्यां जपंस्तिष्ठेत्स्वकाले चापरां चिरम् Ms.4.93; रात्रेरपरः कालः Nir.; oft. used as first member of a genitive Tatpuruṣa comp. meaning 'the hind part,' 'latter part or half'; ˚पक्षः the latter half of a month; ˚हेमन्तः latter half of a winter; ˚कायः hind part of the body &c.; ˚वर्षा, ˚शरद् latter part of the rains, autumn &c. -5 Following, the next. -6 Western; पयसि प्रतित्सुरपराम्बुनिधेः Śi.9.1. पूर्वापरौ तोयनिधी वगाह्य Ku. 1.1; Mu.4.21 -7 Inferior, lower (निकृष्टः); अपरेयमि- तस्त्वन्यां प्रकृतिं विद्धि मे पराम् Bg.7.5. -8 (In Nyāya) Non-extensive, not covering too much, one of the two kinds of सामान्य, see Bhāṣā P.8. (परं = अधिकवृत्ति higher अपरम् = न्यूनवृत्ति lower or अधिकदेशवृत्तित्वं परं, अल्पदेशवृत्तित्वं अपरम् Muktā.) -9 Distant; opposite. When अपर is used in the singular as a correlative to एक the one, former, it means the other, the latter; एको ययौ चैत्ररथप्रदेशान् सौराज्य- रम्यानपरो विदर्भान् R.5.6; when used in pl. it means 'others', 'and others', and the words generally used as its correlatives are एके, केचित्-काश्चित् &c., अपरे, अन्ये; केचिद् रक्तपटीकृताश्च जटिलाः कापालिकाश्चापरे Pt.4.34; एके समूहुर्बलरेणुसंहतिं शिरोभिराज्ञामपरे महीभृतः Śi.12.45 some-others; शाखिनः केचिदध्यष्ठुर्न्यमाङ्क्षुरपरे$म्बुधौ । अन्ये त्वलङ्घिषुः शैलान् गुहास्त्वन्ये न्यलेषत ॥ केचिदासिषत स्तब्धा भयात्केचिदघूर्णिषुः । उदतारिषुरम्भोधिं वानराः सेतुनापरे Bk. 15.31.33. -रः 1 the hind foot of an elephant; बद्धापराणि परितो निगडान्यलावीत् Śi.5.48 (Malli. चरमपादाग्राणि). -2 An enemy (न पृणाति सन्तोषयति). -रा 1 Western direction, the west अपरां च दिशं प्राप्तो वालिना समभिद्रुतः Rām.4.46.18. -2 The hind part of an elephant. -3 Sacred learning, learning the four Vedas with the 6 Aṅgas. -4 The womb; the outer skin of the embryo. -5 Suppressed menstruation in pregnancy. -री Ved. The future, future times; उतापरीभ्यो मघवा विजिग्ये Rv.1.32.13. -रम् 1 The future, any thing to be done in future (कार्य); तदेतद्ब्रह्मापूर्वमपरमनन्तम् Bṛi. Ār. Up. (नास्ति अपरं कार्यं यस्य). -2 The hind quarter of an elephant. -रम् adv. Again, moreover, in future, for the future; अपरं च moreover; अपरेण behind, west of, to the west of (with gen. or acc.). [cf. Goth. afar; Germ. aber, as in aberglauben]. -Comp. -अग्नि (अग्नी dual) 1 the southern and western fires (दक्षिण and गार्हपत्य). -2 the last fire i. e. used at the funeral ceremony (˚ग्निः). -अङ्गम् one of the 8 divisions of गुणीभूतव्यङ्ग्य (the second kind of काव्य) mentioned in K. P.5. In this the व्यङ्ग्य or suggested sense is subordinate to something else; अगूढमपरस्याङ्गम्; अपरस्य रसादेर्वाच्यस्य वा (वाक्यार्थीभूतस्य) अङ्गं रसादि अनुरणनरूपं वा; e. g. अयं स रसनोत्कर्षी पीनस्तनविमर्दनः । नाभ्यूरुजघनस्पर्शी नीवीविस्रंसनः करः ॥ where शृङ्गार is subordinate to करुण. -अन्त a. living at the western borders. (-न्तः) 1 the western border or extremity, the extreme end or term. the western shore. -2 (pl.) the country or inhabitants of the western borders near the Sahya mountain; अपरान्तजयोद्यतैः (अनीकैः) R.4.53 Western people. दशार्णाश्चापरान्ताश्च द्विपानां मध्यमा मताः Kau.A.1.2. -3 the kings of this country. -4 death, Pātañjala Yogadarśana 3.22. ˚ज्ञानम् anticipation of one's end. -5 the hind foot of an elephant; मृदुचलदपरान्तोदीरितान्दूनिनादम् Śi.11.7;18.32. -6 Islander, inhabitant of an island (द्वीपवासिन्) कोट्यापरान्ताः सामुद्रा रत्नान्युपहरन्तु ते Rām.2.82.8. -अन्तकः 1. = ˚अन्तः pl. -2 N. of a song; अपरान्तकमुल्लोप्यं मद्रकं प्रकरीं तथा । औवेणकं सरोबिन्दुमुत्तरं गीतकानि च ॥ Y3.113; ˚अन्तिका N. of a metre consisting of 64 mātrās. -अपराः, -रे, -राणि another and another, several, various. -अपरम् ind. Further and further (उत्तरोत्तरम्); अहं हि वचनं त्वत्तः शुश्रूषुरपरापरम् Mb.5.136.14. -अर्धम् the latter or second half. -अह्न [fr.अहन् changed to अह्न P.II. 4.29, V.4.88.] the latter part of the day, the afternoon, closing or last watch of the day; Ms.3.278; अपराह्णशीतलतरेण शनैरनिलेन Śi.9.4; ˚तन, ˚ह्णेतन belonging to this time; ˚कृतं P.II.1.45. -इतरा the east. -कान्य- कुब्ज a. situated in or belonging to the western part of Kānyakubja. -कालः later period. -गात्रम् a minor limb (hand, foot etc.); कोपप्रसादापरगात्रहस्तः (सुप्तः क्षितौ) रावणगन्धहस्ती) Rām.6.19.1. -गोदानम् (also गोडनि or गोडानि) N. of a country to the west of Mahāmeru (according to Buddhistic ideas). -ज a. born later or at the end of the world. (-जः) the destroying fire. -जनः an inhaditant of the west, the western people. -दक्षिणम् ind. in the south-west (belonging to the तिष्ठद्गु class). -पक्षः 1 the second or dark half of the month. -2 the other or opposite side; a defendant (in law). -पञ्चालाः the western Pañchālas. -पर a. one and the other, several, various; अपरपराः सार्थाः गच्छन्ति P.VI.1.144. Sk. several caravans go; (अपरे च परे च सकृदेव गच्छन्ति). -पाणिनीयाः the pupils of Pāṇini living in the west. -प्रणेय a. easily led or influenced by others, docile, tractable. -भावः 1 being another or different, difference. -2 succession, continuation. -रात्रः [अपरं रात्रेः] the latter or closing part of night, the last watch of night (P.V.4.87); उत्थायापररात्रान्ते प्रयताः सुसमाहिताः Bhāg.8.4.24. ˚कृतम् P.II.1.45. -लोकः the other world, the next world. Paradise. -वक्त्रा, -क्त्रम् N. of a metre. -वैराग्यम् a kind of Vairāgya mentioned by Patañjali (दुष्टानुश्राविकविषयवितृष्णस्य वशीकारसंज्ञं वैराग्यम्). -सक्थम् the hind thigh. -स्वस्तिकम् the western point in the horizon. -हैमन a. belonging to the latter helf of winter (P.VII.3.11).

ambaṣṭhaḥ	अम्बष्ठः 1 The offspring of a man of the Brāhmaṇa and a woman of the Vaiśya tribe; ब्राह्मणाद् वैश्यकन्यायामम्बष्ठो नाम जायते Ms.1.8,13.15; Y.1.91. cf. also अम्बष्ठानां दार्विहोमिको ब्राह्मणः । ŚB. on MS.8.4.2. (According to Ms.1.47 the duty of an अम्बष्ठ is the curing of diseases; अम्बष्ठानां चिकित्सितम्). -2 An elephant-driver. अपश्यत्कुवलयापीडं कृष्णो$म्बष्ठप्रचोदितम् Bhāg.1.43.2. (pl.) -3 N. of a country and its inhabitants (they seem to have occupied the country to the east of Tākṣaśilā, comprising the modern district of Lahore.) -ष्ठा N. of several plants:-- (a) गणिका, यूथिका (Mar. जुई); (b) पाठा (Mar. पाहाडमूळ). (c) चुक्रिका (Mar. चुका); (d) another plant (Mar. अम्बाडा). -ष्ठा, -ष्ठी An Ambaṣṭha woman.

ayasmaya	अयस्मय (अयोमय) a. (-यी f.) Ved. Made of iron or of any metal. -यी N. of one of the three habitations of Asuras.

araṇyam	अरण्यम् (sometimes) m. also, [अर्यते गम्यते शेषे वयसि ऋ-अर्तेर्निच्च Uṇ.3.12] A land neither cultivated nor grazed, a wilderness, forest, desert; प्रियानाशे कृत्स्नं किल जगदरण्यं हि भवति U.6.3; माता यस्य गृहे नास्ति भार्या चाप्रियवादिनी । अरण्यं तेन गन्तव्यं यथारण्यं तथा गृहम् ॥ Chāṇ. 44; तपःश्रद्धे ये ह्युपवसन्त्यरण्ये Muṇd.1.2.11. oft. used at first member of comp. in the sense of 'wild', 'grown or produced in forest'; ˚बीजम् wild seed; ˚कार्पासि, ˚कुलत्थिका; ˚कुसुम्भः &c; so ˚मार्जारः, ˚मूषकः. -2 A foreign or distant land; अरण्येषु जर्भुराणा चरन्ति Rv.1.163.11. -ण्यः N. of a plant कट्फल (Mar. कायफळ) -Comp. -अध्यक्षः headman or superintendent of a forest district; forest keeper or ranger. -अयनम्, -यानम् going into the forest, becoming a hermit; अथ यदरण्यायनमित्या- चक्षते ब्रह्मचर्यमेव तद् Ch. Up.8.5.3. -ओकस्, -सद् a. 1 dwelling in woods, being in a forest; किंतु ˚सदोवयं अनभ्यस्त रथचर्याः U.5; वैक्लव्यं मम तावदीदृशमपि स्नेहादरण्यौकसः Ś. 4.6. -2 especially, one who has left his family and become an anchorite, forest-dweller. -कणा wild cumin seed (Mar. जिरें) -कदली wild plantain. -काण्डम् N. of the third book of the Rāmāyaṇa which embodies Rāmā's exploits in the course of his journey through the forests in company with Viśvāmitra. -गजः a wild elephant (not tamed). -गानम् N. of one of the four hymn-books of the Sāmaveda (to be chanted in the forest). -चटकः a wild sparrow. -चन्द्रिका (lit.) moonlight in a forest; (fig.) an ornament or decoration which is useless, or does not serve its purpose; just as moonlight in a forest is useless there being no human beings to view, enjoy and appreciate it, so is decoration when not viewed and appreciated by those for whom it is intended; thus Malli. on स्त्रीणां प्रियालोक- फलो हि वेषः Ku.7.22 remarks अन्यथा$रण्यचन्द्रिका स्यादिति भावः. -चर (˚ण्येचर also), -जीव a. wild, living in woods. -ज a. wild; ˚आर्द्रका wild ginger. -जीरम् wild cumin. (Mar. कडू जिरें). -दमनः N. of a plant. -द्वादशी, -व्रतम् N. of a ceremony performed on the 12th day of Mārgaśīrṣa. -धर्मः 1 wild state or usage, wild nature; तथारण्यधर्माद्वियोज्य ग्राम्यधर्मे नियोजितः Pt.1 -2 the duties of a Vānaprastha or anchorite. -धान्यम्, -शालिः wild rice (नीवार). -नृपतिः, -राज् (ट्), -राजः 'lord of the woods', epithet of a lion or a tiger; so अरण्यानां पतिः. -पण्डितः [अरण्ये एव पण्डितः, न तु नगरादिषु जनसमाजेषु] 'wise in a forest'; (fig.) a foolish person (who can display his learning only in a forest where no one will hear him and correct his errors). -पर्वन् N. of the first section of the Mb. -भव a. growing in a forest, wild; यथा˚ वास्तिलाः Pt.2.86. -मक्षिका a gadfly (Mar. घोडमाशी) -मुद्रकः a kind of wild bean. -यानम् retiring to the woods. -रक्षकः conservator of forests, forest-keeper. -राज्यम् sovereignty of the woods. -रुदितम् (˚ण्ये˚) 'weeping in a forest', a cry in the wilderness; (fig.) a vain or useless speech, or a cry with no one to heed it, or anything done to no purpose; अरण्ये मया रुदितम् Ś.2; प्रोक्तं श्रद्धाविहीनस्य अरण्यरुदितोपमम् Pt.1.393; तदलमधुनारण्यरुदितैः Amaru.76. -वायसः a wild crow, raven. -वासः, -समाश्रयः 1 retiring into woods, residence in a forest; ˚योन्मुखं पितरम् R.12.8. -2 a hermitage, forest habitation. -वासिन् a. living in a forest, wild; m. a forest-dweller, an anchorite. (-नी) N. of a plant अत्यम्लपर्णी. -वास्तु (-स्तू)कः N. of a plant वनवेतः. -विलपितम्, -विलापः (˚ण्ये) = ˚रुदितम् above. -श्वन् m. 'a wild hound', wolf. -षष्ठी N. of a festival celebrated on the 6th day of the bright half of Jyeṣṭha. -सभा a forest-court.

ardha	अर्ध (Written also as अर्द्ध) a. [ऋध्-णिच्-अच्; according to Nir. from धृ, or ऋध्] Half, forming a half (divided into 2 parts); अर्ध-अर्ध the one half-the other half. -र्धः [ऋध्-घञ्] 1 A place, region, country; house, habitation (Ved.). -2 Increase (वृद्धि). -3 Wind. -4 A part, portion, side. -र्धम्, -र्धः 1 A half, half portion; पचाति नेमो न हि पक्षदर्धः Rv.1.27.18. सर्वनाशे समुत्पन्ने अर्धं त्यजति पण्डितः, गतमर्धं दिवसस्य V.2; पूर्वार्धः first half; so उत्तर˚ latter half; दक्षिण˚ southern half (half on the right side); so अवर˚, जघन˚, पर˚, ग्राम˚ &c.; यदर्धे विच्छिन्नम् Ś.1.9 divided in half; ऋज्वायतार्धम् M.27; R.3.59; 12.99; रात्रौ तदर्धं गतम् Bh.3.17; one part of two, apart, partly (Ved.); -2 Nearness, proximity; see अर्धदेव. (अर्ध may be compounded with almost every noun and adjective; as first member of compound with nouns it means 'a half of' and forms an एकदेशिसमास or तत्पुरुष; ˚कायः = अर्धं कायस्य; ˚पिप्पली, ˚मार्गः; ˚पुरुषः &c.; with adjectives, it has an adverbial force; ˚श्याम half dark; ˚भुक्त half eaten; so ˚पिष्ट, ˚पूर्ण &c.; with numeral adjectives it may mean either 'a half of' or 'with an additional half'; ˚शतम् half of 1 i. e. 5; or अर्धेन सहितं शतम् i. e. 15; with ordinal numerals 'with a half or that number'; ˚तृतीयम् containing two and the third only half; i. e. two and a half; so ˚चतुर्थ three and a half. cf. अर्धं खण्डे समांशके Nm. -Comp. -अक्षि n. side-look, wink. नगरस्त्रीशङ्कितार्धाक्षिदृष्टम् Mk.8.42. -अङ्गम् half the body. -अन्तरम् half the distance; ˚एकपदता a fault in composition; see S. D. 575. -अंशः a half, the half. -अंशिन् a. sharing a half. -अर्धः, -र्धम् 1 half of a half, quarter; चरर्धार्धभागाभ्यां तामयोजयतामुभे R.1.56. -3 half and half. -अवभेदकः 1 pain in half the head, hemicrania (Mar. अर्धशिशी). (-कम्) dividing in equal parts. -अवशेष a. having only a half left. -अकारः 1 half the letter अ. -2 N. of अवग्रह q. v. -असिः A sword with one edge, a small sword; अर्धासिभिस्तथा खङ्गैः Mb.7.137.15. -आसनम् 1 half a seat; अर्धासनं गोत्रभिदो$धितष्ठौ R.6.73; मम हि दिवौकसां समक्षमर्धासनोपवेशितस्य Ś.7 (it being considered a mark of a very great respect to make room for a guest &c. on the same seat with oneself). -2 greeting kindly or with great respect. -3 exemption from censure. -इन्दुः 1 the half or crescent moon. -2 semicircular impresion of a finger-nail, crescent-shaped nail-print; कुचयोर्नखाङ्कैरर्धेन्दुलीलैः N.6.25. -3 an arrow with a crescent-shaped head (= अर्धचन्द्र below.); ˚मौलि N. of Śiva तत्र व्यक्तं दृषदि चरणन्यासमर्धेन्दुमौलेः Me.57. -इन्द्र a. that of which a half belongs to Indra. -उक्त a. half said or uttered; रामभद्र इति अर्धोक्ते महाराज U.1. -उक्तिः f. a broken speech; an interrupted speech. -उदकम् water reaching half the body. -उदयः 1 the rising of the half moon. -2 partial rise. -3 a kind of parvan; ˚आसनम् a sort of posture in meditatiou. -उदित a. 1 half risen. -2 half uttered. -ऊरुक a. [अर्धमूरोः अर्धोरु तत्र काशते] reaching to the middle of the thighs. (-कम्) 1 a short petti-coat (Mar. परकर); see चण्डातक. -2 mantle, veil. -कर्णः Radius, half the diameter. -कृत a. half done, incomplete. -केतुः N. of Rudra. -कोशः a moiety of one's treasure. -कौडविक a. measuring half a kuḍava. -खारम्, -री a kind of measure, half a Khāri; P.V.4.11. -गङ्गा N. of the river Kāverī; (स्नानादौ गङ्गास्नानार्धफलदायिनी); so ˚जाह्नवी -गर्भ a. Ved. 1 in the middle of the womb; सप्तार्धगर्भा भुवनस्य रेतो Rv. 1.164.36. -2 N. of the rays of the Sun. -गुच्छः a necklace of 24 strings. -गुञ्जा half a gunja. -गोलः a hemisphere. -चक्रवर्तिन्, -चक्रिन् m. N. of the nine black Vasudevas and the nine enemies of Viṣṇu. -चन्द्र a. crescent-shaped. (-न्द्रः) 1 the half moon, crescent moon; सार्धचन्द्रं बिभर्ति यः Ku.6.75. -2 the semicircular marks on a peacock's tail. -3 an arrow with a crescent-shaped head; अर्धचन्द्रमुखैर्बाणैश्चिच्छेद कदलीसुखम् R.12.96. cf. अर्धचन्द्रस्तदाकारे बाणे बर्हे शिखण्डिनः Nm. -4 crescent-shaped nail-print. -5 the hand bent into a semicircle, as for the purpose of seizing or clutching anything; ˚न्द्र दा to seize by the neck and turn out; दीयतामेतस्यार्धचन्द्रः Pt.1. (-द्रा) N. of a plant (कर्णस्फोट). -चन्द्राकार, -चन्द्राकृति a. half-moonshaped. -चन्द्रकम् A semi-circular pearl. Kau. (-रः, -ति f.) meniscus. -चन्द्रिका N. of a climbing plant. (Mar. तिळवण). -चित्र a. Half-transparent; A kind of marble; अर्धाङ्गदृश्यमानं च तदर्धचित्रमिति स्मृतम् Māna.51.1. -चोलकः a short bodice. -जरतीयन्यायः a kind of न्याय, न चेदानीमर्धजरतीयं लभ्यं वृद्धिर्मे भविष्यति स्वरो नेति MBh.4.1. 78. See under न्याय. -जीविका, -ज्या The sine of an arc. -तनुः f. half the body. -तिक्तः N. of a plant (नेपालनिम्ब Mar. चिराईत). -तूरः a kind of musical instrument. -दिनम्, दिवसः 1 half a day, mid-day. -2 a day of 12 hours. -देवः 1 demi-god. इन्द्रं न वृत्रतुरमर्धदेवम् Rv. 4.42.8-9. -2 Ved. being near the gods; (देवानां समीपे बर्तमानः Sāy.). -द्रौणिक a. measuring a half droṇa. -धारः a knife or lancet with a single edge (one of the 2 surgical instruments mentioned by Suśruta). -नाराचः a crescent-shaped iron-pointed arrow; नाराचानर्धनाराचाञ्शस्त्राणि विविधानि च Mbh.2.51.35; गृध- लक्षवेधी अर्धनाराचः V.5. -नारायणः a form of Viṣṇu. -नारीशः, -नारीश्वरः, -नारी, -नटेश्वरः a form of Śiva, (half male and half female) cf.... पतिरपि जगता- मर्धनारीश्वरो$भूत् Sūkti.5.99. -नावम् half a boat. -निशा midnight. -पञ्चम a. Four and half; युक्तश्छन्दांस्य- धीयीत मासान्विप्रो$र्धपञ्चमान् Ms.4.95. -पञ्चशत् f. twenty five Ms.8.268. -पणः a measure containing half paṇa Ms.8.44. -पथम् half way. (-पथे) midway भृतिमर्ध- पथे सर्वान्प्रदाप्य Y.2.198. -पादः half a pāda or foot; अर्धपादं किष्कुविष्कम्भमुद्धृत्य Dk.19. -पादा The plant भूम्यामलकी (Mar. भूईआवळी). -पादिक a. having half a foot; सद्यः कार्यो$र्धपादिकः Ms.8.325. -पाञ्चालिक a. born or produced in the ardhapanchāla. -पारावतः a kind of pigeon (अर्धेनाङ्गेन पारावत इव). The francolin partridge. -पुलायितः a half gallop, canter; चित्रं चकार पदमर्धपुलायितेन Śi.5.1. -प्रहर half a watch, one hour and a half. -प्राणम् A kind of joinery resembling the shape of a bisected heart; मूलाग्रे कीलकं युक्तमर्धप्राणमिति स्मृतम् । Māna.17.99. -भागः a half, half a share or part; तदर्धभागेन लभस्व काङ्क्षितम् Ku.5.5; R.7.45. -भागिक a. sharing a half; मृते पितरि कुर्युस्तं भ्रातरस्त्वर्धभागिकम्म् Y.2.134. -भाज् a. sharing entitled to a half; अर्धभाग्रक्षणाद्राजा Ms.8.39. -2 a companion, sharer; देवानामर्धभागासि Av.6.86.3. -भास्करः mid-day. -भेदः Hemiplegia (अर्धाङ्गवायुः); Suś. -भोटिका a kind of cake. -भ्रमः -मकः a kind of artificial composition; for instances see Ki.15.27; Śi.19.72. The Sar. K. describes it as a figure of speech thus :-- आहुरर्धभ्रमं नाम श्लोकार्धभ्रमणं यदि. -मागधी N. of a dialect in which many of Jaina Canonical books are written. It is so named perhaps because many of the characteristics of Māgadhi are found in it. -माणवकः, -माणवः a necklace of 12 strings (माणवक consisting of 24.) -मात्रा 1 half a (short) syllable. अर्धमात्रालाघवेन पुत्रोत्सवं मन्यन्ते वैयाकरणाः Pari Sik. -2 a term for a consonant (व्यञ्जनं चार्धमात्रकम्). -मार्गे ind. mid-way; बन्दीकृता विबुधशत्रुभिरर्धमार्गे V.1.3. -मासः half a month, a fortnight. -मासतम = ˚मासिक see P.V.2.57. -मासिक a. 1 happening every fortnight. -2 lasting for a fortnight; ये$र्धमासाश्च च मासाश्च Mahānārā. 25. Y.2.177. -मुष्टिः f. a half-clenched hand. -यामः half a watch. -रथः [अर्धः असंपूर्णः रथः रथी] a warrior who fights on a car with another (who is not so skilled as a रथी); रणे रणे$भिमानी च विमुखश्चापि दृश्यते । घृणी कर्णः प्रमादी च तेन मे$र्धरथो मतः Mb. -रात्रः [अर्ध रात्रेः] 1 midnight; अथार्धरात्रे स्तिमितप्रदीपे R.16.4; स्थिते$र्धरात्रे Dk.19. -2 a night containing half a whole day of 24 hours. -रात्रार्धदिवसः equinox. -लभ्मीहरिः Hari having a form half like Lakṣmī. -विसर्गः, -विसर्ज- नीयः the Visarga sound before क्, ख्, प्, and फ्, so called because its sign () is the half of a Visarga (). -वीक्षणम् a side-look, glance, leer. -वृद्ध a. middle-aged. -वृद्धिः The half of the interest or rent; Ms.8.15. -वैनाशिकः N. of the followers of Kaṇāda (arguing half perishableness). -वैशसम् half or incomplete murder; विधिना कृतमर्धवैशसं ननु मां कामवधे विमुञ्चता Ku.4.31. -व्यासः the radius of a circle. -शतम् 1 fifty. -2 One hundred and fifty; Ms.8.267. -शनम् [अर्धमशनस्य शकन्ध्वा˚] half a meal. -शफरः a kind of fish. -शब्द a. having a low voice. -शेष a. having only a half left. -श्याम a. half clouded. -श्लोकः half a śloka or verse. -सम a. equal to a half. (-मम्) N. of a class of metres in which the 1st and 3rd and 2nd and 4th lines have the same syllables and Gaṇas; such as पुष्पिताग्रा. -सस्य a. half the crops, half grown. -सहः An owl. -सीरिन् m. 1 a cultivator, ploughman who takes half the crop for his labour; शूद्रेषु दासगोपालकुलमित्रार्धसीरिणः Y.1.166. -2 = अर्धिक q. v. -हर, -हारिन् a. occupying the half (of the body); Ku.1.5; एको रागिषु राजते प्रियतमादेहार्ध- हारी हरः Bh.3.121. -हारः a necklace of 64 strings. A half chain, a kind of ornament; नक्षत्रमालामपि चार्धहारं सुवर्णसूत्रं परितः स्तनाभ्याम् Māna.5.297-98. cf. also Kau. A.2.11. -ह्रस्वः half a (short) syllable.

ādhānam	आधानम् 1 Placing, putting upon; समिदाधानं, तुलाधानम् &c. -2 (a) Taking, having. (b) Receiving, recovering. (c) Containing or being in possession of anything or consecrating. -3 Keeping the sacred fire (अग्न्याधान), a ceremony performed with the sacred fire; पुनर्दारक्रियां कुर्यात् पुनराधानमेव च Ms.5.168. -4 Doing, executing, performing; आज्ञापयामास नरेन्द्रसूनुः स्वर्गीयमाधानमदीनसत्त्वः Rām. 6.19.24. (स्वर्गीयमाधानम् = प्रेतकृत्यम्) -5 Infusing, putting in, inspiring, imparting; गुणो विशेषाधानहेतुः सिद्धो वस्तुधर्मः S. D.2; निश्चयाधानम् K.262; प्रजानां विनयाधानाद्रक्षणाद् भरणादपि R.1.24 imparting or providing moral instruction. -6 (a) Engendering, producing, कौतुकाधानहेतोः Me.3; गर्भाधान- क्षणपरिचयात् 9. (b) Assigning, attributing, employing. -7 Effort, exertion, application; Mv.3.13. -8 A pledge, deposit; Y.2.238,247. विक्रयाधानवर्ज्यम् Kau. A.2.1. -9 A place where anything is deposited, a receptacle, as in पक्वाधानम्, पुरुषाधानम्, अयं मध्यमः प्राणः तस्येद- मेवाधानम् Bṛi. Up.2.2.1. -1 A surety. -11 Enclosure, circuit. -12 A ceremony performed previous to conception; see गर्भाधान. -13 cohabitation (मैथुन) तवापि मृत्युराधानादकृतप्रज्ञ दर्शितः Bhāg.9.9.36.

ādhānikaḥ	आधानिकः [आधान-ठञ्] A ceremony performed after cohabitation to cause or favour conception.

ānartaḥ	आनर्तः [आनृत्यत्यत्र आधारे घञ्] 1 A stage, theatre, a dancing-hall. -2 War, battle. -3 N. of a king of the solar race. -4 N. of a country or its inhabitants, or its kings. (It was also called Saurāṣtra and may be identified with the modern Kathewar. Dwārakā was its capital, which is called Ānartanagarī. There was also an important town called Valabhī-which afterwards became its capital. The celebrated Tīrtha called Prabhāsa also stood in the same peninsula.) -र्तम् 1 Water. -2 Dancing (m. also) cf. आनर्तः समरे नृत्तस्थाननीवृद्विशेषयोः Nm. -Comp. -पुरम्, -नगरी the capital of the Ānarta country.

ābhīraḥ	आभीरः [आ समन्तात् भियं राति, रा-क Tv.] 1 A cowherd; आभीरवामनयनाहृतमानसाय दत्तं मनो यदुपते तदिदं गृहाण Udb.; according to Ms.1.15 आभीर is the offspring of a Brāhmaṇa and a female of the Ambaṣṭha tribe. -2 (pl.) N. of a country or its inhabitants; श्रीकोंकणा- दधोभागे तापीतः पश्चिमे तटे । आभीरदेशो देवेशि विन्ध्यशैले व्यवस्थितः ॥ -री 1 A cowherd's wife. -2 A woman of the Ābhīra tribe. -3 The language of the Ābhīras; आभीरेषु तथा- भीरी (प्रयोक्तव्या) S. D.432. -Comp. -पल्लिः, -ल्ली f., -पल्लिका a station or abode of herdsmen, a village inhabited by cowherds.

āmbaṣṭhaḥ	आम्बष्ठः An inhabitant of Ambaṣṭha.

āraṭṭaḥ	आरट्टः 1 N. of a country to the north-east of Punjab, famous for its breed of horses; (the people of Guzarath in Ravalpindi still call their country Hairat or Airatdesa); the inhabitants of this country (pl.). -2 A horse from this country.

āraṇyaka	आरण्यक a. [अरण्ये भवः वुञ्] Relating to or produced in a forest, wild, forest-born (usually with the words अध्याय, मनुष्य, न्याय, पथिन्, विहार, and हस्तिन् P.IV.2.129 Vārt.) -कः A forester, an inhabitant of the woods; तपः ष़ड्भागमक्षय्यं ददत्यारण्यका हि नः Ś.2.14; द्वावप्यत्रारण्यकौ Ś.5. आरण्यकोपात्तफलप्रसूतिः R.5.15. -कम् An Āraṇyaka; it is one of a class of religious and philosophical writings (connected with the Brāhmaṇas) which are either composed in forests, or must be studied there; e. g. ऐतरेयारण्यकम्; बृहदारण्यकम् and तैत्तिरीया- रण्यकम्; अरण्ये$नूच्यमानत्वात् आरण्यकम्, Bṛi. Ar. Up.; (अरण्ये$- ध्ययनादेव आरण्यकमुदाहृतम्); वेदवादानतिक्रम्य शास्त्राण्यारण्यकानि च Mb.12.19.17. -Comp. -काण्डम् the title of the third book of the Rāmāyaṇa. -गानम् = अरण्यगानम्.

ārya	आर्य a. [ऋ-ण्यत्] 1 Āryan, an inhabitant of आर्यावर्त, N. of the race migrated into India in Vedic times. -2 Worthy of an Ārya. -3 Worthy, venerable, respectable, honourable, noble, high; यदार्यमस्यामभिलाषि मे मनः Ś.1.22; R.2.33; so आर्यवेषः respectable dress; oft. used in theatrical language as an honorific adjective and a respectful mode of address; आर्यचाणक्यः, आर्या अरुन्धती &c.; आर्य revered or honoured Sir; आर्ये revered or honoured lady. The following rules are laid down for the use of आर्य in addressing persons:-(1) वाच्यौ नटीसूत्रधारावार्यनाम्ना परस्परम् । (2) वयस्येत्युत्तमैर्वाच्यो मध्यैरार्येति चाग्रजः । (3) (वक्तव्यो) अमात्य आर्येति चेतरैः । (4) स्वेच्छया नामभिर्विप्रैर्विप्र आर्येति चेतरैः । S. D.431. -4 Noble, fine, excellent. -र्यः 1 N. of the Hindu and Iranian people, as distinguished from अनार्य, दस्यु and दास; विजानीह्यार्यान्ये च दस्यवः Rv.1.51.8. -2 A man who is faithful to the religion and laws of his country; कर्तव्यमाचरन् कार्यमकर्तव्यमनाचरन् । तिष्ठति प्रकृताचारे स वा आर्य इति स्मृतः ॥ -3 N. of the first three castes (as opp. to शूद्र). -4 respectable or honourable man, esteemed person; वृत्तेन हि भवत्यार्यो न धनेन न विद्यया Mb.; परमार्यः परमां कृपां बभार Bu. Ch.5.6. -5 A man of noble birth. -6 A man of noble character. -7 A master, owner. -8 A preceptor; वैमानि- कार्यसमभूमा Viś. Guṇā.124; Mu.3.33. -9 A friend. -1 A Vaiśya. -11 A father-in-law (as in आर्यपुत्र). -12 A Buddha. -13 (With the Buddhists) A man who has thought on the four chief principles of Buddhism and lives according to them. -14 A son of Manu Sāvarṇa. -र्या 1 N. of Pārvatī. -2 A mother-in-law. -3 A respectable woman; यत्रार्या रुदती भीता पाण़्डवानिदमब्रवीत् Mb.3.12.87. -4 N. of a metre; राजानमुद्दिश्य आर्यामिमां पपाठ K. ˚गीतिः f. A variety of the Āry&amacr metre, see Appendix. -5That which comes from truth; आराद् याता तत्त्वेभ्य इति आर्या. -र्यम् 1 Virtue, sacredness; नहि दुष्टा- त्मनामार्यमावसत्यालये चिरम् Rām.3.5.12. -2 Discrimination (विवेक); कोपमार्येण यो हन्ति स वीरः पुरुषोत्तमः Rām.4.31.6. -Comp. -अष्टशतम् title of a work of Ārya Bhaṭṭa consisting of eight hundred verses. -आगमः The approaching an Ārya woman sexually; अन्त्यस्यार्यागमे वधः Y.2.294. -आवर्तः [आर्यां आवर्तन्ते अत्र] 'abode of the noble or excellent (Āryas)'; particularly N. of the tract extending from the eastern to the western ocean, and bounded on the north and south by the Himālaya and Vindhya respectively; cf. Ms..2.22; आ समुद्रात्तु वै पूर्वादा समुद्राच्च पश्चिमात् । तयोरेवान्तरं गिर्योः (हिमवद्विन्ध्ययोः) आर्यावर्तं विदुर्बुधाः ॥; also 1.34. -गृह्य a. [आर्यस्य गृह्यः पक्षः] 1 to be respected by the noble. -2 a friend of the noble, readily accessible to honourable men; तमार्यगृह्यं निगृहीतधेनुः R.2.33. -3 respectable, right, decorous. -जुष्ट a. liked by or agreeable to noble ones. -देशः a country inhabited by the Āryas. -पुत्रः 1 son of an honourable man. -2 the son of a spiritual preceptor. -3 honorific designation of the son of the elder brother; of a husband by his wife; or of a prince by his general &c. -4 the son of the father-in-law, i. e. a husband (occurring in every drama; mostly in the vocative case in the last two senses). -प्राय a. 1 inhabited by the Āryas. -2 a bounding with respectable people; Ms.7.69. -बलः N. of a Bodhisattva. -भट्टः N. of a renowned astronomer, the inventor of Algebra among the Hindus; he flourished before the 5th century of the Christian era. Hence his work is called आर्यभटीय. -भावः honourable character or behaviour. -मतिः One having a noble intellect; संक्षिप्तमार्यमतिना Sāṅ. K.71. -मार्गः the path or course of the respectable, a respectable way. -मिश्र a. respectable, worthy, distinguished. (-श्रः) a gentleman, a man of consequence; (pl.) 1 worthy or respectable men, an assembly of honourable men; आर्य- मिश्रान् विज्ञापयामि V.1. -2 your reverence or honour (a respectful address); नन्वार्यमिश्रैः प्रथममेव आज्ञप्तम् Ś.1; आर्य- मिश्राः प्रमाणम् M.1. -युवन् m. an Āryan youth. -रूप a. having only the form of an Āryan, a hypocrite, impostor; आर्यरूपमिवानार्यं कर्मभिः स्वैर्विभावयेत् Ms.1.57. -लिङ्गिन् m. an impostor; Ms.9.26. -वाक् a. speaking the Aryan language; म्लेच्छवाचश्चार्यवाचः सर्वे ते दस्यवः स्मृताः Ms.1.45. -वृत्त a. virtuous, good, pious; Ms.9. 253; R.14.55. (-त्तम्) the conduct of an Āryan or nobleman; Ms.4.175. -वेश a. well-clothed, having a respectable dress, fine. -व्रत a. observing the laws and ordinances of the Āryans or noblemen. (-तम्) the duty of an Aryan. -शील a. Having an honest character. -श्वेतः a noble or honourable man. -संघः the whole body of the Āryans, especially Buddhists; it is also the name of a renowned philosopher (founder of the school of Yogāchāras). -सत्यम् a noble or sublime truth; (there are four such truths forming the chief principles of Buddhism. In Pāli they are called चत्तारि अरियसच्चानि. They are, (1) life is suffering, (2) Desire of life is the cause of suffering, (3) Extinction of that desire is the cessation of suffering, (4) The eightfold path leads to that extinction). -सिद्धान्तः N. of a work of आर्यभट्ट. -स्त्री An Āryan woman, or a woman of the first three castes. -हलम् ind. forcibly. -हृद्य a. liked by the noble.

āvantya	आवन्त्य a. [अवन्तिषु भवः ञ्य] Coming from or belonging to Avantī. -त्यः 1 A prince or an inhabitant of Avantī. -2 The offspring of a degraded Brāhmaṇa; see Ms.1.21.

āvasathaḥ	आवसथः [आवस्-अथच् Uṇ.3.116. 1 A dwelling, dwelling-place, residence, house, habitation; निवसन्नावसथे पुराद्बहिः R.8.14; रोगी चिरप्रवासी परान्नभोजी परावसथशायी । यज्जीवति तन्मरणं यन्मरणं सो$स्य विश्रामः ॥ Subh. Ratn. -2 A resting place, asylum; Ms.3.17; Mb.12.14-41; स ह सर्वत आवसथान् मापयाञ्चक्रे । Ch. Up.4.1.1. -स...... ग्रासाच्छादनावसथान् प्रतिविदध्यात् Kau. A.1.11. -3 A dwelling for pupils and ascetics. -4 A village. -5 A particular religious observance. -6 A fire-sanctuary, a place where sacrificial fire is preserved.

āvāsaḥ	आवासः 1 (a) A house, habitation, abode; आवास- वृक्षोन्मुखबर्हिणानि R.2.17. (b) Apartment, room. (c) A place of refuge.

ikṣuḥ	इक्षुः [इष्यते$सौ माधुर्यात्, इष्-क्सु Uṇ.3.157] 1 Sugarcane; परि त्वा परितत्नुनेक्षुणागामविद्विषे Av.1.34.5. -2 N. of another tree कोफिला. -3 Wish, desire. -Comp. -कन्दा A pumpion gourd, Cucurbita Pepo. (Mar. कोहाळें). -काण्डः, -ण्डम् N. of two different species of sugarcane (काश and मुञ्जतृण). -कान्तः A class of the six storeyed buildings (Mānasāra 24.55). -कुट्टकः a gatherer of sugar-cane. -गन्धः Saccharum Spontaneum (Mar. लघु- गोखरू). -गन्धिका Convolvulus paniculatus (भूमिकूष्माण्ड). -ज a. produced from sugar-cane. -तुल्या = अनिक्षुः. -दण्डः, -यष्टिः f. the stem or cane of Saccharum Officinale. -दर्भा a kind of grass. -दा N. of a river. -नेत्रम् 1 a kind of sugar-cane. -2 the eye of sugarcane. (Mar. पेरावरील डोळा). -पत्रः a kind of grain (Mar. जोंधळे). -पाकः molasses. -प्रः N. of a tree (शरवृक्ष). -बालिका a kind of grass (काश). -भक्षिका 1 a meal of sugar and molasses. -2 A machine for crushing sugarcane. -भक्षिती a woman who eats a sugar-cane. -मती, -मालिनी, मालवी N. of a river. -मूलम् the root of sugar-cane; a kind of sugar-cane. -मेहः diabetes or diabetes mellitus (cf. मधुमेह). -मेहिन् a. diabetic. -यन्त्रम् a sugar-mill. -योनिः [इक्षोरिव योनिः यस्य] Saccharum Officinarum (पुण्ड्रकइक्षु). -रसः 1 the juice of sugar-cane. -2 molasses, unrefined sugar. -3 a kind of काश grass; -रसोदः One of the seas. ˚क्वाथः raw or unrefined sugar, molasses. -वणम् a sugar-cane wood. -वल्लरी, -वल्ली the common yellow cane. -वारि n., -समुद्रः the sea of syrup, one of the seven seas. -वालिका (also इक्ष्वालिका) [इक्षुरिव वलति वल्- ण्वुल्] 1 N. of a tree (Mar. तालिमखाना.). -2 the काश grass. -वाटिका, -वाटी 1 a kind of sugar-cane (पुण्ड्रक). -2 a garden of sugar-canes. -विकारः 1 sugar, molasses. -2 any sweetmeat. -शाकटम्, -शाकिनम् a field fit for planting the sugar-cane. -सारः molasses, raw or unrefined sugar.

ikṣvākuḥ	इक्ष्वाकुः 1 N. of the celebrated ancestor of the Solar kings who ruled in Ayodhyā; (he was the first of the Solar kings and was a son of Manu Vaivasvata; (cf. Bhāg. क्षुवतस्तु मनोर्जज्ञ इक्ष्वाकुर्घाणतः सुतः); इक्ष्वाकुवंशो$भि- मतः प्रजानाम् U.1.44. -2 (pl.) Descendants of Ikṣvāku; गलितवयसामिक्ष्वाकूणामिदं हि कुलव्रतम् R.3.7. -क्रुः f. A kind of bitter gourd, Cucurbita Lagenaria (Mar. कडू दुध्या).

utkala	उत्कल a. Excessive, piteous; K.36. -लः 1 N. of a country, the modern Orissa, or the inhabitants of that country (pl.); जगन्नाथप्रान्तदेश उत्कलः परिकीर्तितः; see ओड्र; उत्कलादर्शितपथः R.4.38. -2 A fowler, bird-catcher. -3 A porter (carrying a load with him). -4 A subdivision of Brāhmaṇas.

udīcya	उदीच्य a. Situated or living in the north. -च्यः 1 The country to the north and west of the river Sarasvatī; northern country. -2 (pl.) The inhabitants of the north; R.4.66. -च्यम् A kind of perfume. -Comp. -वृत्तम् a kind of Vaitālīya metre.

upabhogaḥ	उपभोगः 1 (a) Enjoyment, eating, tasting; न जातु कामः कामानामुपभोगेन शाम्यति Ms.2.94,8.285; Y.2.171. कामोपभोगपरमाः Bg.16.11; प्रियोपभोग R.12.22. (b) Use, application; चरणोपभोगसुलभः Ś.4.4. -2 Enjoyment (of a woman), cohabitation; उपस्थितश्चारु वपुस्तदीयं कृत्वोप- भोगोत्सुकयेव लक्ष्म्या R.14.24. -3 Usufruct. -4 Pleasure, satisfaction.

uśīnarāḥ	उशीनराः (pl.) N. of a country (Central India ? M. W.) and its inhabitants. सोवसदुशीनरेषु Kauṣ. Up. 4.1. -f. A queen of that people; य आवहदुशीनराण्या अनः Āv.1.59.1. उशी (षी) रः, -रम्, उशी (षी)रकम् The fragrant root of the plant Andropogon Muricatus (वरिणमूल, Mar. काळावाळा); स्तनन्यस्तोशीरम् Ś.3.9. -री A sort of grass, a small sort of Saccharum.

uṣita	उषित p. p. 1 Burnt, consumed. -2 (fr. वस्) Dwelt, fixed, remaining in or on; stale. -3 Quick, expeditious. -तम् Habitation. ˚गवीन (= आशितंगवीन).

uṣṭraḥ	उष्ट्रः [उष्-ट्रन्-किच्च Uṇ.4.161.] 1 Camel; अथोष्ट्रवामी- शतवाहितार्थम् R.5.32; Ms.3.162,4.12,11.22. -2 A buffalo. -3 A bull with a hump. -4 A cart or carriage. -ष्ट्री 1 A she-camel. -2 An earthen vessel in the shape of a camel. -3 Bignonia Spathacea (Mar. मेडशिंगी). [cf. Pers. ushtar; Zend ustra.] -Comp. -अक्षः A camel-eyed (horse) उष्ट्राक्षाः प्रियदर्शनाश्च सुभगाः श्वासैः सुगन्धैश्च ये; Bhoja's Śālilhotra. -कर्णिका (pl.) N. of a country or its inhabitants, in the south. -काण्डी A thistle dear to camels, Echinops echinatus (Mar. उंटकटारी). -क्रोशिन् a. making a noise like a camel. -गोयुगम् a couple of camels; यथा गोस्तद्वदुष्ट्रस्य युगं उष्ट्रगो- युगम् Mbh. on P.V.2.29. -ग्रीवः, -शिरोधरः piles. -निषदनम् A particular posture among Yogins. -पादिका Jasminum Zambac (Mar. मोगरा). -प्रमाणः A kind of fabulous eight-footed animal शरभ. -यानम् camel- litter.

ṛṣabhaḥ	ऋषभः [ऋष्-अभक्; Uṇ 3.123] 1 A bull. -2 (With names of other animals) the male animal, as अजर्षभः a goat. -3 The best or most excellent (as the last member of a comp.); as पुरुषर्षभः, भरतर्षभः &c. -4 The second of the seven notes of the gamut; (said to be uttered by cows; गावस्त्वृषभभाषिणः); श्रुतिसमधिकमुच्चैः पञ्चमं पीडयन्तः सततमृषभहीनं भिन्नकीकृत्य षड्जम् Śi.11.1; ऋषभो$त्र गीयत इति Āryā S.141. -5 The hollow of the ear. -6 A boar's tail. -7 A crocodile's tail. -8 A dried plant, one of the 8 principal medicaments. (Mar. बैलघाटी, काकडशिंगी) -9 N. of an antidote. -1 An incarnation of Viṣṇu; नाभेरसावृषभ आस सुदेविसूनुः Bhāg. 2.7.1. -11 A sacrifice (to be performed by kings). -भाः m. The inhabitants of क्रौञ्चद्वीप; Bhāg.5.2.22. -भी 1 A woman with masculine features (as a beard &c.). -2 A cow. -3 A widow. -4 The plant Carpopogon Pruriens (शूकशिंबी); also another plant (शिराला) (Mar. कुयली) -Comp. -कूटः N. of a mountain. -दीपः, पम् N. of a country. -ध्वजः N. of Śiva.

ṛṣi	ऋषि (षी) कः 1 A Ṛiṣi of a lower degree. -2 N. of a country or its inhabitants (pl.).

auḍraḥ	औड्रः [ओड्र-अण्] An inhabitant, or the king, of the Oḍra country, q. v.

aupasthyam	औपस्थ्यम् [उपस्थ-ष्यञ्] Cohabitation, sexual intercourse; औपस्थ्यजैह्व्यं बहु मन्यमानः कथं विरज्येत दुरन्तमोहः Bhāg.7.6.13.

kambojaḥ	कम्बोजः 1 A shell. -2 A kind of elephant. -3 (pl) N. of a country and its inhabitants; शवतिर्गतिकर्मा कम्बोजेष्वेव भाष्यते Mbh. on P.I.1.1. कम्बोजाः समरे सोढुं तस्य वीर्यमनीश्वराः R.4.69. v.1.

kaliṅga	कलिङ्ग a. 1 Clever. -2 Cunning. -गाः (pl.) N. of a country and its inhabitants; (a district on the Coromandel coast); नो खण्डिकाञ्जगाम नो कलिङ्गाञ्जगाम Mbh. on P.III.2.115. उत्कलादर्शितपथः कलिङ्गाभिमुखो ययौ R.4. 38; (its position is thus described in Tantras :-- जगन्नाथात्समारभ्य कृष्णातीरान्तगः प्रिये । कलिङ्गदेशः संप्रोक्तो वाम- मार्गपरायणः ॥). -ङ्गः 1 The fork-tailed shrike. -2 N. of several plants; (as शिरीष, प्लक्ष &c.) -ङ्गा A beautiful woman. -ङ्गम् Indra grain (इन्द्रयव).

kānanam	काननम् 1 A forest, a grove; R.12.27,13.18; छन्नोपान्तः परिणतफलज्योतिभिः काननाम्रैः Me.18,44; काननावनि forest-ground. -2 The mouth of Brahmā. -3 A house. cf. काननं विपिने गेहे परमेष्ठिमुखे$पि च Med. -Comp. -अग्निः wild fire, conflagration. -अरिः a species of the mimosa tree (शमी). -ओकस् m. 1 an inhabitant of a forest. -2 a monkey.

kāyaḥ	कायः यम् [चीयते$स्मिन् अस्थ्यादिकमिति काय; चि-घञ् आदेः ककारः P.III.3.41. Sk.] 1 The body; विभाति कायः करुणापराणां परोपकारैर्न तु चन्दनेन Bh.2.71; कायेन मनसा बुद्ध्या Bg.5.11; so कायेन, वाचा, मनसा &c. -2 The trunk of a tree. -3 The body of a lute (the whole lute except the wires). -4 A multitude, assemblage, collection. -5 Principal, capital. -6 Home, residence, habitation. -7 A butt, a mark. -8 Natural temperament. -यम् (with or without तीर्थ) The part of the hand just below the fingers, especially the little finger, or the last two fingers (this part being considered sacred to Prajāpati is called प्रजापतितीर्थ; cf. Ms.2.58-59). -यः One of the eight forms of marriage, generally known as प्राजापत्य q. v.; स कायः पावयेत्तज्जः Y.1.6; Ms.3.38. -Comp. -अग्निः the digestive faculty. मनः कायाग्निमाहन्ति Maitri. Up.7.11. -क्लेशः bodily suffering or pain; कायक्ले- शभयात्त्येजत् Bg.18.8. -उत्सर्गः a kind of religious austerity in Jainas. -चिकित्सा the third of the eight departments of medical science, treatment of diseases affecting the whole body. -दण्डः a complete command over one's body; वाग्दण्डो$थ मनोदण्डः कायदण्डस्तथैव च । यस्यैते निहिता बुद्धौ त्रिदण्डीति स उच्यते ॥ Ms.12.1. -मानम् measurement of the body. -बन्धनम् 1 girdle. -2 the union of semen virile and blood. -वलनम् an armour. -स्थः 1 the Supreme Being. -2 the writer-caste (born from a क्षत्रिय father and a शूद्र mother). कायस्थेनोदरस्थेन मातु- र्मांसं न भक्षितम् । दयावृत्तिर्न चैवात्र दन्ताभावो हि कारणम् ॥ Subhāṣ. -3 a man of that caste; कायस्थ इति लध्वी मात्रा Mu.1; Y.1.336; Mk.9. (-स्था) 1 a woman of that caste. -2 the Myrobalan tree (Mar. हिरडा). (-स्थी) the wife of a कायस्थ. -स्थित a. corporeal, bodily.

kāśmīra	काश्मीर a. (-री f.) Born in, belonging to, or coming from, Kāṣmīra. -राः (pl.) N. of a country or its inhabitants; see कश्मीर also. -राः A sort of grape; see कश्मीर also. -रम् 1 Saffron; काश्मीरगन्धमृगनाभिकृताङ्गरागाम् Ch. P.8; Bh.1.41, काश्मीरगौरवपुषामभिसारिकाणाम् Gīt. 11; also 1; cf. also कस्तूरिकां च काश्मीरं पाटीरं हिमवालुकाम् Śiva. B.3.13. काश्मीरद्रवसान्द्रदिग्धवपुषः Bhāg. -2 Root of a tree. -Comp. -जम्, जन्मन् n. saffron; काश्मीरजस्य कटुता$पि नितान्तरम्या Bv.1.71; Śi.11.53. -पङ्कः Musk; काश्मीरपङ्ककृतनाभिकृताङ्गरागाम् (स्मरामि) ... Bil. Ch.2.3.

kuntalaḥ	कुन्तलः 1 The hair of the head, a lock of hair; प्रतनुविरलैः प्रान्तोन्मीलन्मनोहरकुन्तलैः U.1.2. Ch. P.4,6; Gīt.2. -2 A drinking cup. -3 A plough. -4 Barley. -5 A kind of perfume. -लाः (pl.) N. of a country and its inhabitants. -Comp. -उशीरम् a perfume.

keta	केत a. [कित्-आधारे घञ्) Knowing, learned. -तः 1 A house, abode; अनन्यमेकं जगदात्मकेतं भवापवर्गाय भजाम देवम् Bhāg.1.63.44. -2 Living, habitation. -3 A banner. -4 Will, intention, desire. -5 Summons, invitation. -6 Apparition, form, shape. -7 Wealth. -8 Atmosphere, sky. -9 Intellect, judgment.

keralaḥ	केरलः (pl.) N. of a country (in the south of India, the modern Malabar) and its inhabitants; Māl.6.19; भयोत्सृष्टविभूषाणां तेन केरलयोषिताम् R.4.54. -ली A woman of the Kerala country; कर्णाटीनां मुषितमुरलीकेरलीहारलीलः (राजेन्द्रकर्णपूरः). -2 Astronomical science. -3 A Hora or period of time equal to one hour. -Comp. -जातकम्, -तन्त्रम्, -सिद्धान्तः N. of works.

kṣayaṇa	क्षयण a. Destroying &c. -णः 1 A place with calm water. -2 A bay or harbour. -णम् A dwelling-place, habitation.

kṣayas	क्षयस् n. A dwelling-place, habitation.

kṣitiḥ	क्षितिः f. [क्षि निवासे आधारे क्तिन्] 1 The earth, soil of the earth; Mb.4. -2 A dwelling, an abode, a house; तं भक्तिभावो$भ्यगृणादसत्वरं परिश्रुतोरुश्रवसं ध्रुवक्षितिः Bhāg.4.9.5. -3 Loss, destruction. -4 The end of the world. -5 Wane. -6 A man (Ved.) -7 Prosperity; क्षिते रोहः प्रवहः शश्वदेव Mb.13.76.1. -8 Number 'one'; Bij. -Comp. -अदितिः an epithet of Devakī, mother of Kṛiṣṇa. -ईशः, -ईश्वरः a king; R.1.5; तदाननं मृत्सुरभि- क्षितीक्षरो रहस्युपाघ्नाय न तृप्तिमाययौ 3.3;11.1. -कणः dust. -कम्पः an earth-quake. -क्षित् m. a king, prince; Śi.13.4. -जः, -रुहः, -सुतः 1 a tree; गिरिप्रकाशान् क्षिति- जान् भञ्जेयमनिलो यथा Mb.7.197.19. -2 an earth worm. -3 the planet Mars. -4 N. of the demon Naraka killed by Viṣṇu. Śi.8.15. (-जम्) the horizon. (-जा) an epithet of Sītā. -तलम् the surface of the earth. उत्खातं निधिशङ्कया क्षितितलं ध्माता गिरेर्धातवः Bh.3.4. -त्राणम् protection of the earth (a duty of क्षत्रिय caste). -देवः, -सुरः a Brāhmaṇa; Bhāg.3.1.12. -धरः a mountain; क्षितिधरपतिकन्यामाददानः करेण Ku.7.94. -धेनुः earth considered as a milchcow; राजन्दुधुक्षसि यदि क्षितिधेनुमेतां तेनाद्य वत्समिव लोकममुं पुषाण Bh.2.46. -नाथः, -पः, -पतिः, -पालः, भुज् m., -रक्षिन् m. a king, sovereign; R.2.51, 6.76,6.86,7.3,9.75; यः संमानं सदा धत्ते भृत्यानां क्षितिपो$- धिकम् Pt. -पुत्रः 1 the planet Mars. -2 the demon Naraka. -प्रतिष्ठ a. dwelling on the earth. -भृत् m. 1 a mountain; सर्वक्षितिभृतां नाथ V.4.27; (where it means 'a king' also); Ki.5.2; Ṛs.6.26. -2 a king. -मण्डलम् the globe. -रन्ध्रम् a ditch, hollow. -वर्धनः m. a corpse, dead body. करोमि क्षितिवर्धनम् Bk. -वृत्तिः f. 'the course of the earth, patient behaviour. -व्युदासः a cave within the earth, an underground hole. -संक्रन्दनः (= क्षितीन्द्रः, a king); Śāhendra.2.1. -स्पृश् an inhabitant of the earth (मानुष); इति चोपनतां क्षितिस्पृशं कृतवानासुरपुष्पदर्शनात् R.8.81.

kṣīraḥ	क्षीरः रम् 1 Milk; हंसो हि क्षीरमादत्ते तन्मिश्रा वर्जयत्यपः Ś.6.28. -2 The milky juice or sap of trees, exudation; resin; ये तत्क्षीरस्रुतिसुरभयो दक्षिणेन प्रवृत्ताः Me.19; Ku.1.9. -3 Water; तिर्यग्वाहाश्च क्षीरिणः Rām.2.15.6. -रः See क्षीरस्वामिन्; क्षीराभिधाच्छब्दविद्योपाध्यायात्संभृतश्रुतः Rāj. T.4. 489. -रा -री N. of several plants containing a milky sap. -री A dish prepared with milk (Mar. खीर). -Comp. -अदः an infant, a sucking child. -अब्धिः 1 the sea of milk. -2 the अमृत; भो वैनतेय क्षीराब्धिः प्रारब्धो मथितुं सुरै Ks.22.186. ˚जः 1 the moon. -2 the Amṛita or nectar produced at the churning of the sea. -3 an epithet of Śeṣa. -4 a pearl. ˚जम् sea-salt. ˚जा, ˚तनया an epithet of Lakṣmī. -आह्वः the pine tree. -उदः cf. [P.VI.3.57 Vārt.] 1 the sea of milk; क्षीरोदवेलव सफेन- पुञ्जा Ku.7.26. ˚तनयः, ˚नन्दनः, ˚तनया, ˚सुता an epithet of Lakṣmī. -उत्तरा inspissated milk. -उत्थम् fresh butter. -उदधि = क्षीरोद q. v. above. -ऊर्मिः a wave of the sea of milk; R.4.27. -ओदनः rice boiled with milk; क्षीरौ- दनं पाचयित्वा Bṛi. Up.3.4.14. -कण्ठः -कण्ठकः a young child (having milk in the throat); त्वया तत्क्षीरण्कठेन प्राप्त- मारण्यकं व्रतम् Mv.4.52,5.11. क्षीरकण्ठाविमौ वत्सौ वत त्वन्मय- जीवितौ Śiva. B.2.24 and 5. -कुण्डम् a milk-pot; कश्चि- द्दुदोह कश्चिच्च क्षीरकुण्डमधारयत् Ks.63.188. -जम् coagulated milk. -दात्री yielding milk (as a cow). -द्रुमः the Aśvattha tree. -धात्री a wet-nurse. -धिः, -निधिः the sea of milk; इन्दुः क्षीरनिधाविव R.1.12. -धेनुः f. a milch cow. -नीरम् 1 water and milk. -2 milk-like water. -3 a fast embrace. -पः a child. -पाक a. cooked in milk; शतं महिषान् क्षीरपाकमोदनम् Rv.8.77.1. -पाणः an inhabitant of Uśīnara. (-णम्, -नम्) drinking milk. (-णी) any vessel out of which milk is drunk. -भृत a. supported by milk (as a Gopāla); receiving wages in the form of milk; गोपः क्षीरभृतो यस्तु Ms.8.231. -वारिः, -वारिधिः the sea of milk; गत्वा च क्षीरवारिधिम् Ks.22.188. -विकृतिः f. inspissated milk; any product made from milk (as cheese &c.). -वृक्षः 1 N. of the four trees न्यग्रोध, उदुम्बर, अश्वत्थ and मधूक. -2 the glomerous fig-tree. -व्रतम् living upon milk in consequence of a vow. -शरः cream, the skim of milk. -समुद्रः, -सागरः the sea of milk. यथा भगवता ब्रह्मन्मथितः क्षीरसागरः Bhāg.8.5.11. -सर्पिस् n. ghee (घृत). -सारः butter; क्षीरसारमपनीय शङ्कया स्वीकृतं यदि पलायनं त्वया Udb. -स्निग्ध a. unctuous with milky juice or sap; Ś.3.6. (v.l.) -स्फटिकः a precious stone. -स्वामिन् m. a commentator on the Amarakośa and a grammarian. -हिण्डीरः the foam of milk.

kṣemya	क्षेम्य a. [क्षेमाय साधु यत्] 1 Resting, at ease; यमर्धं ते मघवन् क्षेम्या धूः Rv.1.28.5. -2 Habitable, comfortable. -3 Healthy, salubrious. क्षेम्यस्तिष्ठन्प्रतरणः सुवीरः Mbh. on P.V.4.36. -4 Lucky, prosperous. -5 Giving peace; न चैवैषा गतिः क्षेम्या Mb.14.58.2. -म्यः An epithet of Śiva.

khañjanaḥ	खञ्जनः [खञ्ज्-ल्युट्] A species of the wag-tail; स्फुट- कमलोदरखेलितखञ्जनयुगमिव शरदि तडागम् Gīt.11; नेत्रे खञ्जनगञ्जने S. D; एको हि खञ्जनवरो नलिनीदलस्थः Ś. Til.4,5. -ना A kind of wag-tail. -2 Mustard. -नम् Going lamely. -Comp. -रतम् the cohabitation of saints.

khaśaḥ	खशः (pl.) A mountainous country in the north of India and its inhabitants; Ms.1.44; (also written खस).

gama	गम a. [गम् भावादौ अप्] (At the end of comp.) Going, moving, going to, reaching, attaining, getting &c.; खगम, पुरोगम, हृदयंगम, &c. -मः 1 Going, moving. -2 March; आदरेण गमं चक्रुर्विषमेष्वप्यसङ्घसाः Bk.7.56; अश्वस्यैकाहगमः. -3 The march of an assailant. -4 A road. -5 Inconsiderateness, thoughtlessness. -6 Superficiality, careless perusal. -7 (Sexual) intercourse with a woman, cohabitation; गुर्वङ्गनागमः Ms.11.55; Y.2.293. -8 A game played with dice and men. -9 Removal (as of fraction in math.) -Comp. -आगमः going and coming. -कारित्वम् inconsiderateness, rashness.

gamanam	गमनम् [गम्-ल्युट्] 1 Going, motion, gait; श्रोणीभाराद- लसगमना Me.84; so गजेन्द्रगमने Ś. Til.7. -2 Going, motion; considered as one of the five karmans by the Vaiśeṣikas. -3 Approaching, going to. -4 March of an assailant. -5 Undergoing, suffering. -6 Obtaining, attaining. -7 Cohabitation. -8 Knowledge, understanding; नाञ्जः स्वरूपगमने प्रभवन्ति भूम्नः Bhāg.8.7.34.

gamya	गम्य pot. p. 1 Accessible, approachable, obtainable; या गम्याः सत्सहायानाम् Ki.11.22. -2 Intelligible, or easy to be comprehended. -3 Intended, implied, meant. -4 Suitable, desirable, fit; गम्यं त्वभावे दातॄणां कन्या कुर्या- त्स्वयंवरम् Y.1.64. -5 Fit for cohabitation; दुर्जनगम्या नार्यः Pt.1.278; अभिकामां स्त्रियं यश्च गम्यां रहसि याचितः । नोपैति Mb. -6 Curable (by a drug &c.); न गम्यो मन्त्राणाम् Bh.1.89. -म्यः A man with whom a woman may have intercourse, a libidinous or voluptuous man, lover, paramour; Dk.41. गम्भारिका gambhārikā गम्भारी gambhārī गम्भारिका गम्भारी N. of a tree.

garbhaḥ	गर्भः [गॄ-भन् Uṇ.3.152] 1 The womb, the belly; गर्भेषु वसतिः Pt.1; पुनर्गर्भे च संभवम् Ms.6.63. -2 A fœtus, embryo; act of conception, pregnancy; conception; नरपतिकुलभूत्यै गर्भमाधत्त राज्ञी P.2.75; गर्भो$भवद्भूधरराज- पत्न्याः Ku.1.19; गर्भं वहति Pt.1.3 bears a child in the womb. -3 The time of conception; गर्भाष्टमे$ब्दे कुर्वित ब्राह्मणस्योपनायनम् Ms.2.36. -4 The child (in the womb); Ś.6; ततः कुमारं सुरगर्भकल्पम् Bu. Ch.2.19; cf. 'गर्भो भ्रूणे$- र्भके कुक्षौ' Medinī. -5 A child, brood or offspring of birds. -6 The inside, middle, or interior of anything (in comp. in this sense and translated by 'full of', 'filled with', 'containing' &c); हिमगर्भैर्मयूखैः Ś.3.4; शुक˚ कोटर 1.14;7.7; ˚पत्रम् U.3.5. inwardly situated; अग्निगर्भां शमीमिव Ś.4.4; R.3.9;5.17;9.55; Śi.9.62; Māl.3.12; Mu.1.12. -7 The offspring of the sky, i. e. the vapours and fogs drawn upwards by the rays of the sun during 8 months and sent down again in the rainy season; cf. Ms.9.35; नवमासधृतं गर्भं भास्करस्य गभस्तिभिः Rām.4.28.3. -8 An inner apartment, a lying-in-chamber. -9 Any interior chamber. -1 A hole. -11 Fire. -12 Food. -13 The rough coat of the jack-fruit (पनसकण्टक). -14 the bed of a river, especially of the Ganges on the fourteenth day of the dark half of Bhādrapada or in the very height of the rains when the river is fullest. -15 The fruit (of plants). -16 Joining, union. -17 The calyx of the lotus. -18 (In dramas) One of the Sandhis q. v. -Comp. -अङ्कः (also गर्भे$ङ्कः) an interlude during an act, as the scene of the birth of Kuśa and Lava in U.7, or the सीतास्वयंवर in Bālarāmāyaṇa. The S. D. thus defines it :-- अङ्कोदर- प्रविष्टो यो रङ्गद्वारामुखादिमान् । अङ्को$परः स गर्भाङ्कः सबीजः फलवानपि ॥ 279. -अवक्रान्तिः f. descent of the soul into the womb. -अवटः see गर्भभाजनम्. -अष्टमः 1 the eighth month from conception. -2 the eighth year from conception. -अस्पन्दनम् non-quickening of the fœtus. -आगारम् 1 uterus. -2 an inner and private room, the female apartments. -3 a lying-in-chamber. -4 the body or sanctuary of a temple, the chamber where the image of a deity is placed; एकैव देवं द्रष्टुं च गर्भागारमथाविशत् Ks.7.71. -आधानम् 1 impregnation; गर्भाधानक्षणपरिच- यान्नूनमाबद्धमालाः (बलाकाः) Me.9. -2 one of the Saṁskāras or purificatory ceremonies performed after menstruation to ensure or facilitate conception; (this ceremony legalizes in a religious sense the consummation of marriage); Y.1.11. -आशयः the uterus, the womb. -आस्रावः mis-carriage, abortion. -ईश्वरः one born rich (cf. 'born in the purple'); a sovereign or rich man by birth. ˚ता sovereignty attained by inheritance; प्राप्तैश्वर्यो भवेन्मूढो गर्भेश्वरतयान्यथा Rāj. T.5.199. -उत्पत्तिः f. the formation of the embryo. -उपघातः miscarriage of the embryo (applied to the sky); Bṛi. S.21.25. -उपघातिनी a cow or female miscarrying from unseasonable gestation. -उपपत्तिः f. formation of the embryo. -कर, -कार a. impregnating, procreative. -कालः 1 time of impregnation. -2 the time when the vapour collected in the air shows the first signs of life. -कोशः, -षः uterus. -क्लेशः pains caused by the embryo, the throes of parturition or childbirth. -क्षयः miscarriage. -गृहम्, -भवनम्, -वेश्मन् n. 1 an inner apartment, the body of a house; Mb.5.118.19; R.19.42. -2 a lying-in-chamber. -3 the sanctuary or body of a temple; निर्गत्य गर्भभवनात् Māl.1. -ग्रहणम् impregnation, conception. -ग्राहिका a midwife; Ks.34. -घातिन् a. causing abortion. -चलनम् quickening, motion of the fœtus in the uterus. -चेटः a servant by birth; नर्मभिर्गर्भचेटानां द्वास्थानां विक्रियाक्रमैः Rāj. T.3.153. -च्युत a. 1 fallen from the womb (as a child). -2 miscarrying. -च्युतिः f. 1 birth; delivery. -2 miscarriage. -दासः, -सी a slave by birth; (often used as a term of abuse or reproach.); यथा गर्भदासः कर्मार्थ एव स्वामिनो$नड्वाँश्च क्रीयते । ŚB. on MS.3.1.2. -दिवसाः certain days on which the vapours collected in the air show signs of life; Bṛi.21.5. -द्रुह् a. (nom. sing. ˚ध्रुक्-ड्) causing abortion. -धम् Ved. semen virile. -धरा pregnant. -धारणम्, -धारणा gestation, impregnation. -धिः Ved. 1 a breeding place, a nest; कपोत इव गर्भधिम् Rv.1.3.4. -2 cohabitation. -ध्वंसः abortion. -नाडी the umbilical cord. -नुद् a. causing abortion. -न्यासः 1 laying the foundation. -2 the foundations. -परिस्रवः secundines or fœtal membranes collectively. -पाकिन् m. rice ripening in sixty days. -पातः miscarriage after the fourth month of pregnancy. -पोषणम्, -भर्मन् n. nourishment of the fœtus, gestation; अनुष्ठिते भिषग्भिराप्तैरथ गर्भभर्मणि R.3.12. -भाजनम् the foundation pit, the excavation. -मण्डपः an inner apartment, a bed-chamber. -मासः month of pregnancy. -मोचनम् delivery, birth. -योपा a pregnant woman; (fig.) the Ganges overflowing its banks. -रक्षणम् protecting the fœtus. -रन्धिः complete cooking; स्थाल्य- ग्नितापात्पयसो$मितापस्तत्तापतस्तण्डुलगर्भरन्धिः Bhāg.5.1.22. -रूप a. childish, youthful, juvenile. -रूपः, -रूपकः a child, an infant, a youth. -लक्षण a. observing the signs of the rainy season. (-णम्) a symptom of pregnancy. -लम्भनम् a ceremony performed for the sake of facilitating and developing pregnancy. -वसतिः f., -वासः 1 the womb; असकृद्गर्भवासेषु वासं जन्म च दारुणम् Ms.12.78. -2 being in the womb. -विच्युतिः f. abortion in the beginning of pregnancy. -विपत्तिः death of the fœtus. -वेदना throes of child-birth. -व्याकरणम् the formation of the embryo. -शङ्कुः a kind of instrument for extracting the dead fœtus. -शय्या the abode of the fœtus or uterus. -संभवः, -संभूतिः f. becoming pregnant; वर्षद्वयं प्रविष्टस्य वर्तत$न्तःपुरे$त्र मे । तदेषा गर्भसंभूतिः कुतः संप्रति कथ्यताम् Ks.5.61. -संभवा a kind of cardamoms (Mar. एलची). -स्थ a. 1 situated in the womb. -2 interior, internal. -स्रावः abortion, miscarriage; वरं गर्भस्रावः Pt.1; Y.3.2; Ms.5.66.

gu	गु (गू) र्जरः 1 The district of Gujarath. -2 An inhabitant of Gujarath; तेषां मार्गे परिचयवशादर्जितं गुर्जराणां यः संतापं शिथिलमकरोत् सोमनाथं विलोक्य Vikr.18.97. -री N. of a Rāgiṇī.

gṛham	गृहम् [गृह्यते धर्माचरणाय, ग्रह् गेहार्थे क Tv.] 1 A house, dwelling, habitation, mansion; न गृहं गृहमित्याहुर्गृहिणी गृह- मुच्यते Pt.4.81,5.15; पश्य वानरमूर्खेण सुगृही निर्गृहीकृतः Pt. 1.39. -2 A wife; (the first quotation in 1 is sometimes erroneously cited as an illustration). -3 The life of a householder; न हि सति कुलधुर्ये सूर्यवंश्या गृहाय R.7. 71,5.1; Mv.4.28. -4 A sign of the zodiac. -5 A name or appellation. -6 A square (in chess or any other game). -हाः (m. pl.) 1 A house, dwelling; इमे नो गृहाः Mu.1; स्फटिकोपलविग्रहा गृहाः शशभृद्भित्तनिरङ्कभित्तयः N.2.74; तत्रागारं धनपतिगृहानुत्तरेणास्मदीयम् Me.77. -2 A wife; अथावलोकको$गच्छद्गृहानेकः परावसुः Mb.3.138.4. -3 The inhabitants of a house, family; the life of a householder; गृहानुत्सृज्य यो राजन् मोक्षमेवाभिपद्यते Mb.12.16.29. -हः Ved. An assistant, or servant; गृहो याम्यरंकृतो देवेभ्यो हव्यवाहनः Rv.1.119.13. In comp. oft. rendered by 'domestic', 'household' or 'tame'; e. g. ˚कपोतः 'a tame pigeon'; ˚कार्याणि-कर्माणि 'household duties'; ˚ शकु- न्तिका 'tame bird'; छद्मना परिददामि मृत्यवे सौनिको गृहशकुन्तिका- मिव U.1.45 &c. -Comp. -अक्षः a loophole, eyelet-hole, a round or ablong window. -अधिपः, -ईशः, -ईश्वरः 1 a house-holder. -2 a regent of a sign of the zodiac. संशयस्थः see अनुपात. -अयनिकः a house-holder. -अर्थः domestic affairs, any household matter; गृहार्थो$ग्निपरि- ष्क्रिया Ms.2.67. -अभिपालिन् m. a watchman. -अम्लम् a kind of sour-gruel. -अवग्रहणी the threshold. -अश्मन् m. a flat ablong stone upon which condiments are ground (Mar. पाटा). -आगत a. one who has come to a house. (-तः) a guest. -आचारः household or domestic business; U.2. -आरम्भः building a house; गृहारम्भातिदुःखाय Bhāg.11.9.15. -आरामः, -वाटी, -वाटिका a garden attached to a house. -आशया, -आश्रया the betel-tree. -आश्रमः the order of a householder, the second stage in the religious life of a Bāhmaṇa; see आश्रम; Ms.6.1. -आश्रमिन् m. a householder; Bhāg.1.8.7. -ईश्वरी a housewife; दिष्ट्या गृहेश्वर्यसकृन्मयि त्वया कृतानुवृत्तिर्भवमोचनी खलैः Bhāg.1.6.54. -उत्पातः any domestic nuisance. -उपकरणम् a domestic utensil, anything required for household use; एकदा निर्गता क्रेतुं गृहोपकरणानि सा Ks.2.15. -कच्छपः = गृहाश्मन् q. v. -कन्या, -कुमारी the plant Aloe Perfoliata (Mar. कोरफड). -कपोतः, -तकः a tame or domestic pigeon; Śi.4.52. -करणम् 1 household affairs. -2 house-building. -कर्तृ m. 1 'a house-builder,' a kind of sparrow. -2 a carpenter; गृहकर्ता भवानेव देवानां हृदयेप्सितम् Rām.7.5.19. -कर्मन् n. 1 household affairs. -2 a domestic rite. ˚करः, ˚कारः, ˚दासः a menial, domestic servant; शंभुस्वयंभुहरयो हरिणेक्षणानां येनाक्रियन्त सततं गृहकर्मदासाः Bh.1.1. -कलहः domestic feuds, intestine broils. -कारकः a housebuilder, mason; करोति तृणमृत्काष्ठैर्गृहं वा गृहकारकः Y.3.146. -कारिन् m. 1 a housebuilder. -2 a kind of wasp. -कुक्कुटः a domestic cock. -कार्यम्, -कृत्यम् household affairs; सदा प्रहृष्टया भाव्यं गृहकार्येषु दक्षया Ms.5.15. -गोधा, -गोधिका the small house-lizard. -चुल्ली a house with two rooms contiguous to each other, but one facing west, the other east; Bṛi. S.53.4. -चेतस् a. thinking only of one's house; Bhāg.9.11.17. -छिद्रम् 1 a family-secret or scandal. -2 family dissensions; आयुर्वित्तं गृहच्छिद्रं मन्त्रमैथुनभेषजम् H.1.123. -ज, -जात a. born in the house (a slave &c.); Bṛi.5.61.7; Ms. 8.415. -जनः family, members of a family, especially the wife; Mu.1. -जालिका deceit, disguise. -ज्ञानिन् (also गृहेज्ञानिन्) 'wise only in the inside of the house', inexperienced, stupid, foolish. -तटी a terrace in front of the house. -दारु n. a house-post; नरपतिबले पार्श्वायाते स्थितं गृहदारुवत् Mk.4.3. -दाहः setting a house on fire, incendiarism. -दासः a domestic slave. -दासी a female domestic slave; एकदा गृहदासीषु यशोदा नन्दगेहिनी । कर्मान्तर- नियुक्तासु निर्ममन्थ स्वयं दधि ॥ Bhāg.1.9.1. -दीप्तिः f. the splendour or ornament of a house, a virtuous woman; प्रजनार्थं महाभागाः पूजार्हा गृहदीप्तयः Ms.9.26. -देवता the goddess of a house; (pl.) a class of household deities; Ks.4.74. -देहली the threshold of a house; यासां बलिः सपदि मद्गृहदेहलीनाम् Mk.1.9. -नमनम् wind. -नाशनः a wild pigeon. -नीडः a sparrow, -पतिः 1 a householder; बामं गृहपतिं नय Rv.6.53.2; a man who has entered on the second stage of life, one who, after having completed his studies, is married and settled. -2 a sacrificer. -3 the virtue of a householder; i. e. hospitality. -4 Ved. an epithet of Agni. -5 the maintenance of the sacred and perpetual fire. -6 the head or judge of a village; Mk.2; Dk.8. -पत्नी Ved. 'the mistress of a house', the wife of the householder; गृहान् गच्छ गृहपत्नी यथासः Rv.1.85.26. -पालः 1 the guardian of a house. -2 a housedog; आस्ते$वमत्योपन्यस्तं गृहपाल इवाहरन् Bhāg.3.3.15. -पिण्डी f. the basement of a building; Kāmikāgama 55.2-21. -पोतकः the site of a house, the ground on which it stands and which surrounds it. -पोषणम् maintenance of a household; तेन चास्य नियुक्ताभूत्स्वभार्या गृहपोषणे Ks.2.55. -प्रवेशः a solemn entrance into a house according to prescribed rites. -बभ्रुः a domestic ichneumon. -बलिः a domestic oblation, offering of the remnants of a meal to all creatures, such as animals, supernatural beings, and particularly household deities; Ms.3.265. ˚प्रियः a crane. ˚भुज् m. 1 a crow. -2 a sparrow; नीडारम्भैर्गृहबलि- भुजामाकुलग्रामचैत्याः Me.23. ˚देवता a deity to whom a domestic oblation is offered. -भङ्गः 1 one who is driven from his house, an exile. -2 destroying a house. -3 breaking into a house. -4 failure, ruin or destruction of a house, firm &c. -भञ्जनम् 1 breaking down or destroying a house. -2 causing the decay or ruin of a family. -भद्रकम् an audience-hall. -भर्तृ m. the master of a house; Bṛi. S. 53.58. -भूमिः f. the site of a house. -भेदिन् a. 1 prying into domestic affairs. -2 causing domestic quarrels. -भोजिन् m. an inmate of the same house, tenant; तस्मा- दप्यग्रहारान्ये जगृहुर्गृहभोजिनः Rāj. T.5.43. -मणिः a lamp. -माचिका a bat. -मार्जनी a female servant of the house; सख्योपेत्याग्रहीत्पाणिं यो$हं तद्गृहमार्जनी Bhāg.1.83.11. -मृगः a dog. -मेघः a multitude of houses; Rām.5. -मेध a. 1 one who performs the domestic rites or sacrifices; गृह- मेधास आ गत मरुतो माप भूतन Rv.7.59.1. -2 connected with the duties of a householder. (-धः) 1 a householder. -2 a domestic sacrifice; Bhāg.2.6.19. -मेधिन् m. a householder, a married Brāhmaṇa who has a household; (गृहैर्दारैर्मेधन्ते संगच्छन्ते Malli.); प्रजायै गृहमेधिनाम् R.1. 7; see गृहपति above. (-नी) 1 the wife of a householder, a house-wife; न व्यचष्ट वरारोहां गृहिणीं गृहमेधिनीम् Bhāg.4. 26.13. -2 the intellect based on the Sattva quality. -यज्ञः see गृहमेधः; Mb.1.18.5. -यन्त्रम् a stick or other instrument to which, on solemn occasions, flags are fastened; गृहयन्त्रपताकाश्रीरपौरादरनिर्मिता Ku.6.41. -रन्ध्रम् family-dissensions. -वाटिका, -वाटी a garden attached to a house. -वित्तः the owner of a house. -व्रत a. devoted to home. मतिर्न कृष्णे परतः स्वतो वा मिथो$भिपद्येत गृहव्रतानाम् Bhāg.7.5.3. -शायिन् m. a pigeon. -शुकः 1 a domestic parrot, one kept for pleasure; Amaru.16. -2 a domestic poet; आयातेन शुकैः सार्धं दत्ता गृहशुकेन यः । मुक्ताः प्राप्य प्रतिष्ठायां चक्रे ख्यातां शुकावलीम् ॥ Rāj. T.5.31. -संवेशकः a house-builder by profession; Ms.3.163. -सार property; गृहीतसारमेनं सपुत्रकलत्रं संयम्य Mu.1. -स्थः a householder, one who has entered on the stage of a house-holder; संकटा ह्याहिताग्नीनां प्रत्यवायैर्गृहस्थता U.1.9; see गृहपति above and Ms.3.68;6.9. ˚आश्रमः the life of a householder; see गृहाश्रम. ˚धर्मः the duty of a householder. -स्थूणा the pillar of a house.

geham	गेहम् [गो गणेशो गन्धर्वो वा ईहः ईप्सितो यत्र Tv.] A house, habitation; सा नारी विधवा जाता गेहे रोदिति तत्पतिः Subhāṣ. N. B. The loc. of this word is used with several words to form aluk Tat. compounds; e. g. गेहेक्ष्वेडिन् a. 'bellowing at home only', i. e. a coward, poltroon. गेहेदाहिन् a. 'sharp at home only' i.e. a coward. गेहेनर्दिन् a. 'shouting defiance at home only'; i. e. a coward, dunghill-cock; यद् गेहेनर्दिनमसौ शरैर्भीरुमभाययत् Bk.5.41. गेहमेहिन् a. 'making water at home; i.e. indolent. गेहेव्याडः a braggadocio, braggart, boaster. गेहेशूरः 'a househero', a carpet-knight, boasting coward.

gauḍaḥ	गौडः 1 N. of a country; the स्कन्दपुराण thus describes its position :-- वङ्गदेशं समारभ्य भुवनेशान्तगः शिवे । गौडदेशः समाख्यातः सर्वविद्याविशारदः ॥ -2 A particular subdivision of Brāhmaṇas. -3 see गोण्डः above. L. D. B. -डाः (pl.) The inhabitants of Gauḍa. -डी 1 Spirit distilled from molasses; गौडी पैष्ठी च माध्वी च विज्ञेया त्रिविधा सुरा Ms. 11.95. -2 One of the Rāgiṇis. -3 (In rhet.) One of the Ritis or Vrittis or styles of poetic composition; S. D. mentions four Ritis, while K. P. only three, गौडी being another name for पुरुषा वृत्ति; ओजःप्रकाशकैस्तैः (वर्णैः) तु परुषा (i. e. गौडी) M. P.7; ओजःप्रकाशकैर्वर्णैर्बन्ध आडम्बरः पुनः समासबहुला गौडी S. D.627. Here is an illustration : उन्मीलन्मधुगन्धलुब्धमधुपव्याधूतचूताङ्कुरः क्रीडत्कोकिलकाकंलीकलकलैरु- द्गीर्णकर्णज्वराः । नीयन्ते पथिकैः कथं कथमपि ध्यानावधानक्षणप्राप्त- प्राणसमासमागमरसोल्लासैरमी वासराः ॥ अलंकारशेखर 6. -डम् Sweet- meats; भोजनानि सुपूर्णानि गौडानि च सहस्रशः Rām.1.53.4. -a. Relating to or prepared from molasses; विविधानि च गौडानि खाण्डवानि तथैव च Rām.7.92.12. -Comp. -पादः N. of a commentator. -मालवः N. of a Rāga.

jānapadaḥ	जानपदः [जानेन उत्पत्त्या पद्यते पद् अप्; जनपदे भवः, अण् वा] 1 An inhabitant of the country, a rustic, boor, peasant (opp. पौर); ततः कतिपयाहःसु वृद्धो जानपदो युवा Rām.7.73.2. -2 A country. -3 A tax &c. from peasants. -4 subject. -दा A popular expression. -दी Profession, business.

tri	त्रि num. a. [Uṇ.5.66] (declined in pl. only, nom. त्रयः m., तिस्त्रः f., त्रीणि n.) Three; त एव हि त्रयो लोकास्त एव त्रय आश्रमाः &c. Ms.2.229; प्रियतमाभिरसौ तिसृभिर्बभौ R.9.18; त्रीणि वर्षाण्युदीक्षेत कुमार्यृतुमती सती Ms.9.9 [cf. L. tres; Gr. treis; A. S., Zend thri; Eng. three]. -Comp. -अंशः 1 a three-fold share; त्र्यंशं दायाद्धरेद्विप्रः Ms.9.151. -2 a third part. -3 three-fourths. -अक्ष a. triocular. -अक्षः, -अक्षकः an epithet of Śiva; शुष्कस्नायु- स्वराह्लादात्त्र्यक्षं जग्राह रावणः Pt.5.57. -अक्षरः 1 the mystic syllable ओम् consisting of three letters; see under अ. आद्यं यत्त्र्यक्षरं ब्रह्म Ms.11.265. -2 a matchmaker or घटक (that word consisting of three syllables). -3 a genealogist. (-री) knowledge, learning; see विद्या. -अङ्कटम्, -अङ्गटम् 1 three strings suspended to either end of a pole for carrying burdens. -2 a sort of collyrium. (-टः) N. of Śiva. -अङ्गम् (pl.) a tripartite army (chariots, cavalry and infantry). -अङ्गुलम् three fingers' breadth. -अञ्जनम् the three kinds of collyrium; i. e. कालाञ्जन, रसाञ्जन and पुष्पाञ्जन. -अञ्जलम्, -लिः three handfuls taken collectively. -अधिपतिः (the lord of the 3 guṇas or worlds), an epithet of Viṣṇu; Bhāg.3.16.24. -अधिष्ठानः the soul. (नम्) spirit, life (चैतन्य). -a. having three stations; Ms.12.4. -अध्वगा, -मार्गगा, -वर्त्मगा epithets of the river Ganges (flowing through the three worlds). -अनीक a. having the three properties of heat, rain and cold; त्यनीकः पत्यते माहिनावान् Rv.3.56.3. (-का) an army consisting of horses, elephants and chariots. -अब्द a. three years old. -ब्दम् three years taken collectively. -अम्बकः (also त्रियम्बक in the same sense though rarely used in classical literature) 'having three eyes', N. of Śiva.; त्रियम्बकं संयमिनं ददर्श Ku.3.44; जडीकृतस्त्र्यम्बकवीक्षणेन R.2. 42;3.49. ˚सखः an epithet of Kubera; कुबेरस्त्र्यम्बकसखः Ak. -अम्बका an epithet of Pārvatī -अशीत a. eighty-third. -अशीतिः f. eighty-three. -अष्टन् a. twenty-four. -अश्र, -अस्र a. triangular. (-स्रम्) a triangle. -अहः 1 a period of three days. -2 a festival lasting three days. -आर्षेयाः deaf, dumb and blind persons. -आहिक a. 1 performed or produced in three days. -2 recurring after the third day, tertian (as fever). -3 having provision for three days कुशूलकुम्भीधान्यो वा त्र्याहिको$श्वस्तनो$पि वा Y.1.128. -ऋचम् (तृचम् also) three Riks taken collectively; Ms.8.16. -ऐहिक a. having provision for three days. -ककुद् m. 1 N. of the mountain Trikūṭa. -2 N. of Viṣnu or Kṛiṣṇa. -3 the highest, chief. -4 a sacrifice lasting for ten nights. -ककुभ् m. Ved. 1 Indra. -2 Indra's thunderbolt. -कटु dry ginger, black pepper and long pepper taken together as a drug; शिरामोक्षं विधायास्य दद्यात् त्रिकटुकं गुडम् Śālihotra 62. -कण्टः, -कण्टकः a kind of fish. -करणी the side of a square 3 times as great as another. -कर्मन् n. the chief three duties of a Brāhmaṇa i. e. sacrifice, study of the Vedas, and making gifts or charity. (-m.) one who engages in these three duties (as a Brāhmaṇa). -काण्डम् N. of Amarsiṁha's dictionary. -कायः N. of Buddha. -कालम् 1 the three times; the past, the present, and the future; or morning, noon and evening. -2 the three tenses (the past, present, and future) of a verb. (-लम् ind. three times, thrice; ˚ज्ञ, ˚दर्शिन् a. omniscient (m.) 1 a divine sage, seer. -2 a deity. -3 N. of Buddha. ˚विद् m. 1 a Buddha. -2 an Arhat (with the Jainas). -कूटः N. of a mountain in Ceylon on the top of which was situated Laṅkā, the capital of Rāvaṇa.; Śi.2.5. -कूटम् sea-salt. कूर्चकम् a knife with three edges. -कोण a. triangular, forming a triangle. (-णः) 1 a triangle. -2 the vulva. -खम् 1 tin. -2 a cucumber. -खट्वम्, -खट्वी three bedsteads taken collectively. -क्षाराणि n. (pl.) salt-petre, natron and borax. -गणः an aggregate of the three objects of worldly existence; i. e. धर्म, अर्थ and काम; न बाधते$स्य त्रिगणः परस्परम् Ki.1.11; see त्रिवर्ग below. -गत a. 1 tripled. -2 done in three days. -गर्ताः (pl.) 1 N. of a country, also called जलन्धर, in the northwest of India. -2 the people or rulers of that country. -3 a particular mode of calculation. -गर्ता 1 a lascivious woman, wanton. -2 a woman in general. -3 a pearl. -4 a kind of cricket. -गुण a. 1 consisting of three threads; व्रताय मौञ्जीं त्रिगुणां बभार याम् Ku.5.1. -2 three-times repeated, thrice, treble, threefold, triple; सप्त व्यतीयुस्त्रिगुणानि तस्य (दिनानि) R.2. 25. -3 containing the three Guṇas सत्त्व, रजस् and तमस्. (-णम्) the Pradhāna (in Sāṅ. phil.); (-ind.) three times; in three ways. -णाः m. (pl.) the three qualities or constituents of nature; त्रयीमयाय त्रिगुणात्मने नमः K.1. (-णा) 1 Māyā or illusion (in Vedānta phil.). -2 an epithet of Durgā. -गुणाकृतम् ploughed thrice. -चक्षुस् m. an epithet of Śiva. -चतुर a. (pl.) three or four; गत्वा जवात्त्रिचतुराणि पदानि सीता B.R.6.34. -चत्वा- रिंश a. forty-third. -चत्वारिंशत् f, forty-three. -जगत् n. -जगती the three worlds, (1) the heaven, the atmosphere and the earth; or (2) the heaven, the earth, and the lower world; त्वत्कीर्तिः ...... त्रिजगति विहरत्येवमुर्वीश गुर्वी Sūkti.5.59. -जटः an epithet of Śiva. -जटा N. of a female demon, one of the Rākṣasa attendants kept by Rāvaṇa to watch over Sītā, when she was retained as a captive in the Aśoka-vanikā. She acted very kindly towards Sītā and induced her companions to do the same; सीतां मायेति शंसन्ति त्रिजटा समजीवयत् R.12.74. -जातम्, जातकम् The three spices (mace, cardamoms, cinnamon). -जीवा, -ज्या the sine of three signs or 9˚, a radius. -णता a bow; कामुकानिव नालीकांस्त्रिणताः सहसामुचन् Śi.19.61. -णव, -णवन् a. (pl.) three times nine; i. e. 27. -णाकः the heaven; तावत्त्रिणाकं नहुषः शशास Bhāg.6.13.16. -णाचिकेतः 1 a part of the Adhvaryu-sacrifice or Yajurveda, or one who performs a vow connected therewith (according to Kull. on Ms.3.185); Mb.13.9.26. -2 one who has thrice kindled the Nāchiketa fire or studied the Nāchiketa section of Kāṭhaka; त्रिणाचिकेत- स्त्रिभिरेत्य सन्धिम् Kaṭh.1.17. -णीता a wife ('thrice married'; it being supposed that a girl belongs to Soma, Gandharva and Agni before she obtains a human husband). -णेमि a. with three fellies; विचिन्वतो$भूत् सुमहांस्त्रिणेमिः Bhāg.3.8.2. -तक्षम्, तक्षी three carpenters taken collectively. -दण्डम् 1 the three staves of a Saṁnyāsin (who has resigned the world) tied togethar so as to form one. -2 the triple subjection of thought, word, and deed. (-ण्डः) the state of a religious ascetic; ज्ञानवैराग्यरहितस्त्रिदण्डमुपजीवति Bhāg.11.18.4. -दण्डिन् m. 1 a religious mendicant or Saṁnyāsin who has renounced all worldly attachments, and who carries three long staves tied together so as to form one in his right hand; तल्लिप्सुः स यतिर्भूत्वा त्रिदण्डी द्वारका- मगात् Bhāg.1.86.3. -2 one who has obtained command over his mind, speech, and body (or thought, word, and deed); cf. वाग्दण्डो$थ मनोदण्डः कायदण्डस्तथैव च । यस्यैते निहिता बुद्धौ त्रिदण्डीति स उच्यते ॥ Ms.12.1. -दशाः (pl.) 1 thirty. -2 the thirty-three gods:-- 12 Ādityas, 8 Vasus, 11 Rudras and 2 Aśvins. (-शः) a god, an immortal; तस्मिन्मघोनस्त्रिदशान्विहाय सहस्रमक्ष्णां युगपत्पपात Ku.3.1. ˚अङ्कुशः (-शम्) the heaven. ˚आयुधम् Indra's thunderbolt; R.9.54. ˚आयुधम् rainbow; अथ नभस्य इव त्रिदशायुधम् R.9.54. ˚अधिपः, ˚ईश्वरः, ˚पतिः epithets of Indra. ˚अधिपतिः N. of Śiva. ˚अध्यक्षः, ˚अयनः an epithet of Viṣṇu. ˚अरिः a demon. ˚आचार्यः an epithet of Bṛihaspati. ˚आधार Nectar. ˚आलयः, ˚आवासः 1 heaven. -2 the mountain Meru. -3 a god. ˚आहारः 'the food of the gods', nectar. ˚इन्द्रः 1 Indra. -2 Śiva. -3 Brahman. ˚गुरुः an epithet of Bṛihaspati, ˚गोपः a kind of insect; (cf. इन्द्रगोप) श्रद्दधे त्रिदशगोपमात्रके दाहशक्तिमिव कृष्णवर्त्मनि R.11.42. ˚दीर्घिका an epithet of the Ganges. ˚पतिः Indra; एषो$प्यैरावतस्थस्त्रिदशपतिः Ratn.4.11. ˚पुङ्गवः Viṣṇu; Rām.1. ˚मञ्जरी the holy basil. ˚वधू, ˚वनिता, an Apsaras or heavenly damsel; कैलासस्य त्रिदशवनितादर्पणस्यातिथिः स्याः Me.6. ˚वर्त्मन् the sky. ˚श्रेष्ठः 1 Agni. -2 Brahman. ˚दशीभूत Become divine; त्रिदशीभूतपौराणां स्वर्गान्तरमकल्पयत् R.15.12. -दिनम् three days collectively. ˚स्पृश् m. concurrence of three lunations with one solar day. -दिवम् 1 the heaven; त्रिमार्गयेव त्रिदिवस्य मार्गः Ku.1.28; Ś.7.3. -2 sky, atmosphere. -3 paradise. -4 happiness. (-वा) cardamoms. ˚अधीशः, ˚ईशः 1 an epithet of Indra. -2 a god. ˚आलयः the heaven; अश्वमेधजिताँल्लोका- नाप्नोति त्रिदिवालये Mb.13.141.53. ˚उद्भवा 1 the Ganges. -2 small cardamoms. ˚ओकस् m. a god; वपुषि त्रिदिवौकसां परं सह पुष्पैरपतत्र्छिलीमुखाः Vikr.15.72. ˚गत dead; त्रिदिवगतः किमु वक्ष्यते पिता मे Vikr.6.62. -दृश् m. an epithet of Śiva. -दोषम् vitiation or derangement of the three humours of the body, i. e. वात, पित्त and कफ. -धा ind. in 3 parts, ways or places; triply, ˚त्वम् tripartition; Ch. Up. -धातुः an epithet of Gaṇeśa; -तुम् 1 the triple world. -2 the aggregate of the 3 minerals or humours. -धामन् m. 1 N. of Viṣṇu. -2 of Vyāsa; -3 of Śiva. -4 of Agni. -5 death. -n. the heaven; हंसो हंसेन यानेन त्रिधाम परमं ययौ Bhāg.3.24.2. -धारा the Ganges. -नयन, -नेत्रः, -लोचनः epithets of Śiva; R.3. 66; Ku.3.66;5.72. -नवत a. ninety-third. -नवतिः f. ninety three. -नयना Pārvat&imacr. -नाभः Viṣṇu; Bhāg.8. 17.26. -नेत्रचूडामणिः the moon. -नेत्रफलः the cocoa-nut tree. -पञ्च a. three-fold five, i. e. fifteen. -पञ्चाश a. fiftythird. -पञ्चाशत् f. fifty-three. -पुटः glass (काच). -पताकः 1 the hand with three fingers stretched out or erect. -2 the forehead marked naturally with three horizontal lines. -पत्रकः the Palāśa tree. -पथम् 1 the three paths taken collectively, i. e. the sky, atmosphere, and the earth, or the sky, earth and the lower world. -2 a place where three roads meet. (-था) an epithet of Mathura. ˚गा, ˚गामिनी an epithet of the Ganges; गङ्गा त्रिपथगामिनी; धृतसत्पथस्त्रिपथगामभितः स तमारुरोह पुरुहूतसुतः Ki.6.1; Amaru.99. -पद्, -पाद्, -पात् m. Ved. 1 Viṣṇu. -2 fever (personified). -पद a. three-footed. (-दम्) a tripod; त्रिपदैः करकैः स्थालैः ...... Śiva. B.22. 62. -पदिका 1 a tripod. -2 a stand with three feet. -पदी 1 the girth of an elephant; नास्रसत्करिणां ग्रैवं त्रिपदी- च्छेदिनामपि R.4.48. -2 the Gāyatrī metre. -3 a tripod. -4 the plant गोधापदी. -परिक्रान्त a. one who walks thrice round a sacred fire. -पर्णः Kiṁśuka tree. -पाटः 1 intersection of a prolonged side and perpendicular (in a quadrangular figure). -2 the figure formed by such intersection. -पाटिका a beak. पाठिन् a. 1 familiar with Saṁhitā, Pada, and Krama. -2 one who learns a thing after three repetitions. -पादः 1 the Supreme Being. -2 fever. -पाद् a. 1 having three feet. -2 consisting of three parts, having three fourths; राघवः शिथिलं तस्थौ भुवि धर्मस्त्रिपादिव R.15.96. -3 trinomial. (-m.) 1 an epithet of Viṣṇu in his dwarf incarnation. -2 the Supreme Being. -पिटकम् the 3 collections of Buddhistic sacred writings (सुत्त, विनय and अभिधम्म). -पुट a. triangular. (-टः) 1 an arrow. -2 the palm of the hand. -3 a cubit. -4 a bank or shore. -पुटकः a triangle. -पुटा an epithet of Durgā. -पुटिन् m. the castor-oil plant. -पुण्ड्रम्, -पुण्ड्रक a mark on the forehead consisting of three lines made with cowdung ashes. -पुरम् 1 a collection of three cities. -2 the three cities of gold, silver, and iron in the sky, air and earth built for demons by Maya; (these cities were burnt down, along the demons inhabiting them, by Śiva at the request of the gods); Ku.7.48; Amaru.2; संरक्ताभिस्त्रिपुरविजयो गीयते किन्नरीभिः Me.56; Bh.3.123; (-रः) N. of a demon or demons presiding over these cities. ˚अधिपतिः N. of Maya, ˚अन्तकः, ˚अरिः, ˚घ्नः, ˚दहनः, ˚द्विष् m., हरः &c. epithets of Śiva; अये गौरीनाथ त्रिपुरहर शम्भो त्रिनयन Bh.3.123; R.17.14. ˚दाहः burning of the three cities; मुहुरनुस्मरयन्तमनुक्षपं त्रिपुरदाहमुमापतिसेविनः Ki.5.14. ˚सुन्दरी Durgā. (-री) 1 N. of a place near Jabalpura, formerly capital of the kings of Chedi. -2 N. of a country. -पुरुष a 1 having the length of three men. -2 having three assistants. (-षम्) the three ancestorsfather, grand-father and great-grand-father. -पृष्ठम् the highest heaven; Bhāg.1.19.23. (ष्ठः) Viṣṇu. -पौरुष a. 1 belonging to, or extending over, three generations of men. 2 offered to three (as oblations). -3 inherited from three (as an estate). -प्रस्रुतः an elephant in rut. -फला (1) the three myrobalans taken collectively, namely, Terminalia Chebula, T. Bellerica, and Phyllanthus (Mar. हिरडा, बेहडा and आंवळकाठी). Also (2) the three sweet fruits (grape, pomegranate, and date); (3) the three fragrant fruits (nutmeg, arecanut, and cloves). -बन्धनः the individual soul. -बलिः, बली, -वलिः, -वली f. 1 the three folds or wrinkles of skin above the navel of a woman (regarded as a mark of beauty); क्षामोदरोपरिलसत्त्रिवलीलतानाम् Bh.1.93,81; cf. Ku.1.39. -2 the anus. -बलीकम् the anus. -बाहुः a kind of fighting with swords. -ब्रह्मन् a. with ब्रह्मा, विष्णु and महेश. -भम् three signs of the zodiac, or ninety degrees. -भङ्गम् a pose in which the image is bent at three parts of the body. -भद्रम् copulation, sexual union, cohabitation. -भागः 1 the third part; त्रिभागं ब्रह्महत्यायाः कन्या प्राप्नोति दुष्यती Mb.12.165.42. -2 the third part of a sign of the zodiac. -भुक्ल a. one possessed of learning, good conduct and good family-descent (Dānasāgara, Bibliotheca Indica,274, Fasc.1, p.29). -भुजम् a triangle. -भुवनम् the three worlds; पुण्यं यायास्त्रिभुवन- गुरोर्धाम चण्डीश्वरस्य Me.35; Bh.1.99. ˚गुरु Śiva. ˚कीर्तिरसः a patent medicine in Āyurveda. ˚पतिः Viṣṇu. -भूमः a palace with three floors. -मद the three narcotic plants; the three-fold haughtiness; Bhāg.3.1.43. -मधु n. -मधुरम् 1 sugar, honey, and ghee. -2 three verses of the Ṛigveda (1.9.6-8; मधु वाता ऋतायते˚). -3 a ceremony based on the same; L. D. B. -4 threefold utterance of a vedic stanza ˚मधु वाता -m. a reciter and performer of the above ceremony; L. D. B. -मार्गा the Ganges; त्रिमार्गयेव त्रिदिवस्य मार्गः Ku.1.28. -मुकुटः the Trikūṭa mountain. -मुखः an epithet of Buddha. -मुनि ind. having the three sages पाणिनि, कात्यायन and पतञ्जलि; त्रिमुनि व्याकरणम्. -मूर्तिः 1 the united form of Brahmā, Viṣṇu, and Maheśa, the Hindu triad; नमस्त्रिमूर्तये तुभ्यं प्रांक्सृष्टेः केवलात्मने । गुणत्रयविभायाय पश्चाद्भेदमुपेयुषे ॥ Ku.2.4. -2 Buddha, or Jina. -मूर्धन् m. 1 a demon; त्रयश्च दूषण- खरस्त्रिमूर्धानो रणे हताः U.2.15. -2 a world called महर्लोक; G&imac;rvāṇa; cf. अमृतं क्षेममभयं त्रिमूर्ध्नो$धायि मूर्धसु Bhāg.2.6.19. -यव a. weighing 3 barley corns; Ms.8.134. -यष्टिः a necklace of three strings. -यामकम् sin. -यामा 1 night (consisting of 3 watches of praharas, the first and last half prahara being excluded); संक्षिप्येत क्षण इव कथं दीर्घयामा त्रियामा Me.11, Ku.7.21,26; R.9.7; V.3. 22. -2 turmeric. -3 the Indigo plant. -4 the river Yamuṇā. -युगः an epithet of Viṣṇu; धर्मं महापुरुष पासि युगानुवृत्तं छन्नः कलौ यदभवस्त्रियुगो$थ सत्त्वम् Bhāg.7.9.38; the god in the form of यज्ञपुरुष; Bhāg.5.18.35. -योनिः a law-suit (in which a person engages from anger, covetousness, or infatuation). -रसकम् spirituous liquor; see त्रिसरकम्. -रात्र a. lasting for three nights. (-त्रः) a festival lasting for three nights. (-त्रम्) a period of three nights. -रेखः a conch-shell. -लिङ्ग a. having three genders, i. e. an adjective. -2 possessing the three Guṇas. (-गाः) the country called Telaṅga. (-गी) the three genders taken collectively. -लोकम् the three worlds. (-कः) an inhabitant of the three worlds; यद्धर्मसूनोर्बत राजसूये निरीक्ष्य दृक्स्वस्त्ययनं त्रिलोकः Bhāg.3. 2.13. ˚आत्मन् m. the Supreme Being. ˚ईशः the sun. ˚नाथः 'lord of the three worlds', an epithet of 1 Indra; त्रिलोकनाथेन सदा मखद्विषस्त्वया नियम्या ननु दिव्यचक्षुषा R.3.45. -2 of Śiva; Ku.5.77. ˚रक्षिन् a. protecting the 3 worlds; त्रिलोकरक्षी महिमा हि वज्रिणः V.1.6. -लोकी the three worlds taken collectively, the universe; सत्यामेव त्रिलोकीसरिति हरशिरश्चुम्बिनीविच्छटायाम् Bh.3.95; Śānti.4.22. -लोचनः Śiva. (-ना) 1 an unchaste woman. -2 an epithet of Durgā. -लोहकम् the three metals:-- gold, silver, and copper. -वर्गः 1 the three objects of wordly existence, i. e. धर्म, अर्थ, and काम; अनेन धर्मः सविशेषमद्य मे त्रिवर्गसारः प्रतिभाति भाविनि Ku.5.38; अन्योन्यानुबन्धम् (त्रिवर्गम्) Kau. A.1.7; प्राप त्रिवर्गं बुबुधे$त्रिवर्गम् (मोक्षम्) Bu. Ch.2.41. -2 the three states of loss, stability, and increase; क्षयः स्थानं च वृद्धिश्च त्रिवर्गो नीतिवेदिनाम् Ak. -3 the three qualities of nature, i. e. सत्त्व, रजस्, and तमस्. -4 the three higher castes. -5 the three myrobalans. -6 propriety, decorum. -वर्णकम् the first three of the four castes of Hindus taken collectively. -वर्ष a. three years old; Ms.5.7. -वलिः, -ली f. (in comp.) three folds over a woman's navel (regarded as a mark of beauty) -वली the anus. -वारम् ind. three times, thrice. -विक्रमः Viṣṇu in his fifth or dwarf incarnation. ˚रसः a patent medicine in Āyurveda. -विद्यः a Brāhmaṇa versed in the three Vedas. -विध a. of three kinds, three-fold. -विष्टपम्, -पिष्टपम् 1 the world of Indra, heaven; त्रिविष्टपस्येव पतिं जयन्तः R.6.78. -2 the three worlds. ˚सद् m. a god. -वृत् a. 1 threefold; मौञ्जी त्रिवृत्समा श्लक्ष्णा कार्या विप्रस्य मेखला Ms.2.42. -2 consisting of three parts (as three गुणs, विद्याs); Bhāg.3.24.33;1.23.39; (consisting of three letters- ओङ्कार); हिरण्यगर्भो वेदानां मन्त्राणां प्रणवस्त्रिवृत् Bhāg.11.16.12. (-m.) 1 a sacrifice. -2 a girdle of three strings; Mb.12.47.44. -3 an amulet of three strings. (-f.) a plant possessing valuable purgative properties. ˚करण combining three things, i. e. earth, water, and fire. -वृत्तिः livelihood through 3 things (sacrifice, study and alms). -वेणिः, -णी f. the place near Prayāga where the Ganges joins the Yamunā and receives under ground the Sarasvatī; the place called दक्षिणप्रयाग where the three sacred rivers separate. -वेणुः 1 The staff (त्रिदण्ड) of a Saṁnyāsin; केचित् त्रिवेणुं जगृहुरेके पात्रं कमण्डलुम् Bhāg.11.23.34. -2 The pole of a chariot; अथ त्रिवेणुसंपन्नं ...... बभञ्ज च महारथम् Rām.3. 51.16; Mb.7.156.83; a three bannered (chariot); Bhāg.4.26.1. -वेदः a Brāhmaṇa versed in the three Vedas. -शक्तिः a deity (त्रिकला), Māyā; Bhāg.2.6.31. -शङ्कुः 1 N. of a celebrated king of the Solar race, king of Ayodhyā and father of Hariśchandra. [He was a wise, pious, and just king, but his chief fault was that he loved his person to an inordinate degree. Desiring to celebrate a sacrifice by virtue of which he could go up to heaven in his mortal body, he requested his family-priest Vasiṣṭha to officiate for him; but being refused he next requested his hundred sons who also rejected his absurd proposal. He, therefore, called them cowardly and impotent, and was, in return for these insults, cursed and degraded by them to be a Chāṇḍāla. While he was in this wretched condition, Viśvāmitra, whose family Triśaṅku had in times of famine laid under deep obligations, undertook to celebrate the sacrifice, and invited all the gods to be present. They, however, declined; whereupon the enraged Viśvāmitra. by his own power lifted up Triśaṅku to the skies with his cherished mortal body. He began to soar higher and higher till his head struck against the vault of the heaven, when he was hurled down head-foremost by Indra and the other gods. The mighty Viśvāmitra, however, arrested him in his downward course, saying 'Stay Triśaṅku', and the unfortunate monarch remained suspended with his head towards the earth as a constellation in the southern hemisphere. Hence the wellknown proverb:-- त्रिशङ्कुरिवान्तरा तिष्ठ Ś.2.] -2 the Chātaka bird. -3 a cat. -4 a grass-hopper. -5 a firefly. ˚जः an epithet of Hariśchandra. ˚याजिन् m. an epithet of Viśvāmitra. -शत a. three hundred. (-तम्) 1 one hundred and three. -2 three hundred. -शरणः a Buddha. -शर्करा three kinds of sugar (गुडोत्पन्ना, हिमोत्था, and मधुरा). -शाख a. three-wrinkled; भ्रुकुट्या भीषणमुखः प्रकृत्यैव त्रिशाखया Ks.12.72. -शालम् a house with three halls or chambers. -शिखम् 1 a trident; तदापतद्वै त्रिशिखं गरुत्मते Bhāg.1.59.9. -2 a crown or crest (with three points). -शिरस् m. 1 N. of a demon killed by Rāma. -2 an epithet of Kubera. -3 fever. त्रिशिरस्ते प्रसन्नो$स्मि व्येतु ते मज्ज्वराद्भयम् Bhāg.1.63.29. -शीर्षः Śiva. -शीर्षकम्, -शूलम् a trident. ˚अङ्कः, ˚धारिन् m. an epithet of Śiva. -शुक्लम् the holy combination of 'three days' viz. Uttarāyaṇa (day of the gods), the bright half of the moon (day of the manes) and daytime; त्रिशुक्ले मरणं यस्य, L. D. B. -शूलिन् m. an epithet of Śiva. -शृङ्गः 1 the Trikūṭa mountain. -2 a triangle. -शोकः the soul. -षष्टिः f. sixty-three. -ष्टुभ् f. a metre of 4 x 11 syllables. -संध्यम्, -संध्यी the three periods of the day, i. e. dawn, noon, and sunset; also -त्रिसवनम् (-षवणम्); Ms.11.216. -संध्यम् ind. at the time of the three Sandhyas; सान्निध्यं पुष्करे येषां त्रिसन्ध्यं कुरुनन्दन Mb. -सप्तत a. seventy-third. -सप्ततिः f. seventy-three. -सप्तन्, -सप्त a. (pl.) three times 7, i. e. 21. -सम a. (in geom.) having three equal sides, equilateral. -सरः milk, sesamum and rice boiled together. -सरकम् drinking wine thrice ('सरकं शीधुपात्रे स्यात् शीधुपाने च शीधुनि' इति विश्वः); प्रातिभं त्रिसरकेण गतानाम् Śi.1.12. -सर्गः the creation of the 3 Guṇas; Bhāg.1.1.1. -साधन a. having a threefold causality; R.3.13. -सामन् a. singing 3 Sāmans (an उद्गातृ); उद्गाता तत्र संग्रामे त्रिसामा दुन्दुभिर्नृप Mb.12.98.27. -साम्यम् an equilibrium of the three (qualities); Bhāg.2.7.4. -सुपर्णः, -र्णम् 1 N. of the three Ṛigvedic verses (Rv.1.114.3-5). -2 N. of T. Ār.1.48-5; -a. familiar with or reciting these verses; Ms.3.185. -स्थली the three sacred places : काशी, प्रयाग, and गया. -स्थानम् the head, neck and chest together; तन्त्रीलयसमायुक्तं त्रिस्थानकरणान्वितम् Rām.7.71.15. -a. 1 having 3 dwelling places. -2 extending through the 3 worlds. -स्रोतस् f. an epithet of the Ganges; त्रिस्रोतसं वहति यो गगनप्रतिष्ठाम् Ś.7.6; R.1.63; Ku.7.15. -सीत्य, -हल्य a. ploughed thrice (as a field). -हायण a. three years old.

traipuraḥ	त्रैपुरः 1 The Tripura country. -2 A ruler or inhabitant of that country.

dāśerakaḥ	दाशेरकः 1 A fisherman; Ks.124.24. -2 The Mālava country. -काः m. (pl.) The rulers or inhabitants of that country; see दाशेर also.

div	दिव् f. [दीव्यन्त्यत्र दिव्-बा˚ आधारे डिवि Tv.] (Nom. sing. द्यौः) 1 The heaven; दिवं मरुत्वानिव भोक्ष्यते भुवम् R.3. 4,12; Me.3. -2 The sky; दिव्यन्तरिक्षे भूमौ च घोरमुत्पात- जं भयम् Rām.2.1.43. -3 A day; अत्र भोक्तव्यमस्माभिर्दिवा- रूढं क्षुधार्दिताः Bhāg.1.13.6. -4 Light, brilliance. -5 Fire, glow of fire. N. B. The compounds with दिव् as first member are mostly irregular; e. g. दिवस्पतिः an epithet of Indra (of the 13th मन्वन्तर); Bhāg.8.13.32; अनतिक्रमणीया दिवस्पतेराज्ञा Ś.6; दिवस्पृथिव्यौ heaven and earth. दिविज्ञः, दिविष्ठः, दिविस्थः, दिविस (ष) द् m., दिवोकस् m., दिवौकस्, -सः 'inhabitant of the heaven', a god; Ś.7; R.3.19,47; दिविषद्वृन्दैः Gīt.7. दिवस्पृश m. the Supreme Being. दिविस्पृश् a. reaching or pervading the sky. दिवोद्भवा cardamoms. दिवोल्का a meteor. दिवौकस् m. 1 a god. -2 the Chātaka bird. -3 a deer. -4 a bee. -5 an elephant.

deśya	देश्य a. [दिश्-कर्मणि ण्यत् देश-यत् वा] 1 To be pointed out or proved. -2 Local, provincial. -3 Born in a country, native. -4 Genuine, of genuine descent. -5 Being on the spot or place (where anything is due). -6 Not far from, almost; see देशीय above. -श्यः 1 An eyewitness of anything अभियोक्ता दिशेद्देश्यम् Ms.8.52-53. -2 The inhabitant of a country. -श्यम् The statement of a question or argument, the thing to be proved or substantiated (पूर्वपक्ष).

draviḍaḥ	द्रविडः 1 N. of a country on the east coast of the Deccan (pl.); अस्ति द्रविडेषु काञ्ची नाम नगरी Dk.13. -2 An inhabitant or native of that country; जरद्द्रविडधार्मिकस्ये- च्छया निसृष्टैः K.229. -3 N. of a degraded tribe; cf. Ms.1.22. -3 A collective name for five peoples (आन्ध्र, कर्नाटक, गुर्जर, तैलङ्ग and महाराष्ट्र); see द्राविड.

dharṣita	धर्षित a. [धृष्-कर्मणि क्त-इट् गुणश्च] 1 Seduced, outraged, violated. -2 Overpowered, overcome, defeated; यत्काव्यं मधुवर्षि धर्षितपरास्तर्केषु यस्योक्तयः N.22.155. -3 Ill-treated, abused, insulted. -तम् 1 Contumely, pride. -2 Cohabitation, copulation. -3 Impatience, intolerance. -ता A harlot, a disloyal or unchaste woman.

dhānam	धानम् नी [धा भावे-ल्युट्] 1 A receptacle, seat; as in मसीधानी, राजधानी, यमधानी; रविं दधाने$प्यरविन्दधाने Śi.4.12. -2 Nourishing, nourishment. -नी 1 The site of a habitation. -2 Coriander.

narakaḥ	नरकः कम् 1 Hell, infernal regions (corresponding to the realm of Pluto; there are said to be 21 different parts of these regions where different kinds of tortures are inflicted upon sinners तामिस्र, अन्धतामिस्र, महारौरव, रौरव, नरक, कालसूत्र, महानरक, संजीवन, माहवीचि, तपन, संप्रतापन, संहात, काकोल, कुड्मल, प्रतिमूर्तिक, लोहशङ्कु, ऋजीष, पन्था, शाल्मली, असितपत्रवन, लोहदारक are the 21 Narakas; cf. Ms.4. 88-9). -2 A liquor-vessel; नरकं मद्यभाजने Nm. -कः N. of a demon, king of Prāgjyotiṣa. [According to one account he carried off Aditi's ear-rings and Kṛiṣna at the request of the gods killed him in a single combat and recovered the jewels. According to another account, Naraka assumed the form of an elephant and carried off the daughter of Viśvakarman and outraged her. He also seized the daughters of Gandharvas, gods, men and the nymphs themselves, and collected more than 16 damsels in his harem. These, it is related, were transferred by Kṛiṣṇa to his own harem after he had slain Naraka. The demon was born of earth, and hence called 'Bhauma'] -Comp. -अन्तकः, -अरिः, -जित्, -रिपुः m. epithets of Kṛiṣṇa; नरकरिपुणा सार्धं तेषां सभीमकिरीटिनाम् Ve.3.24. -आमयः 1 the soul after death. -2 a ghost, spirit. -आवासः an inhabitant of hell. -कुण्डम् a pit in hell where the wicked are tormented (86 such places are enumerated). -देवता 'the deity of hell', Nirṛiti (निर्ऋति). -रूपिन् a. hellish. -वासः the abode in hell. -स्या the Vaitariṇī river.

nāraka	नारक a. (-की f.) [नरक एव प्रज्ञा˚ अण् नरकस्येदम् अण् वा] Hellish, relating to hell, infernal. -कः 1 The infernal regions, hell; कुभ्मीपाकं गुरुमपि हरे नारकं नापनेतुम् Mukundamālā 6. -2 An inhabitant of hell. नारकिक nārakika नारकिन् nārakin नारकीय nārakīya नारकिक नारकिन् नारकीय a. Hellish. -m. An inhabitant of hell.

nikāyaḥ	निकायः [नि-चि-घञ् कुत्वम्] 1 A heap, an assemblage, a class, multitude, flock, group in general; Mv.1. निकाय इति सङ्घात् औत्तराधर्येणावस्थित उच्यते । ŚB. on MS. 8.1.19; तप्तहेमनिकायाभं शितिकण्ठं त्रिलोचनम् (वीक्ष्य) Bhāg. 4.24.25. -2 A congregation, school, an association of persons who perform like duties. -3 A house, habitation dwelling-place; Ms.1.36; काशीनिकायः &c. -4 The body. -5 Aim, butt, mark. -6 The Supreme Being. -7 Ved. Air, wind; Vāj.15.5.

nikāyyaḥ	निकाय्यः [cf. P.III.1.129] A dwelling, habitation, house; न प्रणाय्यो जनः कच्चिन्निकाय्यं ते$धितिष्ठति Bk.6.66; cf. पाय्यसान्नाय्यनिकाय्यधाय्याः मानहविर्निवाससामिधेनीषु P.III. 1.29 quoted in ŚB. on MS.5.3.5.

niketaḥ	निकेतः तकः 1 A house, habitation, mansion, abode; श्रितगोकर्णनिकेतमीश्वरम् R.8.33;14.58; Bg.12.19; Ku.5.25; Ms.6.26; Śi.5.26. -2 A mark, countersign. -3 A stage in the religious life of a Brāhmaṇa; Mb.3.

nilayanam	निलयनम् 1 Setting in a place, alighting. -2 A place of refuge; निलयनं चानिलयनं च Tait. Up.2.6; Bhāg. 5.19.2. -3 A house, dwelling, habitation; नदीनिलयनाः सर्पा नदीकुटिलगामिनः । तिष्ठन्त्यावृत्य पन्थानमतो दुःखतरं वनम् ॥ Rām.2.28.2; Ki.7.2. -4 The act of going out.

nivasatiḥ	निवसतिः f. A house, habitation, abode, residence, dwelling.

nivasanam	निवसनम् 1 A house, habitation, dwelling; निवसनं श्मशानम् Ā. L.16. -2 A garment, cloth, an undergarment; प्रस्थितं निवसनग्रहणाय Śi.1.6; R.19.41.

nivāsaḥ	निवासः Living, dwelling, residing. -2 A house, adode, habitation, resting-place; निवासश्चिन्तायाः Mk.1.15; Śi.4.63;5.21; Bg.9.18; Mk.3.23. -3 Passing the night. -4 A dress, garment. -5 Nightquarters. -6 Refuge, receptacle, asylum; जगन्निवासो वसुदेवसद्मनि Śi.1.1. -Comp. -भवनम् sleeping-room. -रचना an edifice; दृष्ट्वा प्राङ्भवतीं निवासरचनामस्माकमाशान्वितः Mk.3.23.

nivāsin	निवासिन् a. 1 Dwelling, residing. -2 Wearing, dressed or clothed in; नवं नवक्षौमनिवासिनी सा Ku.7.26. -m. A resident, an inhabitant; अथानाथाः प्रकृतयो मातृ- बन्धुनिवासिनम् R.12.12.

niveśanam	निवेशनम् 1 Entering, entrance. -2 Halting, encamping. -3 Marrying, marriage; प्रतिलोमनिवेशनम् Bhāg. 3.7.31. -4 Entering in writing, inscribing. -5 An abode, a dwelling, house, habitation. -6 A camp; निवेशयामास मुदा कल्पितान्यनिवेशने Bhāg.1.53.16; Mb.3. 24.1. -7 A town or city; पार्थिवस्य निवेशने Rām.7.62. 18. -8 A nest. -नी The earth.

niśānta	निशान्त p. p. 1 Tranquil, calmed, quiet, patient. -2 Customary, traditional. -तम् 1 A house, habitation, dwelling; तस्याः स राजोपपदं निशान्तं कामीव कान्ताहृदयं विवेश R.16.4. -3 A harem, seraglio; Kau. A.1. -Comp. -नारी a housewife.

naimiṣa	नैमिष a. (-षी f.) Lasting for a 'nimiṣa' or twinkling, momentary, transient. -षम् N. of a sacred forest celebrated as the residence of certain sages to whom Sauti related the Mahābhārata; शिश्रिये श्रुतवतामपश्चिमः पश्चिमे वयसि नैमिषं वशी R.19.1; (the name is thus derived:-- यतस्तु निमिषेणेदं निहतं दानवं बलम् । अरण्ये$स्मिंस्ततस्तेन नैमिषारण्यसंज्ञितम् ॥). नैमिषीयः naimiṣīyḥ नैमिषेयः naimiṣēyḥ नैमिषीयः नैमिषेयः An inhabitant of the forest, called Naimiṣa; सह नैमिषीयाणामुद्गाता बभूव Ch. Up.1.2.13.

nairayikaḥ	नैरयिकः An inhabitant of hell.

naiṣadha	नैषध 1 A king of the Niṣadhas. -2 Especially, an epithet of king Nala, q. v.; स नैषधस्यार्थपतेः सुतायाम् R. -3 A native or inhabitant of Niṣadha. -4 N. of a Mahākāvya by Śrīharṣa (treating of the adventures of Nala, king of the Niṣadhas).

paśuḥ	पशुः [सर्वमविशेषेण पश्यति, दृश्-कु पशादेशः] 1 Cattle (both singly and collectively); प्रजापतिर्हि वैश्याय सृष्ट्वा परिददे पशून् Ms.9.327,331. -2 An animal in general; a being; सर्वथा यत् पशून् पाति तैश्च यद् रमते पुनः तेषामधिपतिर्यच्च तस्मात् पशुपतिः स्मृतः ॥ Mb.7.22.123. -3 A sacrificial animal, such as a goat; an oblation, a victim. -4 A brute, beast; often added to words meaning 'man' to show contempt; a fool; भूतानि चात्मन्यपृथग्दिदृक्षतां प्रायेण रोषो$भिभवेद् यथा पशुम् Bhāg.4.6.46; पुरुषपशोश्च पशोश्च को विशेषः H.1; cf. नृपशु, नरपशु &c. -5 N. of a subordinate deity and one of Śiva's followers. -6 An uninitiated person. -7 The soul, the Supreme Spirit. -8 A sacrifice in which an animal is killed. -9 Fire. -Comp. -अवदानम् a sacrifice of animals. -एकत्वन्यायः the rule that the number is intended to be expressed and enjoined when the sense conveyed by the verb forms the principle matter of a sentence. Thus पशुमालभते means एकत्वपुंस्त्वविशिष्टं पशु- मालभते. This न्याय is established by जैमिनि in MS.4.1. 11-16 and 17 an explained by शबर in his भाष्य thereon discussing the text पशुमालभते. (This न्याय is to be contrasted with ग्रहैकत्वन्याय where the लिङ्ग and वचन are अविवक्षित q. v.). -कर्मन, क्रिया 1 the act of animalsacrifice. -2 copulation. -Comp. -गायत्री a Mantra whispered into the ear of an animal which is about to be sacrificed; it is a parody of the celebrated Gāyatrī q. v.; पशुपाशाय विद्महे शिरश्छेदाय (विश्वकर्मणे) धीमहि । तन्नो जीवः प्रचोदयात्. -घातः slaughter of animals for sacrifice. -घ्न a. slaughtering cattle; वृथापशुध्नः प्राप्नोति प्रेत्य जन्मनि जन्मनि Ms.5.38. -चर्या copulation. -देवता the deity to whom an animal is offered. -धर्मः 1 the nature or characteristics of cattle. -2 treatment of cattle. -3 promiscuous cohabitation; अयं (नियोगः) द्विजैर्हि विद्वद्भिः पशुधर्मो विगर्हितः Ms.9.66. -4 the marrying of widows. -नाथः an epithet of Śiva. -पः a herdsman. -पतिः 1 an epithet of Śiva; Me.38,58; पशुपतिरपि तान्यहानि कृच्छ्रादगमयदद्रिसुतासमा- गमोत्कः Ku.6.95. कस्त्वं ? शूली,.........पशुपतिर्नैव दृश्ये विषाणे Subhāṣ. -2 a herdsman, owner of cattle. -3 N. of a philosopher who taught the philosophical doctrine called पाशुपत; see Sarva. S. ad loc. -पालः, -पालकः a herdsman. पालनम्, -रक्षणम् the tending or rearing of cattle -पाशः 1 the cord with which the sacrificial animal is bound. -2 an animal sacrifice. -3 the bonds which enchain the individual soul, the world of sense. -पाश- कम् kind of coitus or mode of sexual enjoyment; स्त्रियमानतपूर्वाङ्गीं स्वपादान्तःपदद्वयम् । ऊर्ध्वांशेन रमेत् कामी बन्धो$यं पशुपाशकः ॥ Ratimañjarī. -प्रेरणम् the driving of cattle. -बन्धः an animal-sacrifice. -बन्धकः a rope for tethering cattle. -मतम् an erroneous or false doctrine. -मारम् ind. according to the manner of slaughtering animals; निष्पिष्यैनं बलाद्भूमौ पशुमारममारयत् Mb.1.154.3; Bhāg. 4.13.41; इष्टिपशुमारं मारितः Ś.6. -यज्ञः, -यागः, -द्रव्यम् an animal-sacrifice. -रज्जुः f. a cord for tethering cattle. -राजः a lion. -लोहितपः a fly. -ष a. Ved. giving cattle. -समाम्नायः a collection of names for animals. -संभवः a. produced by animals (as flesh, honey, butter, etc.); Ms.8.328. -हव्यम् an animal sacrifice; Ms.4.28.

pastyam	पस्त्यम् 1 A house, habitation, abode; पस्त्यं प्रयातुमथ तं प्रभुरापपृच्छे Kīr. K.9.74. -2 Household, family. -3 Ved. Divine progeny. -4 A man. -5 A priest. -स्त्या The goddess presiding over domestic affairs; प्र पस्त्याम- दितिं सिन्धुमर्कैः स्वस्तिमीळे सख्याय देवीम् Rv.4.55;3;8.27.5.

pāñcanada	पाञ्चनद a. (-दी f.) Prevalent in the पञ्चनद or Punjab. -दः A prince of the Punjab. -2 (pl.) Its inhabitants.

pāṇḍyāḥ	पाण्ड्याः m. (pl.) N. of a country and its inhabitants; तस्यामेव रघोः पाण्ड्याः प्रतापं न विषेहिरे R.4.49. -ण्ड्यः A king of that country; पाण्ड्यो$यमंसार्पितलम्बहारः R.6.6.

pāriyā	पारिया (पा) त्रः N. of one of the seven principal mountain ranges; उच्चैः शिरस्त्वाज्जितपारियात्रं लक्ष्मीः सिषेवे किल पारियात्रम् R.18.16; see कुलाचल. पारिया pāriyā (पा pā) त्रिकः trikḥ पारिया (पा) त्रिकः 1 An inhabitant of the Pāriyātra mountain. -2 The Pāriyātra mountain itself.

pārthiva	पार्थिव a. (-वी f.) [पृथिव्याः ईश्वरः इदं वा अण्] 1 Earthen, earthy, terrestrial, relating to the earth; यतो रजः पार्थिवमुज्जिहीते R.13.64. -2 Ruling the earth. -3 Princely, royal. -वः 1 An inhabitant of the earth. -2 A king, sovereign; अथ तस्य विवाहकौतुकं ललितं बिभ्रत एव पार्थिवः R.8.1. -3 An earthen vessel. -4 The body. -5 The विकार of the earth; अयं जनो नाम चलन् पृथिव्यां यः पार्थिवः पार्थिव कस्य हेतोः Bhāg.5.12.5. -6 A गृह्याग्नि of the naming ceremony (नामकरण). -वम् An earthy substance. -वा 1 A royal concubine. -2 Arsenic (see निघण्टरत्नाकर). -Comp. a prince, the son of a king. -नन्दिनी, -सुता, -कन्या the daughter of a king, princess. -आत्मजः, -नन्दनः, -सुतः, -पुत्रः the sun. ˚पौत्रः 'Yama's son', Yudhiṣṭhira; स वृत्तवांस्तेषु कृताभिषेकः सहानुजः पार्थिवपुत्रपौत्रः Mb.3.118.2.

puṃs	पुंस् m. [पाति पा-पालने डुमसुन् Uṇ.4.177] (Nom. पुमान्, पुमांसौ, पुमांसः; Instr. du. पुंभ्यां; Voc. sing. पुमन्) 1 A male, male being; पुंसि विश्वसिति कुत्र कुमारी N.5.11. -2 A man, human being; यस्यार्थाः स पुमाँल्लोके H.1. -3 Man, mankind, people; वन्द्यैः पुंसां रघुपतिपदैः Me.12. -4 A servant, an attendant. -6 A word in the masculine gender. -6 The masculine gender; पुंसि वा हरिचन्दनम् Ak. -7 The soul. -8 A living being; जन्म त्वात्मतया पुंसः सर्वभावेन भूरिदः Bhāg.11.22.4. -9 A kind of Naraka; अपत्यमस्मि ते पुंसस्त्राणात् पुत्र इति स्मृतः Mb.14.9.63. -Comp. -अनुज a. (पुंसानुज) having an elder brother. -अनुजा (पुमनुजा) a girl born after the male child; i. e. a girl having an elder brother. -अपत्यम् (पुमपत्यम्) a male child. -अर्थः (पुमर्थः) 1 the aim of man. -2 any one of the four ends of human existence; i. e. धर्म, अर्थ, काम and मोक्ष; see पुरुषार्थ. -आख्या (पुमाख्या) a designation of a male being. -आचारः (पुमाचारः) a usage of men. -कटिः f. a man's hip. -कामा a woman wishing for a husband; P.VIII.3.6. Kāśi. -कोकिलः a male cuckoo; चूताङ्कुरास्वादकषायकण्ठः पुंस्कोकिलो यन्मधुरं चुकूज Ku.3.32. -खेटः (पुंखेटः) a male plant. -गवः (पुंगवः) 1 a bull. an ox. -2 (at the end of comp.) chief, best, most excellent, distinguished or pre-eminent of any class; वाल्मीकिर्मुनिपुंगवः Rām.; so गजपुंगवः Bh. 2.31, नरपुंगवः &c. ˚केतुः an epithet of Śiva; स्विन्नाङ्गुलिः पुंगवकेतुरासीत् Ku.7.77. -चलः (पुंश्चलः) an adulterer. -चली (पुंश्चली) a harlot, an unchaste woman; Y.1.162. Ms.4.22; अहो को वेद भुवने दुर्ज्ञेयं पुंश्चलीमनः । पुंश्चल्यां यो हि विश्वस्तो विधिना स विडम्बितः ॥ Brav. P. -चलीयः; (पुंश्चलीयः) the son of a harlot. -चलू f. (पुंश्चलू) Ved. a harlot. -चिह्नम् (पुंश्चिह्नम्) the characteristic of a male, the membrum virile. -जन्मन् (पुंजन्मन्) n. the birth of a male child. ˚करः, ˚दः, ˚योगः a constellation under which male children are born. -दासः (पुंदासः) a male slave. -ध्वजः (पुंध्वजः) 1 the male of any species of animal. -2 a mouse -नक्षत्रम् (पुंनक्षत्रम्) a male asterism. -2 an asterism under which male children are born. -नागः (पुंनागः) 1 'an elephant among men', a distinguished man. -2 a white elephant. -3 a white lotus. -4 nutmeg. -5 N. of a tree called नागकेशर; R.4.57. -6 N. of a tree (Mar. उंडीण); Mb. 1.63.43; Bhāg.8.2.18. -नाटः, -डः (पुंनाटः, -डः) N. of a tree. -नामधेयः (पुंनामधेयः) a male. -नामन् (पुंनामन्) a. holding a masculine name. (-m.) 1 the tree called पुंनाग. -पुत्रः a male child; P.VIII.3.6. Kāśi. -प्रजननम् the male organ of generation. -भावः (पुंभावः) manhood, masculine gender. -भूमन् (पुंभूमन्) m. a word of the masculine gender used only in the plural number; दाराः पुंभूम्नि चाक्षताः Ak. -योगः (पुंयोगः) 1 cohabitation with or relation to a man; P.IV.1.48. -2 reference to a male or husband; पुंयोगे क्षत्रियी. -रत्नम् (पुंरत्नम्) an excellent man. -राशिः (पुंराशिः) a male sign of the zodiac. -रूपम् (पुंरूपम्) the form of a man. -लक्षणम् manliness. -लिङ्ग a. (पुंलिङ्ग) of the masculine gender, masculine. (-ङ्गम्) 1 masculine gender. -2 virility, manhood. -3 the male organ. -वत्सः (पुंवत्सः) a bull-calf. -वृषः (पुंवृषः) the musk-rat. -वेष a. (पुंवेष) dressed like a male, clad in male attire. -सवन (पुंसवन) a. causing the birth of a male child. (-नम्) the first of the purificatory Saṁskāras : it is a ceremony performed on woman's perceiving the first signs of a living conception, with a view to the birth of a son; यथाक्रमं पुंसवनादिकाः क्रियाः (व्यधत्त) R.3.1. -2 fœtus; यस्मिन् प्रविष्टे$सुरवधूनां प्रायः पुंसवनानि भयादेव स्रवन्ति पतन्ति च Bhāg.5.24.15. -3 the time after a woman's courses; तपस्तप्त्वा व्रतपरा स्नाता पुंसवने शुचिः, उपचक्राम भर्तारम् Mb.1.31.25. -4 milk.

puṇḍraḥ	पुण़्ड्रः [पुण्ड्-भेदने रक् Uṇ 2.13] 1 A kind of sugarcane (red variety). -2 A lotus in general. -3 A white lotus -4 A mark or line (on the fore-head) made with sandal &c., sectarial mark; उत्थं तत् पुण्ड्रमूर्ध्वं जनिमरणतमः खण्डनं मण्डनं च Viṣṇupād Stotra 43. -5 A worm. -6 The Atimukta creeper. -ण्ड्राः (pl.) N. of a country and its inhabitants. -Comp. -केलिः an elephant.

pura	पुर a. [पृ-क] Full of, filled with. -रम् 1 A town, city (containing large buildings, surrounded by a ditch, and not less than one Krośa in extent); पुरे तावन्तमेवास्य तनोति रविरातपम् Ku.2.33; R.1.59. -2 A castle, fortress, stronghold. -3 A house, residence, abode. -4 The body; नवद्वारे पुरे देही नैव कुर्वन् न कारयन् Bg.5.13. -5 The female apartments. -6 N. of the town पाटलिपुत्र; q. v. -7 The calyx of a flower, or any cup formed of leaves. -8 A brothel. -9 The skin. -1 Bdellium. -11 An upper story. -12 A store-house. -13 A fragrant grass (नागरमुस्ता). -Comp. -अट्टः a turret on a citywall. -अधिपः, -अध्यक्षः the governor of a town; Mb.13.135.11. -अरातिः, -अरिः, -असुहृद् m., -रिपुः epithets of Śiva; Bhāg.5.24.28; पुपरारातिभरान्त्या कुसुमशर किं मां प्रहरसि Subhāṣ.; see त्रिपुर. -अर्धविस्तारः 1 a small village, hamlet. -2 a suburb, ward, division of a town. -उत्सवः a festival celebrated in a city. -उद्यानम् a city-garden, park. -ओकस् m. an inhabitant of a town. -कोट्टम् a citadel. -ग a. 1 going to a town. -2 favourably inclined. -जित्, -द्विष्, -भिद् m. epithets of Śiva. -ज्योतिस् m. 1 an epithet of fire. -2 the world of Agni. -तटी a small market-town, small village. -तोरणम् the outer gate of a city. -देवता the tutelary deity of a town. -द्वारम् a city-gate; कोठ्या कोठ्या पुरद्वार- मेकैकं रुरुधे द्विषाम् Bk.14.29. -नारी a courtezan. -निवेशः the founding of a city. -पालः 1 'city-governor', the commandant of a fortress. -2 the soul. -मथनः an epithet of Śiva. -मार्गः the street of a town; पुरमार्गे घनशब्दविक्लवाः Ku.4.11; R.11.3. -रक्षः, -रक्षकः, रक्षिन् m. a constable, police-officer. -रोधः the siege of a fortress. -वासिन् m. a citizen, a townsman. -वास्तु n. ground fit for the foundation of a town. -शासनः 1 an epithet of Viṣṇu. -2 of Śiva; प्रसाधनं मातृभिरादृताभिर्न्यस्तं पुरस्तात् पुरशासनस्य Ku.7.3. -हन् m. 1 an epithet of Viṣṇu. -2 of Śiva.

pauṇḍraḥ	पौण्ड्रः 1 N. of a country. -2 A king or inhabitant of that country; पौण्ड्रश्च बलिनां वरः Hariv. -3 A kind of sugar-cane. -4 A sectarial mark. -5 N. of the conchshell of Bhīma; पौण्ड्रं दध्मौ महाशङ्खं भीमकर्मा वृकोदरः Bg.1. 15. -Comp. -वर्धनः (पौण्ड्रम् इक्षुविशेषं वर्धयति) N. of the country of Bihar.

paurava	पौरव a. (-वी f.) [पुरोर्गोत्रापत्यम् अण्] Descended from Puru; पौरवेणाथ वयसा राजा यौवनमास्थितः Mb.1.75.46. -वः 1 A descendant of Puru; Ś.5. -2 N. of a country or people in the north of India. -2 An inhabitant or ruler of that country.

pratiṣṭhā	प्रतिष्ठा 1 Resting, remaining, situation, position; धर्मो विश्वस्य जगतः प्रतिष्ठा Mahānār. Up.; अलसचलिताङ्गुष्ठ- शिरसि प्रतिष्ठा त्वय्यासीत् Śivamhimna.12. अपौरुषेयप्रतिष्ठम् Māl.9; Ś.7.6. -2 A house, residence, home, habitation; अगाधसत्त्वो मगधप्रतिष्ठः R.6.21;14.5. -3 Fixity, stability, strength, permanence, firm basis; अप्रतिष्ठे रघुज्येष्ठे का प्रतिष्ठा कुलस्य नः U.5.25; अत्र खलु मे वंशप्रतिष्ठा Ś.7; वंशः प्रतिष्ठां नीतः K.28; Śi.2.34; असत्यमप्रतिष्ठं ते जगदाहुरनीश्वरम् Bg.16.8; अहिंसाप्रतिष्ठायां तत्संनिधौ वैरत्यागः Pātañjala S. -4 Basis, foundation, site; as in गृह- प्रतिष्ठा; लोकस्य नाभिर्जगतः प्रतिष्ठा Mb.12.245.27. -5 A prop, stay, support; (hence) an object of glory, a distinguished ornament; त्यक्ता मया नाम कुलप्रतिष्ठा Ś.6.24; द्वे प्रतिष्ठे कुलस्य नः 3.19; Ku.7.27; Mv.7.21. -6 High position, pre-eminence, high authority; किंप्रमाणमिदं काव्यं का प्रतिष्ठा महात्मनः Rām.7.94.23; मया नात्मप्रतिष्ठार्थिना Mu.2.5. -7 Fame, glory, renown, celebrity; मा निषाद प्रतिष्ठां त्वमगमः शाश्वतीः समाः Rām.1.2.15. (= U.2.5.). -8 Installation, inauguration; तं गच्छन्त्यनु ये विपत्तिषु पुनस्ते तत्प्रतिष्ठाशया Mu.1.14. -9 Attainment of a desired object, accomplishment, fulfilment (of one's desire); औत्सुक्यमात्रमवसादयति प्रतिष्ठा Ś.5.6. -1 Tranquillity, rest, repose. -11 A receptacle. -12 The earth. -13 The consecration of an idol or image; चलाचलेति द्विविधा प्रतिष्ठा जीवमन्दिरम् Bhāg.11.27.13; cf. प्राणप्रतिष्ठा. -14 A limit, boundary. -15 The foot; अहोरात्राणि प्रतिष्ठा Bṛi. Up.1.1.1. -16 Completion of a vow. -17 A ceremony for obtaining supernaturel or magical powers.

preta	प्रेत p. p. [प्र-इ-क्त] Departed from this world, dead, deceased; स्वजनाश्रु किलातिसंततं दहति प्रेतमिति प्रचक्षते R.8.86. -तः 1 The departed spirit, the spirit before obsequial rites are performed. -2 A ghost, evil spirit; प्रेतान् भूतगणांश्चान्ये यजन्ते तामसा जनाः Bg.17.4; Ms.12.71. -3 The inhabitant of hell (नारक); शुश्रुवुर्दारुणा वाचः प्रेतानामिव भारत Mb.6.46.19. -4 The manes (पितर); प्रथिता प्रेतकृत्यैषा पित्र्यं नाम विधुक्षये । तस्मिन् युक्तस्यैति नित्यं प्रेतकृत्यैव लौकिकी ॥ Ms.3.127. -Comp. -अधिपः an epithet of Yama. -अन्नम् food offered to the manes. -अयनः N. of a particular hell. -अस्थि n. the bone of a dead man. ˚धारिन् an epithet of Śiva. -आवासः a burialground, cemetery. -ईशः, -ईश्वरः an epithet of Yama. -उद्देशः an offering to the manes. -कर्मन् n., -कृत्यम्, -कृत्या obsequial or funeral rites; Ms.3.127. -कायः a corpse. -कार्यम् see प्रेतकर्मन्; तस्य स प्रेतकार्याणि कृत्वा सर्वाणि भारत Mb.3.138.7. -गत a. dead. -गृहम् a cemetery. -गोपः the keeper of the dead. -चारिन् m. an epithet of Śiva. -दाहः the burning of the dead, cremation. -धूमः the smoke issuing from a funeral pile. -नदी the river वैतरिणी. -नरः a goblin, ghost. -निर्यातकः, -निर्हारकः a man employed to carry dead bodies; प्रेतनिर्यातकश्चैव वर्जनीयाः प्रयत्नतः Ms.3.166. -पक्षः 'the fortnight of the manes', N. of the dark half of Bhādrapada when offerings in honour of the manes are usually performed; cf. पितृपक्ष. -पटहः a drum beaten at a funeral. -पतिः Yama (the Indian 'Pluto'). -पात्रम् a vessel used in a Śrāddha ceremony. -पुरम् the city of Yama. -भावः death. -भूमिः f. a cemetery. -मेधः a funeral sacrifice. -राक्षसी the holy basil (तुलसी). -राजः an epithet of Yama. -लोकः the world of the dead; प्रेत- लोकं परित्यज्य आगता ये महालये Ulkādānamantra. -वनम् a cemetery. -वाहित a. possessed by a ghost. -शरीरम् the body of the departed spirit. -शुद्धिः f., -शौचम् purification after the death of a relative. -श्राद्धम् an obsequial offering made to a departed ralative during the year of his death. -हारः 1 one who carries a dead body. -2 a near relative.

balvajaḥ	बल्वजः जा A kind of coarse grass; मुञ्जालाभे तु कर्तव्याः कुशाश्मन्तकबल्वजैः Ms.2.43. बह्लिकाः bahlikāḥ बह्लीकाः bahlīkāḥ बह्लिकाः बह्लीकाः (pl.) N. of a country (Balkh) and its inhabitants.

bāhīka	बाहीक a. (-की f.) External, outer; बाहीका विलसति कुट्टिमस्थलीयं कापोतं सुललितरूपमुद्वहन्ती Rām. Ch.7.6. -काः (pl.) The people of the Punjab. -कः 1 An inhabitant of the Punjab. -2 An ox.

biṭ	बिट् 1 P. (बेटति) 1 To swear; to curse. -2 To shout, exclaim. -3 To address harshly. बिटकः biṭakḥ कम् kam बिटका biṭakā बिटकः कम् बिटका A boil.

bhārata	भारत a. (-ती f.) [भरतस्येदम्, भारतान् भरतवंश्यानधिकृत्य कृतो ग्रन्थः अण्] Belonging to or descended from Bharata. -तः 1 A descendant of Bharata; (such as विदुर; सञ्जातहर्षो मुनिमाह भारतः Mb.3.2.8; also धृतराष्ट्र, अर्जुन in Bg.). -2 An inhabitant of Bharatavarṣa or India. -3 An actor, -4 An epithet of the sun shining on the south of Meru. -5 Fire. -तम् 1 India, the country of Bharata; एतदूढगुरुभार भारतं वर्षमद्य मम वर्तते वशे Śi.14.5. -2 N. of the most celebrated epic poem in Sanskrit which gives the history of the descendants of Bharata with innumerable episodes. (It is attributed to Vyāsa or कृष्णद्वैपायन, but the work, as we have it at present, is evidently the production of many hands); श्रवणाञ्जलिपुटपेयं विरचितवान् भारताख्यममृतं यः । तमहमरागमकृष्णं कृष्णद्वैपायनं वन्दे ॥ Ve.1.4; व्यासगिरां निर्यासं सारं विश्वस्य भारतं वन्दे । भूषणतयैव संज्ञां यदङ्कितां भारती वहति ॥ Āryā. S.31. -3 The science of music and dramaturgy founded by Bharata. -ती Speech, voice, words, eloquence; भारतीनिर्घोषः U.3; तमर्थमिव भारत्या सुतया योक्तुमर्हसि Ku.6.79; नवरसरुचिरां निर्मिति- मादधती भारती कवेर्जयति K. P.1. -2 The goddess of speech, Sarasvatī; कीरानने स्फुरसि भारति का रतिस्ते Govindarāja. -3 N. of a particular kind of style; भारती संस्कृतप्रायो वाग्व्यापारो नटाश्रयः S. D.285. -4 A quail. -5 The dramatic art in general. -6 The Sanskrit speech of an actor. -7 One of the 1 orders (दशनाम) of Gosāvins, mendicants (Mar. दसनाम गोसावी). -Comp. -आख्यानम्, -इतिहासः, -कथा the story of the Bhāratas (महाभारत). -मण्डलम्, -वर्षम् India. -सावित्री N. of a stotra; इमां भारतसावित्रीं प्रातरुत्थाय यः पठेत् Mb.18.5.64.

maṇitam	मणितम् An inarticulate murmuring sound uttered at cohabitation; मणितं रतिकूजितम् Abh. Chin.148; सीत्कृतानि मणितं करुणोक्तिः Śi.1.75; संभ्रान्ता मणितवतीव पद्मवाटी Rām. Ch.7.67.

matsyaḥ	मत्स्यः [मद्-स्यन्; Uṇ.4.2] 1 A fish; शूले मत्स्यानिवा- पक्ष्यन् दुर्बलान् बलवत्तराः Ms.7.2. -2 A particular variety of fish. -3 A king of the Matsyas. -त्स्यौ (dual) The sign Pisces of the zodiac. -त्स्याः (pl.) N. of a country and its inhabitants, the country of Virāṭa q. v.; Ms. 2.19. -Comp. -अक्षका, -अक्षी N. of a kind of Soma plant. -अद्, -अदन, -आद a. feeding on fish, a fisheater. -अवतारः the first of the ten incarnations of Viṣṇu; (during the reign of the seventh Manu, the whole earth, which, had become corrupt was swept away by a flood, and all living beings perished except the pious Manu and the seven sages who were saved by Viṣṇu in the form of a fish); cf. Jayadeva's description of this avatāra.; प्रलयपयोधिजले धृतवानसि वेदं विहित- वहित्रचरित्रमखेदम् । केशव धृतमीनशरीर जय जगदीश हरे Gīt.1. -अशनः 1 a king-fisher. -2 one who eats fish. -अशिक a. fish-eater; मत्स्याशिका लासिका Mk.1.23. -असुरः N. of a demon. -आधानी, -धानी a fish-basket (used by fishermen). -उदरिन् m. an epithet of Virāṭa. -उदरी an epithet of Satyavatī. -उदरीयः an epithet of Vyāsa. -उद्वर्तनम् a kind of dance; Dk.2.8. -उप- जीविन् m., -आजीवः a fisherman. -करण्डिका a fishbasket. -कीशः an elephant; Gīrvāṇa. -गन्ध a. having the smell of fish. (-न्धा) N. of Satyavatī. -घण्टः a kind of fish-sauce. -घातः 1 the killing or catching of fishes, the occupation of a fisherman; मत्स्यघातो निषादानाम् Ms.1.48. -2 a fisherman. -घातिन्, -जीवत्, -जीविन् m. a fisherman. -जालम् a fishing-net. -देशः the country of the Matsyas. -द्वादशी N. of the twelfth day in the month of मार्गशीर्ष. -नारी 'half-fish, half-woman', an epithet of Satyavatī. -नाशकः, -नाशनः an osprey. -पुराणम् N. of one of the eighteen Purāṇas. -पित्ता Helleborus Niger (Mar. केदारकुटकी). -बन्धः, -बन्धिन् m. a fisherman; कदाचित्तं जलस्थायं मत्स्यबन्धाः समन्ततः Mb. 12.137.5. -बन्धनम् a fish-hook, an angle. -बन्ध (न्धि)नी a fish-basket. -मांसम् fish-flesh; द्वौ मासौ मत्स्यमांसेन Ms.3.268. -रङ्कः, -रङ्गः, -रङ्गकः a halcyon, king-fisher. -राजः 1 the Rohita fish. -2 N. of Virāṭa. -वेधनम्, -वेधनी an angle. -वेधनी a cormorant. -व्रतिन् one who lives in water. -संघातः a shoal of fish. -सन्तानिकः fish cooked with sauce; दग्धोङ्गारे सलवणो वेशवारैरुपस्कृतः । सार्द्रकः कटुतैलेन मत्स्यसन्तानिको भवेत् Śabdachandrikā. मत्स्यण्डिका matsyaṇḍikā मत्स्यण्डी matsyaṇḍī मत्स्यण्डिका मत्स्यण्डी Coarse or unrefined sugar; हीही इयं सीधुपानोद्वेजितस्य मत्स्यण्डिकोपनता M.3; इक्षो रसो यः संपक्वो घनः किंचिद् द्रवान्वितः । मदवत् स्यन्दते यस्मान्मत्स्यण्डीति निगद्यते Bhāva. P.

madana	मदन a. (-नी f.) [माद्यति अनेन, मद्-करणे ल्युट्] 1 Intoxicating, maddening. -2 Delighting, exhilarating. -नः 1 The god of love, Cupid; व्यापाररोधि मदनस्य निषेवितव्यम् Ś.1.27; हतमपि निहन्त्येव मदनः Bh.3.18. -2 Love, passion, sexual love, lust; विनयवारितवृत्तिरतस्तया न विवृतो मदनो न च संवृतः Ś.2.11; सतन्त्रिगीतं मदनस्य दीपकम् Ṛs.1.3; R.5.63; so मदनातुर, मदनपीडित &c. -3 The spring season. -4 A bee. -5 Bees'-wax. -6 A kind of embrace. -7 The Dhattūra plant. -8 The Khadira tree. -9 The Bakula tree. -1 N. of the 7th mansion (in astrol.). -11 A kind of measure (in music). -ना, -नी 1 Spirituous liquor. -2 Musk. -3 The atimukta creeper. (नी only in these two senses). -नम् 1 Intoxicating. -2 Gladdening, delighting. -Comp. -अग्रकः a species of grain (कोद्रव). -अङ्कुशः 1 the penis. -2 a finger-nail, or a wound inflicted by it in cohabitation. -अत्ययः excess of intoxication; मद्येन खलु जायन्ते मदात्ययमुखा गदाः Bhāva. P. -अन्तकः, -अरिः, -दमनः, -दहनः, -नाशनः, -रिपुः epithets of Śiva. -अवस्थ a. in love, enamoured. -आतपत्रम् the vulva. -आतुर, -आर्त, -क्लिष्ट, -पीडित a. afflicted by love, smit with love, love-sick; रावणावरजा तत्र राघवं मदनातुरा (अभिपेदे) R.12.32; Ś.3.13. -आयुधम् 1 pudendum muliebre. -2 'Cupid's missle', said of a very lovely woman. -आलयः, -यम् 1 pudendum muliebre. -2 a lotus. -3 a king. -आशयः sexual desire. -इच्छाफलम् a kind of mango. -उत्सवः the vernal festival celebrated in honour of Cupid. (-वा) an apsaras. -उत्सुक a. pining or languid with love. -उद्यानम् 'a pleasure-garden', N. of a garden. -कण्टकः 1 erection of hair caused by the feeling of love. -2 N. of a tree. -कलहः 'love's quarrel', sexual union; ˚छेद- सुलभाम् Mal.2.12. -काकुरवः a dove or pigeon. -गृहम् pudendum muliebre. -गोपालः an epithet of Kṛiṣṇa. -चतुर्दशी the fourteenth day in the bright half of Chaitra, or the festival celebrated on that day in honour of Cupid. -तन्त्रम् the science of sexual love. -त्रयोदशी the thirteenth day in the bright half of Chaitra, or the festival celebrated on that day in honour of Cupid. -द्वादशी a festival in honour of Cupid on the 12th day of the bright half of Chaitra. -ध्वजा the पौर्णिमा day of Chaitra month. -नालिका a faithless wife. -पक्षिन् m. the Khañjana bird. -पाठकः the cuckoo. -पीडा, -बाधा pangs or torments of love. -महः, -महोत्सवः a festival celebrated in honour of Cupid; मदनमहोत्सवाय रसिकमनांसि समुल्लासयन् Dk.2.5. -मोहनः an epithet of Kṛiṣṇa. -रसः poison; मदनरस- योगेनातिसन्धाय अपहरेत् Kau. A.1.15. -ललितम् amorous sport or dalliance. -ललिता N. of a metre; वेदाङ्गाङ्गैर्मदन- ललिता मो भो नमलसाः V. Ratna. (com.). -लेखः a loveletter. -वश a. influenced by love, enamoured. -विनोदः N. of a medical vocabulary attributed to मदनपाल. -शलाका 1 the female of the cuckoo. -2 an aphrodisiac. -3 the female parrot (also मदनसारिका). -संदेशः a message of love.

madraḥ	मद्रः [मद्-रक् Uṇ.2.13] 1 N. of a country; विराट- पाण्ड्ययोर्मध्ये पूर्वदक्षक्रमेण च । मद्रदेशः समाख्यातः ...... -2 A ruler of that country. -द्राः (pl.) The inhabitants of Madra. -द्रम् Joy, happiness. (मद्राकृ = भद्राकृ 'to shave or shear'). -Comp. -कार a. (also मद्रंकार) producing delight. -नाभः a particular mixed caste; Mb. -सुता N. of Mādrī, second wife of Pāṇḍu.

madraka	मद्रक a. Belonging to, or produced in, Madra. -कः A ruler or inhabitant of Madra. -काः (pl.) N. of a degraded tribe in the south.

mandiram	मन्दिरम् [मन्द्यते$त्र मन्द् किरच्] A dwelling house, habitation, place, mansion; प्रावेशयन्मन्दिरमृद्धमेनम् Ku.7. 55; Bk.8.96; R.12.83; मणिमयमन्दिरमध्ये पश्यति पिपीलिका छिद्रम् Subhāṣ. -2 An abode, a dwelling in general; as in क्षीराब्धिमन्दिरः. -3 A town; विनिक्षिप्य बलं सर्वं बहिरन्तश्च मन्दिरे Rām.6.12.3. -4 A camp. -5 A temple. -6 The body. -रः 1 The sea. -2 The hollow of the knee, ham. -Comp. -पशुः a cat. -मणिः an epithet of Śiva.

maruḥ	मरुः [म्रियन्ते$स्मिन् भूतानीति मरुः निर्जलदेशः, मृ-उ Uṇ.1.7] 1 A desert, sandy desert, a wilderness, any region destitute of water. -2 A mountain or rock. -3 A kind of plant (कुरबक). -4 Abstinence from drinking; मरुं साधयतो राजन् नाकपृष्ठमताशके Mb.13.57.14;142.44. -m. pl. N. of a country or its inhabitants. -Comp. -उद्भवा 1 the cotton shrub. -2 a cucumber. -कच्छः N. of a district. -जः a kind of perfume. -जुष्, -भवः the inhabitant of a desert. -देशः 1 N. of a district. -2 any region destitute of water. -देश्यः bdellium. -द्विपः, -प्रियः a camel. -धन्वः, -धन्वन् m. a wilderness, desert. -पथः, -पृष्ठम् a sandy desert, wilderness; मरु- पृष्ठान्युदम्भांसि (चकार) R.4.31. -प्रपतनम् the act of throwing one's self from a rock; Mark. P.4.3. -भू (pl.) the country called Mārwār. -भूमिः f. a desert, sandy desert. -भूरुह, -हः a tree in the desert; सत्पुंसो मरुभूरुह इव जीवनमात्रमाशास्यम् Aryā. S. -संभवः a kind of horse-radish. -स्थलम्, -स्थली a wilderness, desert, waste; तत् प्राप्नोति मरुस्थले$पि नितरां मेरौ ततो नाधिकम् Bh.2. 49; मरुस्थल्यां यथा वृष्टिः क्षुधार्ते भोजनं तथा H.1.11.

mahā	महा The substitute of महत् at the beginning of Karmadhāraya and Bahuvrīhi compounds, and also at the beginning of some other irregular words. (Note : The number of compounds of which महा is the first member is very large, and may be multiplied ad infinitum. The more important of them, or such as have peculiar significations, are given below.) -Comp. -अक्षः an epithet of Śiva. ˚पटलिक a chief keeper of archives. -अङ्ग a. huge, bulky. -(ङ्गः) 1 a camel. -2 a kind of rat. -3 N. of Śiva. -अञ्जनः N. of a mountain. -अत्ययः a great danger or calamity. -अध्वनिक a. 'having gone a long way', dead. -अध्वरः a great sacrifice. -अनसम् 1 a heavy carriage. -2 cooking utensils. (-सी) a kitchen-maid. (-सः, -सम्) a kitchen; सूपानस्य करिष्यामि कुशलो$स्मि महानसे Mb.4.2.2. -अनिलः a whirlwind; महानिलेनेव निदाघजं रजः Ki.14.59. -अनुभाव a. 1 of great prowess, dignified, noble, glorious, magnanimous, exalted, illustrious; ग्रहीतुमार्यान् परिचर्यया मुहुर्महानु- भावा हि नितान्तमर्थिनः Śi.1.17; Ś.3. -2 virtuous, righteous, just. (-वः) 1 a worthy or respectable person. -2 (pl.) people of a religious sect in Mahārāṣtra founded by Chakradhara in the 13th century. -अन्तकः 1 death. -2 an epithet of Śiva. -अन्धकारः 1 thick darkness. -2 gross (spiritual) ignorance. -अन्ध्राः (pl.) N. of a people and their country. -अन्वय, -अभिजन a. nobly-born, of noble birth. (-यः, -नः) noble birth, high descent. -अभिषवः the great extraction of Soma. -अमात्यः the chief or prime minister (of a king). -अम्बुकः an epithet of Śiva. -अम्बुजम् a billion. -अम्ल a. very sour. (-म्लम्) the fruit of the tamarind tree. अरण्यम् a great (dreary) forest, large forest. -अर्घ a. very costly, costing a high price; महार्घस्तीर्थानामिव हि महतां को$प्यतिशयः U.6.11. (-र्घः) a kind of quail. -अर्घ्य a. 1 valuable, precious. -2 invaluable; inestimable; see महार्ह below. -अर्चिस् a. flaming high. -अर्णवः 1 the great ocean. -2 N. of Śiva. -अर्थ a. 1 rich. -2 great, noble, dignified. -3 important, weighty. -4 significant. -अर्बुदम् one thousand millions. -अर्ह a. 1 very valuable, very costly; महार्हशय्यापरिवर्तनच्युतैः स्वकेशपुष्पैरपि या स्म दूयते Ku.5.12. -2 invaluable, inestimable; महार्हशयनोपेत किं शेषे निहतो भुवि Rām.6.19. 2. (-र्हम्) white sandal-wood. -अवरोहः the fig-tree. -अशनिध्वजः a great banner in the form of the thunderbolt; जहार चान्येन मयूरपत्रिणा शरेण शक्रस्य महाशनि- ध्वजम् R.3.56. -अशन a. voracious, gluttonous; Mb. 4. -अश्मन् m. a precious stone, ruby. -अष्टमी the eighth day in the bright half of Āśvina sacred to Durgā; आश्विने शुक्लपक्षस्य भवेद् या तिथिरष्टमी । महाष्टमीति सा प्रोक्ता ...... -असिः a large sword. -असुरी N. of Durgā. -अह्नः the afternoon. -आकार a. extensive, large, great. -आचार्यः 1 a great teacher. -2 an epithet of Śiva. -आढ्य a. wealthy, very rich. (-ढ्यः) the Kadamba tree. -आत्मन् a. 1 high-souled, high-minded, magnanimous, noble; अयं दुरात्मा अथवा महात्मा कौटिल्यः Mu.7; द्विषन्ति मन्दाश्चरितं महात्मनाम् Ku.5.75; U.1.49; प्रकृतिसिद्धमिदं हि महात्मनाम् Bh.1.63. -2 illustrious, distinguished, exalted, eminent; किमाचाराः किमाहाराः क्व च वासो महात्मनाम् Mb.3. 1.4. -3 mighty (महाबल); अथायमस्यां कृतवान् महात्मा लङ्केश्वरः कष्टमनार्यकर्म Rām.5.9.74. (-m.) 1 the Supreme Spirit; युगपत्तु प्रलीयन्ते यदा तस्मिन् महात्मनि Ms.1.54. -2 the great principle, i. e. intellect of the Sāṅkhyas. (महात्मवत् means the same as महात्मन्). -आनकः a kind of large drum. -आनन्दः, -नन्दः 1 great joy or bliss. -2 especially, the great bliss of final beatitude. (-न्दा) 1 spirituous liquor. -2 a festival on the ninth day in the bright half of Māgha. -आपगा a great river. -आयुधः an epithet of Śiva. -आरम्भ a. undertaking great works, enterprizing. (-म्भः) any great enterprize. -आलयः 1 a temple in general. -2 a sanctuary, an asylum. -3 a great dwelling. -4 a place of pilgrimage. -5 the world of Brahman. -6 the Supreme Spirit. -7 a tree &c. sacred to a deity. -8 N. of a particular dark fortnight. -9 पितृश्राद्ध in the month of Bhādrapada. (-या) N. of a particular deity. -आशय a. highsouled, nobleminded, magnanimous, noble; दैवात् प्रबुद्धः शुश्राव वराहो हि महाशयः Ks; राजा हिरण्यगर्भो महाशयः H.4; see महात्मन्. (-यः) 1 a noble-minded or magnanimous person; महाशयचक्रवर्ती Bv.1.7. -2 the ocean. -आस्पद a. 1 occupying a great position. -2 mighty, powerful. -आहवः a great or tumultuous fight. -इच्छ a. 1 magnanimous, noble-minded, high-souled, noble; मही महेच्छः परिकीर्य सूनौ R.18.33. -2 having lofty aims or aspirations, ambitious; विद्यावतां महेच्छानां ...... नाश्रयः पार्थिवं विना Pt.1.37. -इन्द्रः 1 'the great Indra', N. of Indra; इयं महेन्द्रप्रभृतीनधिश्रियः Ku.5.53; R.13.2; Ms.7.7. -2 a chief or leader in general. -3 N. of a mountain range; पतिर्महेन्द्रस्य महोदधेश्च R.6.54;4.39,43. ˚चापः rain-bow. ˚नगरी N. of Amarāvatī, the capital of Indra. ˚मन्त्रिन् m. an epithet of Bṛihaspati. ˚वाहः the elephant Airāvata; महेन्द्रवाहप्रतिमो महात्मा Mb.9.17.52. -इभ्य a. very rich. -इषुः a great archer; अधिरोहति गाण्डीवं महेषौ Ki.13.16. -इष्वासः a great archer, a great warrior; अत्र शूरा महेष्वासा भामार्जुनसमा युधि Bg.1.4. -ईशः, -ईशानः N. of Śiva; महेशस्त्वां धत्ते शिरसि रसराजस्य जयिनीम् Udb. ˚बन्धुः the Bilva tree. -ईशानी N. of Pārvatī. -ईश्वरः 1 a great lord, sovereign; महेश्वरस्त्र्यम्बक एव नापरः R.; गोप्तारं न निधीनां कथयन्ति महेश्वरं विबुधाः Pt.2.74. -2 N. of Śiva. -3 of Viṣṇu. -4 a god (opp. प्रकृति). -5 the Supreme Being (परमात्मा); मायां तु प्रकृतिं विद्यान्मायिनं तु महेश्वरम् Śvet. Up.4.1. ˚सखः N. of Kubera; यया कैलासभवने महेश्वरसखं बली Mb.9.11.55. (-री) 1 N. of Durgā. -2 a kind of bell-metal. -उक्षः (for उक्षन्) a large bull; a full grown or strong bull; महोक्षतां वत्सतरः स्पृशन्निव R.3.32;4.22;6.72; Śi.5.63. -उत्पलम् a large blue lotus. (-लः) the Sārasa bird. -उत्सवः 1 a great festival or occasion of joy; नयनविषयं जन्मन्येकः स एव महोत्सवः Māl.1.36. -2 the god of love. -उत्साह a. possessed of great energy, energetic, persevering; अहं च कर्णं जानामि ...... सत्यसंधं महोत्साहं ...... Mb.3.91.2. (-हः) 1 perseverance. -2 great pride; ये जात्यादिमहो- त्साहान्नरेन्द्रान्नोपयान्ति च । तेषामामरणं भिक्षा प्रायश्चितं विनिर्मितम् ॥ Pt.1.38. -उदधिः 1 the great ocean; महोदधेः पूर इवेन्दु- दर्शनात् R.3.17. -2 an epithet of Indra. ˚जः a conchshell, shell. -उदय a. very prosperous or lucky, very glorious or splendid, of great prosperity. (-यः) 1 (a) great elevation or rise, greatness, prosperity; नन्दस्त्वतीन्द्रियं दृष्ट्वा लोकपालमहोदयम् Bhāg.1.28.1; अपवर्ग- महोदयार्थयोर्भुवमंशाविव धर्मयोर्गतौ R.8.16. (b) great fortune or good luck. (c) greatness, pre-eminence. -2 final beatitude. -3 a lord, master. -4 N. of the district called Kānyakubja or Kanouja; see App. -5 N. of the capital of Kanouja. -6 sour milk mixed with honey. -7 = महात्मन् q. v.; संसक्तौ किमसुलभं महोदयानाम Ki.7.27. ˚पर्वन् a time of union of the middle of श्रवण नक्षत्र and the end of व्यतिपात (generally in the month of माघ or पौष at the beginning of अमावास्या). -उदर a. big-bellied, corpulent. -(रम्) 1 a big belly. -2 dropsy. -उदार a. 1 very generous or magnanimous. -2 mighty, powerful. -उद्यम a. = महोत्साह q. v; महोद्यमाः कर्म समा- रभन्ते. -उद्योग a. very industrious or diligent, hardworking. -उद्रेकः a particular measure (= 4 प्रस्थs). -उन्नत a. exceedingly lofty. (-तः) the palmyra tree. -उन्नतिः f. great rise or elevation (fig. also), high rank. -उपकारः a great obligation. -उपाध्यायः a great preceptor, a learned teacher. -उरगः a great serpent; वपुर्महोरगस्येव करालफणमण्डलम् R.12.98. -उरस्क a. broad-chested. (-स्कः) an epithet of Śiva. -उर्मिन् m. the ocean; ततः सागरमासाद्य कुक्षौ तस्य महोर्मिणः Mb.3.2.17. -उल्का 1 a great meteor. -2 a great fire-brand. -ऋत्विज् m. 'great priest', N. of the four chief sacrificial priests. -ऋद्धि a. very prosperous, opulent. (-f.) great prosperity or affluence. -ऋषभः a great bull. -ऋषिः 1 a great sage or saint; यस्मादृषिः परत्वेन महांस्त- स्मान्महर्षयः; (the term is applied in Ms.1.34 to the ten Prajāpatis or patriarchs of mankind, but it is also used in the general sense of 'a great sage'). -2 N. of Sacute;iva. -3 of Buddha. -ओघ a. having a strong current. -घः a very large number; शतं खर्व- सहस्राणां समुद्रमभिधीयते । शतं समुद्रसाहस्रं महौघमिति विश्रुतम् ॥ Rām.6.28.37. -ओष्ठ (महोष्ठ) a. having large lips. (-ष्ठः) an epithet of Śiva. -ओजस् a. very mighty or powerful, possessed of great splendour or glory; महौजसा मानधना धनार्चिताः Ki.1.19. (-m.) a great hero or warrior, a champion. (-n.) great vigour. -ओजसम् the discus of Viṣṇu (सुदर्शन). (-सी) N. of plant (Mar. कांगणी). -ओदनी Asparagus Racemosus (Mar. शतावरी). -ओषधिः f. 1 a very efficacious medicinal plant, a sovereign drug. -2 the Dūrvā grass. -3 N. of various plants ब्राह्मी, श्वेतकण्टकारी, कटुका, अतिविष &c. ˚गणः a collection of great or medicinal herbs:-- पृश्निपर्णी श्यामलता भृङ्गराजः शतावरी । गुड्चा सहदेवी च महौषधिगणः स्मृतः ॥ cf. also सहदेवी तथा व्याघ्री बला चातिबला त्वचा । शङ्खपुष्पी तथा सिंही अष्टमी च सुवर्चला ॥ महौषध्यष्टकं प्रोक्तं... . -औषधम् 1 a sovereign remedy, panacea. -2 ginger. -3 garlic. -4 a kind of poison (वत्सनाभ). -कच्छः 1 the sea. -2 N. of Varuṇa. -3 a mountain. -कन्दः garlic. -कपर्दः a kind of shell. -कपित्थः 1 the Bilva tree. -2 red garlic. -कम्बु a. stark naked. (-म्बुः) an epithet of Śiva. -कर a. 1 large-handed. -2 having a large revenue. -कर्णः an epithet of Śiva. -कर्मन् a. doing great works. (-m.) an epithet of Śiva. -कला the night of the new moon. -कल्पः a great cycle of time (1 years of Brahman); Bhāg.7.15.69. -कविः 1 a great poet, a classical poet, such as कालिदास, भवभूति, बाण, भारवि &c. -2 an epithet of Śukra. -कषायः N. of a plant (Mar. कायफळ). -कान्तः an epithet of Śiva. (-ता) the earth. -काय a. big-bodied, big, gigantic, bulky. (-यः) 1 an elephant. -2 an epithet of Śiva. -3 of Viṣṇu. -4 of a being attending on Śiva (= नन्दि). -कारुणिक a. exceedingly compassionate. -कार्तिकी the night of full-moon in the month of Kārtika. -कालः 1 a form of Śiva in his character as the destroyer of the world; महाकालं यजेद्देव्या दक्षिणे धूम्रवर्णकम् Kālītantram. -2 N. of a celebrated shrine or temple of Śiva (Mahākāla) (one of the 12 celebrated Jyotirliṅgas) established at Ujjayinī (immortalized by Kālidāsa in his Meghadūta, which gives a very beautiful description of the god, his temple, worship &c., together with a graphic picture of the city; cf. Me.3-38; also R.6.34); महाकालनिवासिनं कालीविलासिनमनश्वरं महेश्वरं समाराध्य Dk.1.1. -3 an epithet of Viṣṇu. -4 N. of a kind of gourd. -5 N. of Śiva's servant (नन्दि). ˚पुरम् the city of Ujjayinī. ˚फलम् a red fruit with black seeds; पक्वं महाकालफलं किलासीत् N.22.29. -काली an epithet of Durgā in her terrific form. -काव्यम् a great or classical poem; (for a full description of its nature, contents &c., according to Rhetoricians see S. D.559). (The number of Mahākāvyas is usually said to be five:-रघुवंश, कुमारसंभव, किरातार्जुनीय, शिशुपालवध and नैषधचरित or six, if मेघदूत-- a very small poem or खण़्डकाव्य-- be added to the list. But this enumeration is apparently only traditional, as there are several other poems, such as the भट्टिकाव्य, विक्रमाङ्कदेवचरित, हरविजय &c. which have an equal claim to be considered as Mahākāvyas). -कीर्तनम् a house. -कुमारः the eldest son of a reigning prince, heir-apparent. -कुल, -कुलीन a. of noble birth or descent, sprung from a noble family, nobly born. (-लम्) a noble birth or family, high descent. -कुहः a species of parasitical worm. -कृच्छ्रम् a great penance. -केतुः N. of Śiva. -केशः, -कोशः 1 an epithet of Śiva. -2 a large sheath. -क्रतुः a great sacrifice; e. g. a horse-sacrifice; तदङ्गमग्ऱ्यं मघवन् महाक्रतोरमुं तुरङ्गं प्रतिमोक्तुमर्हसि R.3.46. -क्रमः an epithet of Viṣṇu. -क्रोधः an epithet of Śiva. -क्षत्रपः a great satrap. -क्षीरः sugar-cane. -क्षीरा f. a She-buffalo; Nighaṇṭaratnākara. -खर्वः, -र्वम् a high number (ten billions ?). -गजः a great elephant; see दिक्करिन्. -गणपतिः a form of the god Gaṇeśa. -गदः fever. -गन्ध a. exceedingly fragrant. (-न्धः) a kind of cane. (-न्धम्) a kind of sandalwood. (-न्धा) N. of Chāmuṇḍā. -गर्तः, -गर्भः -गीतः N. of Śiva. -गर्दभगन्धिका N. of a plant, भारङ्गी. -गल a. longnecked. -गवः Bos gavaeus. -गुण a. very efficacious, sovereign (as a medicine); त्वया ममैष संबन्धः कपिमुख्य महागुणः Rām.5.1.12. (-णः) a chief quality, cardinal virtue. -गुरुः a highly respectable or venerable person; (these are three, the father, mother and preceptor; पिता माता तथाचार्यो महागुरुरिति स्मृतः). -गुल्मा the Soma plant. -गृष्टिः f. a cow with a large hump. -ग्रहः 1 an epithet of Rāhu. -2 the sun; महाग्रहग्राहविनष्टपङ्कः Rām.5.5.6. -ग्रामः N. of the ancient capital of Ceylon, the modern Māgama. -ग्रीवः 1 a camel. -2 an epithet of Śiva. -ग्रीविन् m. a camel. -घूर्णा spirituous liquor. -घृतम् ghee kept for a long time (for medicinal purposes). -घोष a. noisy, loud-sounding. (-षम्) a market, fair. (-षः) a loud noise, clamour. -चक्रम् the mystic circle in the शाक्त ceremonial. -चक्रवर्तिन् m. a universal monarch. -चण्डा N. of Chāmuṇḍā. -चपला a kind of metre. -चमूः f. a large army. -छायः the fig-tree. -जङ्घः a camel. -जटः an epithet of Śiva. -जटा 1 a great braid of hair. -2 the matted hair of Śiva. -जत्रु a. having a great collar-bone. (-त्रुः) an epithet of Śiva. -जनः 1 a multitude of men, a great many beings, the general populace or public; महाजनो येन गतः स पन्थाः Mb.3.313. 117; आगम्य तु ततो राजा विसृज्य च महाजनम् 6.98.25. -2 the populace, mob; विलोक्य वृद्धोक्षमधिष्ठितं त्वया महाजनः स्मेरमुखो भविष्यति Ku.5.7. -3 a great man, a distinguished or eminent man; महाजनस्य संसर्गः कस्य नोन्नतिकारकः । पद्मपत्रस्थितं तोयं धत्ते मुक्ताफलश्रियम् Pt.3.6. -4 the chief of a caste or trade. -5 a merchant, tradesman. -जवः an antelope. -जातीय a. 1 rather large. -2 of an excellent kind. -जालिः, -ली N. of a plant (Mar. सोनामुखी) -जिह्वः an epithet of Śiva. -ज्ञानिन् m. 1 a very learned man. -2 a great sage. -3 N. of Śiva. -ज्यैष्ठी the day of fullmoon in the month of Jyeṣṭha; ताभिर्दृश्यत एष यान् पथि महाज्यैष्ठीमहे मन्महे N.15.89; पूर्णिमा रविवारेण महाज्यैष्ठी प्रकीर्तिता Agni P.121.63. -ज्योतिस् m. an epithet of Śiva. -ज्वरः great affliction. -ज्वाल a. very brilliant or shining. (-लः) 1 N. of Śiva. -2 a sacrificial fire. -डीनम् a kind of flight; 'यानं महाडीनमाहुः पवित्रामूर्जितां गतिम्' Mb.8.41.27 (com.). -तपस् m. 1 a great ascetic. -2 an epithet of Viṣṇu. -तलम् N. of one of the seven lower regions; see पाताल. -तारा N. of a Buddhist goddess. -तिक्तः the Nimba tree. -तिथिः the 6th day of a lunation. -तीक्ष्ण a. exceedingly sharp or pungent. (-क्ष्णा) the markingnut plant. -तेजस् a. 1 possessed of great lustre or splendour. -2 very vigorous or powerful, heroic. (-m.) 1 a hero, warrior. -2 fire. -3 an epithet of Kārtikeya. (-n.) quick-silver. -त्याग, -त्यागिन् a. very generous. (-m.) N. of Śiva. -दंष्ट्रः a species of big tiger. -दन्तः 1 an elephant with large tusks. -2 an epithet of Śiva. -दण्डः 1 a long arm. -2 a severe punishment. -दम्भः an epithet of Śiva. -दशा the influence exercised (over a man's destiny) by a predominant planet. -दानम् the gift of gold equal to one's own weight; अथातः संप्रवक्ष्यामि महादानस्य लक्षणम्. -दारु n. the devadāru tree. -दुर्गम् a great calamity; Pt. -दूषकः a kind of grain. -देवः N. of Śiva. (-वी) 1 N. of Pārvatī. -2 the chief queen. -द्रुमः the sacred fig-tree. -द्वारम् a large gate, the chief or outer gate of a temple. -धन a. 1 rich. -2 expensive, costly; हेमदण्डैर्महाधनैः Rām.7. 77.13. (-नम्) 1 gold. -2 incense. -3 a costly or rich dress. -4 agriculture, husbandry. -5 anything costly or precious. -6 great booty. -7 a great battle (Ved.). -धनुस् m. an epithet of Śiva. -धातुः 1 gold. -2 an epithet of Śiva. -3 lymph. -4 N. of Meru. -धी a. having a great understanding. -धुर्यः a full-grown draught ox. -ध्वजः a camel. -ध्वनिक a. dead. -नग्नः an athlete; Buddh. -नटः an epithet of Śiva; महानटः किं नु ...... तनोति ...... साम्प्रतमङ्गहारम् N.22.7; महानटबाहुनेव बद्धभुजाङ्केन Vās. -नदः a great river. -नदी 1 a great river, such as Gaṅgā, Kṛiṣṇā; मन्दरः पर्वतश्चाक्षो जङ्घा तस्य महानदी Mb.8.34.2; संभूयाम्भोधिमभ्येति महानद्या नगापगा Śi.2.1. -2 N. of a river falling into the bay of Bengal. -नन्दा 1 spirituous liquor. -2 N. of a river. -3 ninth day of the bright half of the month of Māgha; माघमासस्य या शुक्ला नवमी लोकपूजिचा । महानन्देति सा प्रोक्ता ... . -नरकः N. of one of the 21 hells. -नलः a kind of reed. -नवमी the ninth day in the bright half of Āśvina, sacred to the worship of Durgā ततो$नु नवमी यस्मात् सा महानवमी स्मृता. -नाटकम् 'the great drama', N. of a drama, also called Hanumannāṭaka, (being popularly ascribed to Hanumat); thus defined by S. D. :-- एतदेव यदा सर्वैः पताकास्थानकैर्युतम् । अङ्कैश्च दशभिर्धीरा महानाटकमूचिरे ॥ -नाडी sinew, tendon. -नादः 1 a loud sound, uproar. -2 a great drum. -3 a thunder-cloud. -4 a shell. -5 an elephant. -6 a lion. -7 the ear. -8 a camel. -9 an epithet of Śiva. (-दम्) a musical instrument. -नाम्नी 1 N. of a परिशिष्ट of Sāmaveda. -2 (pl.) N. of 9 verses of Sāmaveda beginning with विदा मघवन् विदा. -नायकः 1 a great gem in the centre of a string of pearls. -2 a great head or chief. -नासः an epithet of Śiva. -निद्र a. fast asleep. (-द्रा) 'the great sleep', death. -निम्नम् intestines, abdomen. -नियमः an epithet of Viṣṇu. -निर्वाणम् total extinction of individuality (according to the Buddhists). -निशा 1 the dead of night, the second and third watches of the night; महानिशा तु विज्ञेया मध्यमं प्रहरद्वयम् -2 an epithet of Durgā. -नीचः a washerman. -नील a. dark-blue. (-लः) a kind of sapphire or emerald; इन्द्रनीलमहानीलमणिप्रवरवेदिकम् Rām.5.9.16; महा- महानीलशिलारुचः Śi.1.16;4.44; R.18.42; Kau. A.2.11. 29. ˚उपलः a sapphire. -नृत्यः, -नेत्रः an epithet of Śiva. -नेमिः a crow. -न्यायः the chief rule. -पक्ष a. 1 having many adherents. -2 having a large family or retinue; महापक्षे धनिन्यार्थे निक्षेपं निक्षिपेद् बुधः Ms.8.179. (-क्षः) 1 an epithet of Garuḍa. -2 a kind of duck. (-क्षी) an owl. -पङ्क्तिः, -पदपङ्क्तिः a kind of metre. -पञ्चमूलम् the five great roots:-- बिल्वो$ग्निमन्थः श्योनाकः काश्मरी पाटला तथा । सर्वैस्तु मिलितैरेतैः स्यान्महापञ्चमूलकम् ॥ -पञ्चविषम् the five great or deadly poisons:-- शृङ्गी च कालकूटश्च मुस्तको वत्सनाभकः । शङ्खकर्णीति योगो$यं महापञ्चविषाभिधः ॥ -पटः the skin. -पथः 1 chief road, principal street, high or main road; संतानकाकीर्णमहापथं तत् Ku.7.3. -2 the passage into the next world, i. e. death. -3 N. of certain mountain-tops from which devout persons used to throw themselves down to secure entrance into heaven. -4 an epithet of Śiva. -5 the long pilgrimage to mount Kedāra. -6 the way to heaven. -7 the knowledge of the essence of Śiva acquired in the pilgrimage to Kedāra. -पथिक a. 1 undertaking great journeys. -2 one receiving Śulka (toll) on the high way; cf. Mb.12.76.6 (com. महापथिकः समुद्रे नौयानेन गच्छन् यद्वा महापथि शुल्कग्राहकः) -पद्मः 1 a particular high number. -2 N. of Nārada. -3 N. of one of the nine treasures of Kubera. -4 N. of the southernmost elephant supporting the world. -5 an epithet of Nanda. -6 a Kinnara attendant on Kubera. (-द्मम्) 1 a white lotus. -2 N. of a city. ˚पतिः N. of Nanda. -पराकः a. a particular penance; Hch. -पराङ्णः a late hour in the afternoon. -पवित्रः an epithet of Viṣṇu. -पशुः large cattle; महापशूनां हरणे ... दण्डं प्रकल्पयेत् Ms.8.324. -पातः a long flight; Pt.2.58. -पातकम् 1 a great sin, a heinous crime; ब्रह्महत्या सुरापानं स्तेयं गुर्वङ्गनागमः । महान्ति पातकान्याहुस्तत्संसर्गश्च पञ्चमम् ॥ Ms.1154. -2 any great sin or transgression. -पात्रः a prime minister. -पादः an epithet of Śiva. -पाप्मन् a. very sinful or wicked. -पुराणम् N. of a Purāṇa; महापुराणं विज्ञेयमेकादशकलक्षणम् Brav. P. -पुंसः a great man. -पुरुषः 1 a great man, an eminent or distinguished personage; शब्दं महापुरुषसंविहितं निशम्य U. 6.7. -2 the Supreme Spirit. -3 an epithet of Viṣṇu. -पौरुषिकः a worshipper of Viṣṇu; तदहं ते$भिधास्यामि महापौरुषिको भवान् Bhāg.2.1.1. -पुष्पः a kind of worm. -पूजा great worship; any solemn worship performed on extraordinary occasions. -पृष्ठः a camel. -पोटगलः a kind of large reed. -प्रजापतिः N. of Viṣṇu. -प्रतीहारः a chief door-keeper. -प्रपञ्चः the great universe. -प्रभ a. of great lustre. (-भः) the light of a lamp. -प्रभुः 1 a great lord. -2 a king, sovereign. -3 a chief. -4 an epithet of Indra. -5 of Śiva -6 of Viṣṇu. -7 a great saint or holy man. -प्रलयः 'the great dissolution', the total annihilation of the universe at the end of the life of Brahman, when all the lokas with their inhabitants, the gods, saints &c. including Brahman himself are annihilated; महाप्रलयमारुत ...... Ve.3.4. -प्रश्नः a knotty question. -प्रसादः 1 a great favour. -2 a great present (of food offered to an idol); पादोदकं च निर्माल्यं नैवेद्यं च विशेषतः । महाप्रसाद इत्युक्त्वा ग्राह्यं विष्णोः प्रयत्नतः -प्रस्थानम् 1 departing this life, death. -2 setting out on a great journey for ending life; इहैव निधनं याम महाप्रस्थानमेव वा Rām.2.47.7 (com. महाप्रस्थानं मरणदीक्षा- पूर्वकमुत्तराभिमुखगमनम्); Mb.1.2.365. -प्राणः 1 the hard breathing or aspirate sound made in the pronunciation of the aspirates. -2 the aspirated letters themselves (pl.); they are:-ख्, घ्, छ्, झ्, ठ्, ढ्, थ्, ध्, फ्, भ्, श्, ष्, स्, ह्. -3 a raven. -प्राणता possession of great strength or essence; अन्यांश्च जीवत एव महाप्राणतया स्फुरतो जग्राह K. -प्रेतः a noble departed spirit. -प्लवः a great flood, deluge; ... क्षिप्तसागरमहाप्लवामयम् Śi.14.71. -फल a. 1 bearing much fruit. -2 bringing much reward. (-ला) 1 a bitter gourd. -2 a kind of spear. (-लम्) 1 a great fruit or reward. -2 a testicle. -फेना the cuttle-fish bone. -बन्धः a peculiar position of hands or feet. -बभ्रुः a kind of animal living in holes. -बल a. very strong; नियुज्यमानो राज्याय नैच्छद्राज्यं महाबलः Rām (-लः) 1 wind, storm. -2 a Buddha. -3 a solid bamboo. -4 a palm. -5 a crocodile. -बला N. of a plant; महाबला च पीतपुष्पा सहदेवी च सा स्मृता Bhāva. P. (-लम्) lead. ˚ईश्वरः N. of a Liṅga of Śiva near the modern Mahābaleśwara. -बाध a. causing great pain or damage. -बाहु a. long-armed, powerful. (-हुः) an epithet of Viṣṇu. -बि(वि)लम् 1 the atmosphere. -2 the heart. -3 a water-jar, pitcher. -4 a hole, cave. -बिसी a variety of skin (चर्म), a product of द्वादशग्राम in the Himālayas. -बी(वी)जः an epithet of Śiva. -बी (वी)ज्यम् the perinæum. -बुध्न a. having a great bottom or base (as a mountain). -बुशः barley. -बृहती a kind of metre. -बोधिः 1 the great intelligence of a Buddha. -2 a Buddha. -ब्रह्मम्, -ब्रह्मन् n. the Supreme Spirit. -ब्राह्मणः 1 a great or learned Brāhmaṇa. -2 a low or contemptible Brāhmaṇa. -भटः a great warrior; तदोजसा दैत्यमहाभटार्पितम् Bhāg. -भद्रा N. of the river Gaṅgā. -भाग a. 1 very fortunate or blessed, very lucky or prosperous. -2 illustrious, distinguished, glorious; उभौ धर्मौ महाभागौ Mb.12.268.3; महाभागः कामं नरपतिरभिन्नस्थितिरसौ Ś.5.1; Ms.3.192. -3 very pure or holy, highly virtuous; पतिव्रता महाभागा कथं नु विचरिष्यति Mb.4.3.16. -भागता, -त्वम्, -भाग्यम् 1 extreme good fortune, great good luck, prosperity. -2 great excellence or merit. -भागवतम् the great Bhāgavata, one of the 18 Purāṇas. (-तः) a great worshipper of Viṣṇu. -भागिन् a. very fortunate or prosperous. -भाण्डम् a chief treasury. -भारतम् N. of the celebrated epic which describes the rivalries and contests of the sons of Dhṛitarāṣṭra and Pāṇḍu. (It consists of 18 Parvans or books, and is said to be the composition of Vyāsa; cf. the word भारत also); महत्त्वाद्भारतत्वाच्च महाभारतमुच्यते -भाष्यम् 1 a great commentary. -2 particularly, the great commentary of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini. -भासुरः an epithet of Viṣṇu. -भिक्षुः N. of Śākyamuni. -भीता a kind of sensitive plant (लाजाळू). -भीमः an epithet of king Śantanu. -भीरुः a sort of beetle or fly. -भुज a. long-armed, powerful. -भूतम् a great or primary element; see भूत; तस्यैतस्य महाभूतस्य निःश्वसितमेतद्यदृग्वेदः Up.; तं वेधा विदधे नूनं महाभूतसमाधिना R.1. 29; Ms.1.6. (-तः) 1 the Supreme Being. -2 a great creature. -भोगः 1 a great enjoyment. -2 a great coil or hood; great winding. -3 a serpent. (-गा) an epithet of Durgā. -मणिः 1 a costly or precious jewel; संस्कारोल्लिखितो महामणिरिव क्षीणो$पि नालक्ष्यते Ś.6.5. -2 N. of Śiva. -मति a. 1 high-minded. -2 clever. (-तिः) N. of Bṛihaspati or Jupiter. -मत्स्यः a large fish, sea-monster. -मद a. greatly intoxicated. (-दः) an elephant in rut. -मनस्, -मनस्क a. 1 high-minded, nobleminded, magnanimous; ततो युधिष्ठिरो राजा धर्मपुत्रो महामनाः Mb.4.1.7. -2 liberal. -3 proud, haughty. (-m) a fabulous animal called शरभ q. v. -मन्त्रः 1 any sacred text of the Vedas. -2 a great or efficacious charm, a powerful spell. -मन्त्रिन् m. the prime-minister, premier. -मयूरी N. of Buddhist goddess. -मलहारी a kind of Rāgiṇi. -महः a great festive procession; Sinhās. -महस् n. a great light (seen in the sky). -महोपाध्यायः 1 a very great preceptor. -2 a title given to learned men and reputed scholars; e. g. महामहो- पाध्यायमल्लिनाथसूरि &c. -मांसम् 'costly flesh', especially human flesh; न खलु महामांसविक्रयादन्यमुपायं पश्यामि Māl.4; अशस्त्रपूतं निर्व्याजं पुरुषाङ्गोपकल्पितम् । विक्रीयते महामांसं गृह्यतां गृह्यतामिदम् 5.12 (see Jagaddhara ad loc.). -माघी the full-moon day in the month of Māgha. -मात्र a. 1 great in measure, very great or large. -2 most excellent, best; वृष्ण्यन्धकमहामात्रैः सह Mb.1.221.27; 5.22.37. (-त्रः) 1 a great officer of state, high stateofficial, a chief minister; (मन्त्रे कर्मणि भूषायां वित्ते माने परिच्छदे । मात्रा च महती येषां महामात्रास्तु ते स्मृताः); Ms. 9.259; गूढपुरुषप्रणिधिः कृतमहामात्रापसर्पः (v. l. महामात्यापसर्पः) पौरजानपदानपसर्पयेत् Kau. A.1.13.9; Rām.2.37.1. -2 an elephant-driver or keeper; मदोन्मत्तस्य भूपस्य कुञ्जरस्य च गच्छतः । उन्मार्गं वाच्यतां यान्ति महामात्राः समीपगाः ॥ Pt.1.161. -3 a superintendent of elephants. (-त्री) 1 the wife of a chief minister. -2 the wife of a spiritual teacher. -मानसी N. of a Jain goddess. -मान्य a. being in great honour with; मकरन्दतुन्दिलानामरविन्दानामयं महामान्यः Bv.1.6. -मायः 1 an epithet of Śiva. -2 of Viṣṇu. -माया 1 worldly illusion, which makes the material world appear really existent. -2 N. of Durgā; महामाया हरेश्चैषा यया संमोह्यते जगत् Devīmāhātmya. -मायूरम् a particular drug. (-री) N. of an amulet and a goddess; Buddh. -मारी 1 cholera, an epidemic. -2 an epithet of Durgā. -मार्गः high road, main street. ˚पतिः a superintendent of roads. -मालः N. of Śiva. -माहेश्वरः a great worshipper of Maheśvara or Śiva. -मुखः a crocodile. -मुद्रा a particular position of hands or feet (in practice of yoga). -मुनिः 1 a great sage. -2 N. of Vyāsa. -3 an epithet of Buddha. -4 of Agastya. -5 the coriander plant. (-नि n.) 1 coriander seed. -2 any medicinal herb or drug. -मूर्तिः N. of Viṣṇu. -मूर्धन् m. an epithet of Śiva. -मूलम् a large radish. (-लः) a kind of onion. -मूल्य a. very costly. (-ल्यः) a ruby. -मृगः 1 any large animal. -2 an elephant, -3 the fabulous animal called शरभ. -मृत्युः, -मेधः N. of Śiva. -मृत्युंजयः a kind of drug. -मृधम् a great battle. -मेदः the coral tree; महामेदाभिधो ज्ञेयः Bhāva. P. -मेधा an epithet of Durgā. -मोहः great infatuation or confusion of mind. (ससर्ज) महामोहं च मोहं च तमश्चाज्ञानवृत्तयः Bhāg.3.12.2. (-हा) an epithet of Durgā. -यज्ञः 'a great sacrifice', a term applied to the five daily sacrifices or acts of piety to be performed by a house-holder; अध्यापनं ब्रह्मयज्ञः पितृयज्ञस्तु तर्पणम् । होमो दैवो (or देवयज्ञः) बलिर्भौतो (or भूतयज्ञः) नृयज्ञो$तिथिपूजनम् ॥ Ms.3.7,71, (for explanation, see the words s. v.). -2 N. of Viṣṇu. -यमकम् 'a great Yamaka', i. e. a stanza all the four lines of which have exactly the same words, though different in sense; e. g. see Ki.15.52, where विकाशमीयुर्जगतीशमार्गणाः has four different senses; cf. also बभौ मरुत्वान् विकृतः समुद्रः Bk.1.19. -यशस् a. very famous, renowned, celebrated. -यात्रा 'the great pilgrimage', the pilgrimage to Benares. -यानम् N. of the later system of Buddhist teaching, firstly promulgated by Nāgārjuna (opp. हीनयान). -याम्यः an epithet of Viṣṇu. -युगम् 'a great Yuga', consisting of the four Yugas of mortals, or comprising 4,32, years of men. -योगिन् m. 1 an epithet of Śiva. -2 of Viṣṇu. -3 a cock. -योनिः f. excessive dilation of the female organ. -रक्तम् coral. -रङ्गः a large stage. -रजतम् 1 gold; उच्चैर्महारजतराजिविराजितासौ Śi.4.28. -2 the thorn-apple. -रजनम् 1 safflower. -2 gold. -3 turmeric; तस्य हैतस्य पुरुषस्य रूपं यथा महारजनं वासः Bṛi. Up.2.3.6. -रत्नम् 1 a precious jewel; वज्रं मुक्ता प्रवालं च गोमेदश्चेन्द्रनीलकः ॥ वैडूर्यः पुष्करागश्च पाचिर्माणिक्यमेव च । महारत्नानि चैतानि नव प्रोक्तानि सूरिभिः ॥ Śukra.4.155-56. -रथः 1 a great chariot. -2 a great warrior or hero; द्रुपदश्च महारथः Bg.1.4; कुतः प्रभावो धनंजयस्य महारथजयद्रथस्य विपत्तिमुत्पादयितुम् Ve.2; दशरथः प्रशशास महारथः R.9.1; Śi.3.22; (a महारथ is thus defined:-- एको दशसहस्राणि योधयेद्यस्तु धन्विनाम् ॥ शस्त्रशास्त्र- प्रवीणश्च विज्ञेयः स महारथः ॥). -3 desire, longing; cf. मनोरथ. -रवः a frog. -रस a. very savoury. (-सः) 1 a sugarcane. -2 quicksilver. -3 a precious mineral. -4 the fruit of the date tree. -5 any one of the eight substances given below :-दरदः पारदं शस्ये वैक्रान्तं कान्तमभ्रकम् । माक्षिकं विमलश्चेति स्युरेते$ष्टौ महारसाः ॥ (-सम्) sour ricewater. -राजः 1 a great king, sovereign or supreme ruler; पञ्चाशल्लक्षपर्यन्तो महाराजः प्रकीर्तितः Śukra.1.184. -2 a respectful mode of addressing kings or other great personages (my lord, your majesty, your highness); इति सत्यं महाराज बद्धो$स्म्यर्थेन कौरवैः Mb. -3 a deified Jaina teacher. -4 a fingernail. ˚अधिराजः a universal emperor, paramount sovereign. ˚चूतः a kind of mango tree. -राजिकः N. of Viṣṇu. -राजिकाः (m. pl.) an epithet of a class of gods (said to be 22 or 236 in number.). -राज्यम् the rank or title of a reigning sovereign. -राज्ञी 1 the reigning or chief queen, principal wife of a king. -2 N. of Durgā. -रात्रम् midnight, dead of night. -रात्रिः, -त्री f. 1 see महाप्रलय; ब्रह्मणश्च निपाते च महाकल्पो भवेन्नृप । प्रकीर्तिता महारात्रिः. -2 midnight. -3 the eighth night in the bright half of Āśvina. -राष्ट्रः 'the great kingdom', N. of a country in the west of India, the country of the Marāṭhās. -2 the people of Mahārāṣṭra; the Marāṭhās (pl.). (-ष्ट्री) N. of the principal Prākṛita; dialect, the language of the people of the Mahārāṣṭra; cf. Daṇḍin:-महाराष्ट्राश्रयां भाषां प्रकृष्टं प्राकृतं विदुः Kāv.1.34. -रिष्टः a kind of Nimba tree growing on mountains. -रुज्, -ज a. very painful. -रुद्रः a form of Śiva. -रुरुः a species of antelope. -रूप a. mighty in form. (-पः) 1 an epithet of Śiva. -2 resin. -रूपकम् a kind of drama. -रेतस् m. an epithet of Śiva. -रोगः a dangerous illness, grievous malady; (these are eight :-उन्मादो राजयक्ष्मा च श्वासस्त्वग्दोष एव च । मधुमेहश्चाश्मरी च तथो- दरभगन्दरौ ॥). -रौद्र a. very dreadful. (-द्री) an epithet of Durgā. -रौरवः N. of one of the 21 hells; Ms.4.88-9. -लक्ष्मी 1 the great Lakṣmī, or Śakti of Nārāyaṇa; सेवे सैरिभमर्दिनीमिह महालक्ष्मीं सरोजस्थिताम्. -2 a young girl who represents the goddess Durgā at the Durgā festival. -लयः 1 a great world destruction. -2 the Supreme Being (महदादीनां लयो यस्मिन्). -लिङ्गम् the great Liṅga or Phallus. (-ङ्गः) an epithet of Śiva. -लोलः a crow. -लोहम् a magnet. -वंशः N. of a wellknown work in Pali (of the 5th century). -वक्षस् m. epithet of Śiva. -वनम् a large forest in Vṛindāvana. -वरा Dūrvā grass. -वराहः 'the great boar', an epithet of Viṣṇu in his third or boar incarnation. -वर्तनम् high wages; -वल्ली 1 the Mādhavī creeper. -2 a large creeping plant. -वसः the porpoise. -वसुः silver; Gīrvāṇa. -वाक्यम् 1 a long sentence. -2 any continuous composition or literary work. -3 a great proposition, principal sentence; such as तत्त्वमसि, ब्रह्मैवेदं सर्वम् &c. -4 a complete sentence (opp. अवान्तरवाक्य q. v.); न च महावाक्ये सति अवान्तरवाक्यं प्रमाणं भवति ŚB. on MS.6.4.25. -वातः a stormy wind, violent wind; महावातातैर्महिषकुलनीलैर्जलधरैः Mk.5.22. -वादिन् m. a great or powerful disputant. -वायुः 1 air (as an element). -2 stormy wind, hurricane, tempest. -वार्तिकम् N. of the Vārtikas of Kātyāyana on Pāṇini's Sūtras. -विडम् a kind of factitious salt. -विदेहा N. of a certain वृत्ति or condition of the mind in the Yoga system of philosophy. -विद्या the great lores; काली तारा महाविद्या षोडशी भुवनेश्वरी । भैरवी छिन्नमस्ता च विद्या धूमवती तथा । बगला सिद्धविद्या च मातङ्गी कमला- त्मिका । एता दश महाविद्याः ... ॥ -विपुला a kind of metre. -विभाषा a rule giving a general option or alternative; इति महाविभाषया साधुः. -विभूतिः an epithet of Śiva. -विषः a serpent having two mouths. -विषुवम् the vernal equinox. ˚संक्रान्तिः f. the vernal equinox (the sun's entering the sign Aries). -विस्तर a. very extensive or copious. -वीचिः N. of a hell. -वीरः 1 a great hero or warrior. -2 a lion. -3 the thunderbolt of Indra. -4 an epithet of Viṣṇu. -5 of Garuḍa. -6 of Hanumat. -7 a cuckoo. -8 a white horse. -9 a sacrificial fire. -1 a sacrificial vessel. -11 a kind of hawk. ˚चरितम् N. of a celebrated drama by Bhavabhūti. -वीर्य a. of great valour, very powerful. (-र्यः) 1 N. of Brahman. -2 the Supreme Being. (-र्या) the wild cotton shrub. -2 an epithet of संज्ञा, the wife of the sun. -वृषः a great bull. -वेग a. 1 very sw

mālavakaḥ	मालवकः 1 The country of the Mālavas. -2 An inhabitant of Mālvā.

mithuna	मिथुन a. [मिथ्-उनन् किच्च Uṇ.3.55] Paired, forming a pair, or couple. -नः Ved. A pair, couple. -नम् 1 A pair, couple; मिथुनं परिकल्पितं त्वया सहकारः फलिनी च नन्विमौ R.8.61; Me.18; U.2.5. -2 Twins. -3 Union, junction. -4 Sexual union, copulation, cohabitation -5 The third sign of the zodiac, Gemini. -6 (In gram.) A root compounded with a preposition. -Comp. -भावः 1 forming a couple, state of being a pair. -2 copulation. -यमकम् a particular kind of यमक; cf. Bk.1.12. -व्रतिन् a. practising cohabitation.

mithunībhāvaḥ	मिथुनीभावः Cohabitation, sexual union.

mūlam	मूलम् [मूल्-क] 1 A root (fig also); तरुमूलानि गृहीभवन्ति तेषाम् Ś.7.2; or शिखिनो धौतमूलाः 1.15; मूलं बन्ध् to take or strike root; बद्धमूलस्य मूलं हि महद्वैरतरोः स्त्रियः Śi.2.38. -2 The root, lowest edge or extremity of anything; कस्याश्चिदासीद्रशना तदानीमङ्गुष्ठमूलार्पितसूत्रशेषा R.7.1; so प्राचीमूले Me.91. -3 The lower part or end, base, the end of anything by which it is joined to something else; बाह्वोर्मूलम् Śi.7.32; so पादमूलम्, कर्णमूलम्, ऊरुमूलम् &c. -4 Beginning, commencement; आमूलाच्छ्रोतुमिच्छामि Ś.1. -5 Basis, foundation, source, origin, cause; सर्वे गार्हस्थ्यमूलकाः Mb.; रक्षोगृहे स्थितिर्मूलम् U.1.6; इति केना- प्युक्तं तत्र मूलं मृग्यम् 'the source or authority should be found out'; पुष्पं पुष्पं विचिन्वीत मूलच्छेदं न कारयेत् Mb.5.34. 18; समूलघातमघ्नन्तः परान्नोद्यन्ति मानवाः Śi.2.33. -6 The foot or bottom of anything; पर्वतमूलम्, गिरिमूलम् &c. -7 The text, or original passage (as distinguished from the commentary or gloss). -8 Vicinity, neighbourhood; सा कन्दुकेनारमतास्य मूले विभज्यमाना फलिता लतेव Mb.3.112.16. -9 Capital, principal, stock; मूलं भागो व्याजी परिघः क्लृप्तं रूपिकमत्ययश्चायमुखम् Kau. A.2.6.24. -1 A hereditary servant. -11 A square root. -12 A king's own territory; स गुप्तमूलमत्यन्तम् R.4.26; Ms.7.184. -13 A vendor who is not the true owner; Ms.8.22 (अस्वामिविक्रेता Kull.). -14 The nineteenth lunar mansion containing 11 stars. -15 A thicket, copse. -6 The root of long pepper. -17 A particular position of the fingers. -18 A chief or capital city. -19 An aboriginal inhabitant. -2 A bower, an arbour (निकुञ्ज). -21 N. of several roots पिप्पली, पुष्कर, शूरण &c. -22 A tail; मूलो मूलवता स्पृष्टो धूप्यते धूमकेतुना Rām.6.4.51. (In comp. मूल may be translated by 'first, prime, original, chief, principal' e. g. मूलकारणम् 'prime cause', &c. &c.) -Comp. -आधारम् 1 the navel. -2 a mystical circle above the organs of generation; मूलाधारे त्रिकोणाख्ये इच्छाज्ञानक्रियात्मके. -आभम् a radish. -आयतनम् the original abode. -आशिन् a. living upon roots. -आह्वम् a radish. -उच्छेदः utter destruction, total eradication. -कर्मन् n. magic; Ms.9.29. -कारः the author of an original work. -कारणम् the original or prime cause; क्रियाणां खलु धर्म्याणां सत्पत्न्यो मूलकारणम् Ku.6.13. -कारिका a furnace, an oven. -कृच्छ्रः -च्छ्रम् a kind of penance, living only upon roots; मूलकृच्छ्रः स्मृतो मूलैः. -केशरः a citron. -खानकः one who lives upon root-digging (मूलोत्पाटनजीवी); Ms.8.26. -गुणः the co-efficient of a root. -ग्रन्थः 1 an original text. -2 the very words uttered by Śākyamuni. -घातिन् a. destroying completely; (नहि...कर्मसु) मूलघातिषु सज्जन्ते बुद्धिमन्तो भवद्विधाः Rām.5.51.18; see मूलहर. -छिन्न a. nipped in the bud; सा$द्य मूलच्छिन्ना Dk. 2.2. -छेदः uprooting. -ज a. 1 radical. -2 growing at the roots of trees (as an ant-hill). -3 born under the constellation Mūla. (-जः) plant growing from a root. (-जम्) green ginger. -त्रिकोणम् the third astrological house. -देवः an epithet of Kaṁsa. -द्रव्यम्, धनम् principal, stock, capital. -धातुः lymph. -निकृन्तन a. destroying root and branch. -पुरुषः 'the stock-man', the male representative of a family. -प्रकृतिः f. the Prakṛiti or Pradhāna of the Sāṅkhyas (q. v.); मूल- प्रकृतिरविकृतिः Sāṅ. K.3. (-pl.) the four principal sovereigns to be considered at the time of war विजि- गीषु, अरि, मध्यम, and उदासीन); see Ms.7.155. -प्रतीकारः protection of wives and wealth (धनदाररक्षा); कृत्वा मूल- प्रतीकारम् Mb.5.151.61. -फलदः the bread-fruit tree. -बन्धः a particular position of the fingers. -बर्हणम् the act of uprooting, extermination. -बलम् the principal or hereditary force; विन्ध्याटवीमध्ये$वरोधान् मूलबलरक्षितान् निवेशयामासुः Dk.1.1. [Kāmandaka enumerates six divisions of the army and declares that मौल (hereditary) is the best of them (Kām.13.2-3.)] -भद्रः an epithet of Kaṁsa. -भृत्यः an old or hereditary servant. -मन्त्रः 1 a principal or primary text (such as आगम); जुहुयान्मूलमन्त्रेण पुंसूक्तेनाथवा बुधः A. Rām.4.4.31. -2 a spell. -राशिः a cardinal number. -वचनम् an original text. -वापः 1 one who plants roots. -2 A field where crops are grown by sowing roots; पुष्पफलवाटषण्ड- केदारमूलवापास्सेतुः Kau. A.2.6.24. -वित्तम् capital stock. -विद्या the twelve-worded (द्वादशाक्षरी) spell :-- ओं नमो भगवते वासुदेवायः; जुहुयान्मूलविद्यया Bhāg.8.16.4. -विभुजः a chariot. -व्यसनवृत्तिः the hereditary occupation of executing criminals; चण्डालेन तु सोपाको मूलव्यसन- वृत्तिमान् Ms.1.38. -व्रतिन् a. living exclusively on roots. -शकुनः (in augury) the first bird. -शाकटः, -शाकिनम् a field planted with edible roots. -संघः a society, sect. -साधनम् a chief instrument, principal expedient. -स्थानम् 1 base, foundation. -2 the Supreme Spirit. -3 wind, air. -4 Mooltan. (-नी) N. of Gaurī. -स्थायिन् m. an epithet of Śiva. -स्रोतस् n. the principal current or fountain-head of a river. -हर a. uprooting completely; सो$यं मूलहरो$नर्थः Rām.6.46.15. -हरः a prodigal son; मूलहरतादात्विककदर्यांश्च प्रतिषेधयेत् Kau. A.2.9.27.

yātyaḥ	यात्यः An inhabitant of hell.

rasā	रसा 1 The lower or infernal regions, hell. -2 The earth, ground, soil; यद् ग्रावेव रसातलं पुनरसौ यातो गजग्रामणीः Bv.1.59; रसादिपञ्चीकृतभूतसंभवम् A. Rām.7.5.28; स्मरस्य युद्धरङ्गतां रसा$$र सारसारसा Nalod.2.1. -3 the tongue. -4 A vine or grapes. -5 Ved. Moisture. -Comp. -ओकस् m. an inhabitant of the lower world. -खनः a cock. -तलम् 1 N. of one of the seven (अतल, वितल, सुतल, रसातल, तलातल, महातल and पाताल) regions below the earth; see पाताल. -2 the lower world or hell in general; राज्यं यातु रसातलं पुनरिदं न प्राणितुं कामये Bv.2.63; or जातिर्यातु रसातलम् Bh.2.39. -3 = रसा (2). -4 the fourth astrological mansion. -पायिन् m. a dog. -पुष्पः a bee.

rāṣṭrikaḥ	राष्ट्रिकः 1 An inhabitant of a kingdom or country, a subject; राष्ट्रिकैः सह तद्राष्ट्रं क्षिप्रमेव विनश्यति Ms.1.61. -2 The ruler of a kingdom, governor. राष्ट्रिय rāṣṭriya राष्ट्रीय rāṣṭrīya राष्ट्रिय राष्ट्रीय a. [राष्ट्रे भवः घ] Belonging to a kingdom. -यः 1 The ruler of a kingdom, king; as in राष्ट्रिय- श्यालः Mk.9. -2 The brother-in-law of a king (queen's brother); श्रुतं राष्ट्रियमुखाद् यावदङ्गुलीयकदर्शनम् Ś.6. -3 An heir-apparent. -4 An officer in the kingdom; ततः संप्रेषयेद् राष्ट्रे राष्ट्रीयाय च दर्शयेत् Mb.12.85.12.

romakaḥ	रोमकः 1 The city of Rome. -2 A Roman, an inhabitant of Rome (usually in pl.); Mb.2.51.17. -3 N. of an astronomer. -कम् 1 A kind of salt (पांशुलवण). -2 A kind of magnet. -Comp. -पत्तनम् the city of Rome. -सिद्धान्तः one of the five chief Siddhāntas (so called because it was probably derived from the Romans).

layaḥ	लयः [ली-अच्] 1 Sticking, union, adherence. -2 Lurking, hiding. -3 Fusion, melting, solution. -4 Disappearance, dissolution, extinction, destruction; universal destruction (प्रलय); लयं या 'to be dissolved or destroyed'. -5 Absorption of the mind, deep concentration, exclusive devotion (to any one object); पश्यन्ती शिवरूपिणं लयवशादात्मानमभ्यागता Māl.5.2,7; ध्यानलयेन Gīt.4. -6 Time in music (of three kinds- द्रुत, मध्य, and विलम्बित); किसलयैः सलयैरिव पाणिभिः R.9.35; पादन्यासो लय- मनुगतः M.2.9; मध्यलम्बितपरिच्छिन्नस्त्रिधायं लयः Nāg.1.14. -7 A pause in music. -8 Rest, repose. -9 A place of rest, abode, habitation; अलया Śi.4.57 'having no fixed abode, wandering'. -1 Slackness of mind, mental inactivity; (also used in adjectival sense; यदा जये- द्रजः सत्त्वं तमो मूढं लयं जडम् Bhāg.11.25.15.). -11 An embrace. -12 The Supreme Being. -13 The union of song, dance, and instrumental music; गायतं मधुरं गेयं तन्त्रीलयसमन्वितम् Rām.7.93.15. -14 A swoon. -15 The quick (downward) movement of an arrow. -Comp. -अर्कः the sun at the destruction of the universe. -आरम्भः, -आलम्भः an actor, a dancer. -कालः the time of destruction (of the world.). -गत a. dissolved, melted away. -नालिकः a Buddhist or Jain temple. -पुत्री an actress, a female dancer. -मध्य a. to be performed in moderate time (a piece of music). -शुद्ध a. to be performed in right time. -स्थानम् a place of dissolution.

lāṭa	लाट m. pl. N. of a country and its inhabitants; एष च (लाटानुप्रासः) प्रायेण लाटजनप्रियत्वाल्लाटानुप्रासः S. D.1. -टः 1 A king of the Lāṭas. -2 Old, worn out, or shabby clothes, ornaments &c. -3 Clothes in general. -4 Childish language. -5 A learned man. -Comp. -अनुप्रासः one of the five kinds of अनुप्रास or alliteration, the repetition of a word or words in the same sense but in a different application; it is thus defined and illustrated by Mammaṭa :-- शाब्दस्तु लाटानुप्रासो भेदे तात्पर्यमात्रतः, e. g. वदनं वरवर्णिन्यास्तस्याः सत्यं सुधाकरः । सुधाकरः क्व नु पुनः कलङ्क- विकलो भवेत्; or यस्य न सविधे दयिता दवदहनस्तुहिनदीधितिस्तस्य । यस्य च सविधे दयिता दवदहनस्तुहिनदीधितिस्तस्य ॥ K. P.9.

vaṅgāḥ	वङ्गाः (pl.) N. of Bengal proper and its inhabitants; वङ्गानुत्खाय तरसा नेता नौसाधनोद्यतान् R.4.36; रत्नाकरं समारभ्य ब्रह्मपुत्रान्तगः प्रिये वङ्गदेश इति प्रोक्तः; (see App.)

vatsaḥ	वत्सः [वद्-सः Uṇ.3.61] 1 A calf, the young of an animal; तेनाद्य वत्समिव लोकममुं पुषाण Bh.2.46; यं सर्वशैलाः परिकल्प्य वत्सम् Ku.1.2. -2 A boy, son; in this sense often used in the voc. as a term of endearment and translateable by 'my dear', 'my darling', 'my dear child'; अयि वत्स कृतं कृतमतिविनयेन, किमपराद्धं वत्सेन U.6. -3 Offspring or children in general; जीवद्वत्सा 'one whose children are living'. -4 A year. -5 N. of a country; (its chief town was कौशाम्बी and ruled over by Udayana), or the inhabitants of that country (pl.) -त्सा 1 A female calf. -2 A little girl; वत्से सीते 'dear Sītā' &c. -त्सम् The breast. -Comp. -अक्षी a kind of cucumber. -अदनः a wolf. (-नी) Cocculus Cordifolius (Mar. गुळवेल). -अनुसारिणी a hiatus between a long and a short syllable; also वत्सानुसृता-तिः. -ईशः, -राजः a king of the Vatsas; लोके हारि च वत्सराजचरितं नाट्ये च दक्षा वयम् Ratn.1. -काम a. fond of children. (-मा) a cow longing for her calf or a mother for her child. -तन्त्री a rope for tying calves; न लङ्घयेद्वत्सतन्त्रीं न प्रधावेच्च वर्षति Ms.4.38. -दन्तः a kind of arrow. -नाभः 1 N. of a tree. -2 a kind of very strong poison. -पत्तनम् N. of the town Kauśāmbī. -पदम् a ford (Mar. उतार); भवाम्बुधिर्वत्सपदं परं पदम् Bhāg.1.14.58. -पालः 'a keeper of calves', N. of Kṛiṣṇa or Balarāma. -बन्धा a cow longing for her calf. -रूपः a small calf; Hch. -शाला a cow-shed.

vanam	वनम् [वन्-अच्] 1 A forest, wood, thicket of trees; एको वासः पत्तने वा वने वा Bh.3.12; वने$पि दोषाः प्रभवन्ति रागिणाम्. -2 A cluster, group, a quantity of lotuses or other plants growing in a thick bed; चित्रद्विपाः पद्मवनाव- तीर्णाः R.16.16;6.86. -3 A place of abode, residence, house. -4 A fountain, spring (of water). -5 Water in general; गगनं ... वनौघनमदभ्रम् Śi.6.73. -6 A wooden vessel. -7 Wood, timber. -8 Dwelling in a forest, living abroad. -9 Ved. A cloud. -1 Light, a ray of light. -11 Worshipping. -12 A mountain; L. D. B. -13 Plenty, abundance. (As the first member of comp. वन may be translated by 'wild', 'forest'; वनवराहः, वनकदली, वनपुष्पम् &c.) -Comp. -अग्निः a forest conflagration. -अजः the wild goat. -अन्तः 1 the skirts or borders of a forest; वृत्तः स नौ संगतयोर्वनान्ते R.2.58. -2 the forest region itself, wood; वनान्तशय्याकठिनीकृताकृती Ki.1.36; अन्तःकूजन् मुखरशकुनो यत्र रम्यो वनान्तः U.2.25. -अन्तरम् 1 another wood. -2 the interior of a forest; अपि वनान्तरमल्पकुचान्तरा श्रयति पर्वत पर्वसु संनता V.4.49. -अब्जिनी a lotus-plant growing in water. -अरिष्टा wild turmeric. -अर्चकः a florist, maker of garlands. -अलक्तम् red earth or ruddle. -अलिका a sun-flower. -आखुः a hare. -आखुकः a kind of bean. -आपगा 'wood-river', a forest-stream; महार्णवं समासाद्य वनापगशतं यथा Rām.7.19. 17. -आर्द्रकम् the root of wild ginger. (-का) wild ginger. -आश a. living on water; कुतः क्षीरं ... वनाशानां वनाश्रम- निवासिनाम् Mb.13.14.124. (-शः) 1 dining in a wood, a picnic; क्वचिद्वनाशाय मनो दधद् व्रजात् प्रातः समुत्थाय वयस्य- वत्सपान् Bhāg.1.12.1. -2 a kind of small barley. -आश्रमः abode in the woods, the third stage in the religious life of a Brāhmaṇa. -आश्रमिन् m. an anchorite, a hermit. -आश्रयः 1 an inhabitant of the wood. -2 a sort of crow or raven. -उत्साहः a rhinoceros. -उद्धवा the wild cotton plant. -उपप्लवः a forest conflagration. -उपलः shaped and dried cow dung (Mar. गोवरी). -ओकस् m. 1 an inhabitant of a wood, a forester. -2 an anchorite, a hermit. -3 a wild animal such as a monkey, boar &c.; तस्य त्यक्तस्वभावस्य घृणेर्मायावनौकसः Bhāg. 7.2.7. -ओषधिः a medicinal herb growing in a forest or growing wild. -कणा wild pepper. -कदली wild plantain. -करिन् m., -कुञ्जरः, -गजः a wild elephant. -काम a. fond of a forest. -कार्पासी (-सिः f.) the wild cotton tree. -कुक्कुटः a wild fowl. -कोलिः f. the wild jujube tree. -खण्डम् a forest. -ग a. inhabitant of a forest. -गवः the wild ox. -गहनम् a thicket, the thick part of a forest; इति चालयन्नचलसानुवनगहनजानुमापतिः । -गुप्तः a spy. -गुल्मः a wild or forest shrub. -गोचर a. 1 frequenting woods. -2 living in water; जहास चाहो वन- गोचरो मृगः Bhāg.3.18.2. (-रः) 1 a hunter. -2 a forester. (-रम्) a forest. -ग्रहणम् surrounding a forest and stopping all egress. -ग्राहिन् a beater of the forest, one who surrounds a forest; तेन हि निवर्तय पूर्वगतान् वन- ग्राहिणः Ś.2.6/7. -ग्रामकः a forest village, a poor village. -चन्दनम् 1 the Devadāru tree. -2 aloe-wood. -चन्द्रिका, -ज्योत्स्ना a kind of jasmine. -चम्पकः the wild Champaka tree. -चर a. living in a forest, haunting woods, sylvan. (-रः) 1 a forester, forest-dweller, woodman; उपतस्थुरास्तितविषादधियः शतयज्वनो वनचरा वसतिम् Ki.6.29; Me.12. -2 a wild animal. -3 the fabulous eight-legged animal called Śarabha. -चर्या roaming about or residence in a forest. -छागः 1 a wild goat. -2 a boar. -छिद् m. a wood-cutter. -जः 1 an elephant. -2 a kind of fragrant grass. -3 the wild citron tree. -4 a woodman. (-जम्) a blue lotus-flower. -जा 1 wild ginger. -2 the wild cotton tree. -जीविन् a forester, woodman. -तिक्तः the yellow myrobalan tree. -दः a cloud. -दाहः a forest-conflagration. -दीपः = ˚चम्पकः. -देवता a sylvan deity, a dryad; शुश्राव कुञ्जेषु यशः स्वमुच्चैरुद्गीयमानं वनदेवताभिः R.2.12;9.52; Ś.4.5; अनुप्रयाता वनदेवताभ्यामदृश्यत स्थावरराजकन्या Ku.3.52;6.39. -द्रुमः a tree growing wild in a forest. -धारा an avenue of trees. -धितिः f. Ved. a hatchet. -धेनुः f. the female of the wild ox or Bos gavœus. -पः a woodman; यथा वनान्ते वनपैर्विसृष्टः कक्षं देहत्कृष्णगतिः सुघोषः Mb.9.24.63. -पल्लवः the शोभाञ्जन tree. -पांसुलः a hunter. -पार्श्वम् the neighbourhood of a wood, the forest region itself. -पुष्पम् a forest-flower. -पूरकः the wild citron tree. -प्रवेशः commencing a hermit's life. -प्रस्थ a. retiring into a wood, leading the life of a hermit. (-स्थः) a wood situated on a tableland. -प्रियः the cuckoo. (-यम्) the cinnamon tree. -बर्हिणः, -वर्हिणः a wild peacock. -भूः f., -भूमिः f. forest ground. -भूषणी the female of the Indian cuckoo. -मक्षिका a gad-fly. -मल्ली wild-jasmine. -माला a garland of wood-flowers, such as was usually worn by Kṛiṣṇa; ग्रथितमौलिरसौ वनमालया R.9.51; it is thus described :- आजानुलम्बिनी माला सर्वर्तुकुसुमोज्ज्वला । मध्ये स्थूल- कदम्बाढ्या वनमालेति कीर्तिता ॥ ˚धरः an epithet of Kṛiṣṇa. -मालिन् a. adorned with a chaplet of wood-flowers (-m.) an epithet of Kṛiṣṇa; धीरसमीरे यमुनातीरे वसति वने वनमाली Gīt.5; तव विरहे वनमाली सखि सीदति ibid. -मालिनी N. of the town of Dvārakā. -मुच् a. pouring water; R.9.22. (-m.), -भूतः a cloud. -मुद्गः a kind of kidney-bean. -मोचा wild plantain. -रक्षकः a forest-keeper. -राजः the lion. -राजिः, -जी f. 1 a grove or long row of trees. -2 a long tract of forest. -3 a path in a forest. -रुहम् a lotus-flower; वनरुहाननं बिभ्रदावृतम् Bhāg.1.31.12. -लक्ष्मी f. 1 an ornament or beauty of the wood. -2 the plantain. -लता a forest-creeper; दूरीकृताः खलु गुणैरुद्यानलता वन- लताभिः Ś.1.17. -वर्तिका a kind of quail. -वह्निः, -हुता- शनः a forest-conflagration. -वासः 1 living in a wood, residence in a forest; अनुमतगमना शकुन्तला तरुभिरियं वनवास- बन्धुभिः Ś.4.1. -2 a wild or nomadic life. -3 a forestdweller, a forester. -वासनः a civet-cat. -वासिन् m. 1 a forest-dweller, forester. -2 a hermit; so वनस्थायिन्. -वीजः, -वीजकः the wild citron tree. -वृन्ताकी the eggplant. -व्रीहिः wild rice. -शृङ्गाटः Tribulus Lanuginosus (Mar. सराटा). -शोभनम् a lotus. -श्वन् m. 1 a jackal. -2 a tiger. -3 a civet-cat. -सङ्कटः a kind of pulse. -सद्, -संवासिन् m. a forester; प्रणुदन्ववौ वनसदां परिश्रमम् Ki.12. 5. -समूहः a thick wood. -संप्रवेशः a solemn procession into a forest for the purpose of cutting wood for an idol. -सरोजिनी f. the wild cotton plant. -स्थः 1 a deer. -2 a hermit; कुतः क्षीरं वनस्थानाम् Mb.13.14.124. -स्था, -स्थी the holy fig tree. -स्थली a wood, forest ground; नखक्षतानीव वनस्थलीनाम् Ku.3.29. -स्रज् f. a garland of forest flowers. -हासः, -हासकः 1 the Kāsa grass. -2 N. of the flower-plant Kunda.

vasatiḥ	वसतिः ती f. [वस्-अति वा ङीप् Uṇ.4.62] 1 Dwelling, residing, abiding; आश्रमेषु वसतिं चक्रे Me.1 'fixed his residence in'; कमलवसतिमात्रनिर्वृतः Ś.5.1. -2 A house, dwelling, residence, habitation; हर्षो हर्षो हृदयवसतिः पञ्चबाणस्तु बाणः P. R.1.22; Ś.2.15. -3 A receptacle, reservoir, an abode (fig.); अलकामतिवाह्यैव वसतिं वसुसंपदाम् Ku.6.37; so विनयवसतिः, धर्मैकवसतिः. -4 A camp, halting place (शिबिर). -5 The time when one halts or stays to rest, i. e. night; तस्य मार्गवशादेका बभूव वसतिर्यतः R.15.11 (वसतिः = रात्रिः Malli.) 'he halted at night' &c.; तिस्नो वसतीरुषित्वा 7.33;11.3. -6 A Jaina monastery.

vāri	वारि n. [वृ-इञ् Uṇ. 4.124] 1 Water; यथा खनन् खनित्रेण नरो वार्यधिगच्छति Subhāṣ. -2 A fluid. -3 A kind of perfume (वाल or ह्रीवेर). -रिः, -री f. 1 A place for fastening an elephant; वारी वारैः सस्मरे वारणानाम् Śi.18. 56; R.5.15. ˚कर्मन् n. method of catching elephants with traps; Mātaṅga L.1.1. -2 A rope for fastening an elephant. -3 A hole or trap for catching elephants. -4 A captive, prisoner. -5 A water-pot. -6 N. of Sarasvatī. -7 Speech. -Comp. -अयनम् a reservoir of water, pond; दूरे वार्ययनं तीर्थं लावण्यं केशधारणम् Bhāg. 12.2.6. -ईशः 1 the ocean; (चरणः) चिरं चेतश्चारी मम भवतु वारीशदुहितुः Lakṣmīlaharī S.6. -2 N. of Viṣṇu. -उद्भ- -वम् a lotus. -ओकः a leech; यथाल्पाल्पमदन्त्याद्यं वार्योकोवत्स- षट्पदाः Ms.7.129. -गर्भः a cloud. -गृहम् a pond. -कर्पूरः a kind of fish (इलीश). -कुब्जकः the plant शृङ्गाटक. -कूटः a turret protecting the access to the gate of a town. -क्रिमिः a leech. -चत्वरः a piece of water. -चर a. aquatic. (-रः) 1 a fish. -2 any aquatic animal; अनृणी चाप्रवासी च स वारिचर मोदते Mb.3.313.15. -चामरम् moss. -ज a. produced in water. (-जः) 1 a conchshell; प्रणनाद सांनहनिको$स्य वारिजः Śi.15.72. -2 any bivalve shell. (-जम्) 1 a lotus; दधद्भिरभितस्तटौ बिकचवारिजाम्बू नदैः Śi.4.66. -2 a kind of salt. -3 a kind of plant. (गौरसुवर्ण). -4 cloves. -तस्करः 1 a cloud. -2 the sun. -त्रा an umbrella. -दः 1 a cloud; वितर वारिद वारि दवातुरे Subhāṣ Bv.1.3; विद्युद्वारिदगर्जितैः सचकिता Mk. (-दम्) 1 a kind of perfume; रास्रारग्वधवर्षाभूकटुकोशीर- वारिदैः Suśr. -2 an offerer of water to ancestors; पितुर्भव वारिदः Ve.6.24. -द्रः the Chātaka bird. -धरः a cloud; नववारिधरोदयादहोमिर्भवितव्यं च निरातपत्वरम्यैः V.4.1. -धारा a shower of rain. -धिः 1 the ocean; वारिधिसुतामक्ष्णां दिदृक्षुः शतैः Gīt.12. -2 a jar or pot. -नाथः 1 the ocean. -2 an epithet of Viṣṇu. -3 a cloud. -4 the habitation of the serpent-race. -निधिः the ocean. -पथः, -थम् 'journey by sea', a voyage. -पिण्डः a frog in the middle of a stone. -प्रवाहः a cascade, water-fall. -भवः a conch. (-वम्) antimony. -मसिः, -मुच् m., -रः a cloud. -यन्त्रम् a water-wheel, a machine for drawing up water; बिन्दूतक्षेपान् पिपासुः परिपतति शिखी भ्रान्तिमद्वारियन्त्रम् M.2.13. -रथः a raft, boat, float. -राशिः 1 the ocean. -2 a lake. -रुहम् a lotus. -लोमन् m. 1 N. of Varuṇa. -2 collyrium. -वरः Carissa Carandas (Mar. करवंद). -वल्लभा Batatas Paniculata (Mar. भुईकोहाळी). -वासः a dealer in spirituous liquors. -वाहः, -वाहनः a cloud; अथ दीपितवारिवाहवर्त्मा Ki.13.2; कृतनिश्चयिनो वन्द्यास्तुङ्गिमा नोपभुज्यते । चातकः को वराको$यं यस्येन्द्रो वारिवाहकः Pt.2.142. -शः N. of Viṣṇu. -संभवः 1 cloves. -2 a kind of antimony. -3 the fragrant root called उशीर q. v. -साम्यम् milk.

vārdhduṣyam	वार्ध्दुष्यम् Usury, high or exorbitant interest; Ms.11.61.

vāsaḥ	वासः [वस् निवासे आच्छादने वा घञ्] 1 Perfume. -2 Living, dwelling; वासो यस्य हरेः करे Bv.1.63; R.19.2; नरके नियतं वासो भवतीत्यनुशुश्रुम Bg.1.44. -3 An abode, a habitation, house; एष शाकुनिकः शेते तव वासं समाश्रितः Mb.12.145.7. -4 Site, situation; अवाप्य वासं नरदेवपुत्राः Mb.3.176.4. -5 A day's journey. -6 Imagination. (वासना). -7 Semblance. -8 Clothes, dress. -Comp. -अ (आ) -गारः, -रम्, -गृहम्, -वेश्यम् n. the inner apartments of a house; particularly bed-chamber; धर्मासनाद्विशति वासगृहं नरेन्द्रः U.1.7; समयः खलु ते वासगृहप्र- वेशस्य V.3. -कर्णी 1 a hall where public exhibitions (such as dancing, wrestling matches &c.) are held. -2 a sacrificial hall. -गृहम् 1 the inner part of a house. -2 bed-chamber; धर्मासनाद्विशति वासगृहं नरेन्द्रः U.1.7. -ताम्बूलम् betel mixed with other fragrant species; वासताम्बूलवीटिकां ... उपयुज्य Dk.2.2. -पर्ययः a change of residence; नोत्सीदेम महाराज क्रियतां वासपर्ययः Mb.3.258.5. -प्रासादः a palace. -भवनम्, -मन्दिरम्, -समनम् a dwelling-place, house. -यष्टिः f. a roosting perch, a rod for a bird to perch on; उत्कीर्णा इव वासयष्टिषु निशानिद्रालसा बर्हिणः V.3.2; Me.81. -योगः a kind of fragrant powder. -सज्जा = वासकसज्जा q. v.

vāsaka	वासक a. (-का or -सिका f.) [वास्-वस्-णिच् वा ण्वुल्] 1 Scenting, perfuming, infusing, fumigating &c. -2 Causing to dwell, populating. -कः Scent. -का (also वासिका) 1 An abode, habitation. -2 A bed-chamber. -कम् Clothes. -Comp. -सज्जा, -सज्जिका a woman who dresses herself in all her ornaments and keeps herself (and her house) ready to receive her lover, especially when he has made an appointment with her; an expectant heroine, one of the several classes of a Nāyikā; S. D. thus defines her:-- कुरुते मण्डनं यस्याः (या तु) सज्जिते वासवेश्मनि । सा तु वासकसज्जा स्याद्विदितप्रियसंगमा ॥ 12; भवति विलम्बिनि विगलितलज्जा विलपति रोदिति वासकसज्जा Gīt.6.

vāsateya	वासतेय a. (-यी f.) [वसतये हितं साधु वा ढञ्] Habitable. -यी 1 Night. -2 A house; याते तस्मिन्नथ नरपतौ वासतेयीं स्वकीयाम् Rām. ch.5.95.

vāstavya	वास्तव्य a. 1 Dwelling, inhabiting, resident; पुरे$स्य वास्तव्यकुटुम्बितां ययुः Śi.1.66; इहैवास्मि महाराज वास्तव्यो नगरे द्विजः Ks. -2 Fit to be inhabited, habitable. -व्यः 1 A dweller, resident, an inhabitant; वास्तव्यैराक्रान्ते देशे आगन्तु- र्जनो$सम्भवादन्ते निविशते ŚB. on MS.1.5.4; नानादिगन्त- वास्तव्यो महाजनसमाजः Māl.1. -व्यम् 1 A habitable place, house. -2 Habitation, residence (वसति).

vāsteya	वास्तेय a. (-यी f.) 1 Habitable, fit to be inhabited. -2 Abdominal.

veśman	वेश्मन् n. [विश्-मनिन्] 1 A house, dwelling, an abode, a mansion, palace; वेश्मानि रामः परिवर्हवन्ति विश्राण्य सौहार्द- निधिः सुहृद्भ्यः R.14.15.; Me.25; Ms.4.73;9.85. -2 N. of the 4th astrological house. -Comp. -कर्मन् n. house-building. -कलिङ्गः a kind of sparrow. -नकुलः the musk-rat. -भूः f. the site of a habitation, buildingground. -वासः A sleeping room. -स्थूणा the main post of a house.

veśyam	वेश्यम् [विश्-ण्यत् वेशाय हितं वा यत्] 1 The habitation of harlots. -2 Ved. Abode, residence. -Comp. -कामिनी, -स्त्री a prostitute, harlot.

veśyā	वेश्या A harlot, prostitute, courtezan, concubine; त्वं वापीव लतेव नौरिव जनं वेश्यासि सर्वं भज Mk.1.32; Me.37; Y.1.141; पतव्रता चैकपत्नी द्वितीये कुलटा स्मृता । तृतीये वृषली ज्ञेया चतुर्थे पुंश्चली स्मृता । वेश्या च पञ्चमे षष्ठे जुङ्गी च सप्तमे$ष्टमे । Brav. P. -Comp. -आचार्यः 1 the master or keeper of prostitutes. -2 a pimp. -3 a catamite. -आश्रयः habitation of harlots. -गमनम् debauchery, whoring. -गृहम् a brothel. -जनः a harlot. -पणः the wages given to a prostitute. -पतिः a paramour. -पुत्रः a bastard.

vaidehaḥ	वैदेहः [विदेह अण्] 1 A king of Videha; जनको ह वैदेहो बहुदक्षिणेन येज्ञेनेजे Bṛi. Up.3.1.1. -2 An inhabitant of Videha. -3 A trader by caste. -4 The son of a Vaiśya by a Brāhmaṇa woman; Ms.1 11. -5 An attendant on the women's apartments. -हाः (m. pl.) The people of Videha. -ही 1 N. of Sītā; वैदेहिबन्धोर्हृदयं विदद्रे R.14. 33 (the final vowel in वैदेही being shortened.) -2 The wife of a merchant. -3 A sort of pigment (रोचना) -4 Turmeric. -5 A cow. -6 Long pepper.

śaraṇam	शरणम् [शॄ-ल्युट्] 1 Protection, help, succour, defence; भूत्वा शरण्या शरणार्थमन्यं कथं प्रपत्स्ये त्वयि दीप्यमाने R.14.64; V.1.3; U.4.23. -2 Refuge, shelter; तस्याः करिष्यामि दृढानुतापं प्रवालशय्याशरणं शरीरम् Ku.3.8; Pt.2. -3 A place of refuge, resort, asylum (applied to persons also); सुरासुरस्य जगतः शरणम् Ki.18.22; संतप्तानां त्वमसि शरणम् Me.7; शरणं गम्-इ-या &c. 'to go to for protection, take shelter with, to submit to'; यामि हे कमिह शरणं Gīt. 7. -4 A sanctuary, closet, an apartment; अग्निशरणमार्ग- मादेशय Ś.5; अतो$ग्निहोत्रशरणादग्निमाधायात्मानमुद्दीपयामः Nāg. 5; Bhāg.7.12.2. -5 An abode, a house, habitation; शरणमपि समिद्भिः शुष्यमाणाभिराभिः Mu.3.15; Bk.6.9; Ve.5.26. -6 Lair, resting-place. -7 Injuring, killing. -Comp. -अर्थिन् a., -एषिन् a. 1 seeking refuge or protection; इतश्च शरणार्थिनः शिखरिणां गणाः शेरते Bh.2. 76. -2 unfortunate. -आगत, -आपन्न a. gone to for refuge or protection, taking shelter with, fugitive. -आगतिः approach for protection. -आलयः a place of refuge, asylum. -उन्मुख a. looking up to for protection; असौ शरण्यः शरणोन्मुखानाम् R.6.21. -द, -प्रद a. affording protection.

śūra	शूर a. [शूर्-अच्] Brave, heroic, valiant, mighty; शून्येषु शूरा न के K. P.7; स्वाध्यायशूरैर्मुखैः Pañcharātram 1.5. -रः 1 A hero, warrior, valiant man. -2 A lion. -3 A boar. -4 The sun. -5 The Śāla tree. -6 N. of a Yādava, the grandfather of Kṛiṣṇa; (hence the descendants of Śūra i. e. Yādavas also; cf. शूरः स्याद् यादवे भटे Medinī; ख्यातानि कर्माणि च यानि शौरेः शूरादय- स्तेष्वबला बभूवुः Bu. Ch.1.51). -7 The Arka plant. -8 The Chitraka tree. -9 A dog. -1 A cock. -Comp. -कीटः a contemptible warrior; लीयन्ते यत्र शत्रुप्रपतनविवशाः कोटिशः शूरकीटाः Mv.6.32. -मानम् arrogance, vaunting. -मानिन् m. a boaster, braggart. -वादः the Buddhist doctrine of non-existence. -वादिन् a. 1 a Buddhist. -2 an atheist. -सेनः m. pl. N. of the country about Mathurā or the inhabitants of that country; सा शूरसेनाधिपतिं सुषेणम् (उद्दीश्य) R.6.45.

śramaḥ	श्रमः [श्रम्-घञ् न वृद्धिः] 1 Toil, labour, exertion, effort; अलं महीपाल तव श्रमेण R.2.34; जानाति हि पुनः सम्यक् कविरेव कवेः श्रमम् Subhāṣ.; R.16.75; Ms.9.28. -2 Weariness, fatigue, exhaustion; विनयन्ते स्म तद्योधा मधुभिर्विजय- श्रमम् R.4.65,67; Me.17,52; Ki.5.28. -3 Affliction, distress; देशकालविचारीदं श्रमव्यायामनिःस्वनम् Mb.14.45.2. -4 Penance, austerity, mortification of the body; दिवं यदि प्रार्थयसे वृथा श्रमः Ku.5.45. -5 (a) Exercise; अयोदण्डेन च श्रममकरोत् K.76. (b) Especially military exercise, drill. -6 Hard study. -7 = आश्रम q. v.; तदा स पर्याववृते श्रमाय Mb.3.114.5. -Comp. -अम्बु n., -जलम्, -सलिलम् perspiration, sweat; संपेदे श्रमसलिलोद्गमो विभूषाम् Ki.7.5. -आर्त a. oppressed by fatigue; Ms.8.67. -कर्षित a. worn out by fatigue. -घ्नी Cucurbita Lagenaria (Mar. दुध्या भोपळा). -भञ्जनी the Nāgavela plant. -विनोदः the act of dispelling fatigue. -साध्य a. to be accomplished by dint of labour. -स्थानम् a drill-ground, gymnasium &c.

saṃvāsaḥ	संवासः 1 Dwelling together. -2 Association, company; प्रायेणाधममध्यमोत्तमगुणः संवासतो जायते Pt.1.25. -3 Domestic intercourse. -4 A house, dwelling. -5 An open space (for meeting or recreation); शृण्वन् वाचो मनुष्याणां ग्रामसंवासवासिनाम् Rām.2.49.4. -6 Cohabitation, sexual intercourse; व्रात्यया सह संवासे Ms.8.373.

saṃveśaḥ	संवेशः 1 Sleep, retiring to rest; अथ प्रदोषे दोषज्ञः संवेशाय विशांपतिम् R.1.93. -2 A dream. -3 Cohabitation, copulation or a particular mode thereof. -4 A bedchamber. -5 A chair, seat.

saṃśrayaḥ	संश्रयः 1 A resting or dwelling place, residence, habitation; त्वं सदा संश्रयः शैल स्वर्गमार्गाभिकाञ्क्षिणाम् Mb.3.42.22; परस्परविरोधिन्योरेकसंश्रयदुर्लभम् V.5.24; R.6.41; oft. at the end of comp. in this sense and translated by 'residing with', 'relating or pertaining to', 'with reference to', ज्ञातिकुलैकसंश्रयाम् Ś.5.17; नौसंश्रयः R.16.57; U.3.17; मनोरथो$स्याः शशिमौलिसंश्रयः Ku.5.6; द्विसंश्रयां प्रीतिमवाप लक्ष्मीः 1.43; एकार्थसंश्रयमुभयोः प्रयोगम् M.1. -2 Seeking protection or shelter with, fleeing for refuge, forming or seeking alliance, leaguing together for mutual protection; one of the 6 guṇas or expedients in politics; see under गुण also; संश्रयवृत्तिः Kau. A.7; Ms.7.16. -3 Resort, refuge, asylum, protection, shelter; अनपायिनि संश्रयद्रुमे गजभग्ने पतनाय वल्लरी Ku.4.31; Me.17; Pt.1.22. -4 Attachment (for home, relatives &c.). तथा प्रयत्नं कुर्वीत यथा मुच्येत संश्रयात् Mb.12.293.2. -5 A piece or portion belonging to anything. -Comp. -कृत, -कारित p. p. caused by alliance; यदि तत्रापि संपश्येद्दोषं संश्रयकारितम् Ms.7.176.

saṃstyāyaḥ	संस्त्यायः 1 A collection, heap, an assemblage. -2 Vicinity. -3 Spreading, diffusion, expansion. -4 A house, residence, habitation; संस्त्यायमेव गच्छावः Māl.1.9. -5 Familiarity, familiar talk; Mv.1.

saṃstha	संस्थ a. 1 Staying, abiding, lasting. -2 Dwelling, being, existing, situated (at the end of comp.); जवेना- त्मनि संस्थेन सो$सौ पूर्ण इवार्णवः Rām.7.36.27; शिष्टा क्रिया कस्यचिदात्मसंस्था M.1.16; Ku.6.6; निसर्गभिन्नास्पदमेकसंस्थम् R.6.29; Māl.5.16. -3 Tame, domesticated. -4 Fixed, stationary. -5 Ended, perished, dead. -6 Come to an end, completed. -7 Manifested (व्यक्त). -स्थः 1 A dweller, an inhabitant. -2 A neighbour, countryman. -3 A spy.

samāvāsaḥ	समावासः 1 A residence, habitation, dwelling-place. -2 Halting-place, encampment.

samupaveśanam	समुपवेशनम् 1 A building, habitation, residence. -2 Seating down. समुपष्टम्भः samupaṣṭambhḥ समुपस्तम्भः samupastambhḥ समुपष्टम्भः समुपस्तम्भः Support; अन्योन्यसमुपष्टम्भा- दन्योन्यापाश्रयेण च Mb.5.37.65.

saṃbhavaḥ	संभवः 1 Birth, production, springing up, arising, existence प्रियस्य सुहृदो यत्र मम तत्रैव संभवो भूयात् Māl.9; मानुषीषु कथं वा स्यादस्य रूपस्य संभवः Ś.1.26; अन्नाद्भवन्ति भूतानि पर्जन्यादन्नसंभवः Bg.3.14; oft. at the end of comp. in this sense; अप्सरःसभवैषा Ś.1. -2 Production and bringing up; यं मातापितरौ क्लेशं सहेते संभवे नृणाम् Ms.2.227; (see Kull. thereon). -3 Cause, origin, motive. -4 Mixing, union, combination. -5 Possibility; संयोगो हि वियोगस्य संसूचयति संभवम् Subhāṣ. -6 Compatibility, consistency. -7 Adaptation, appropriateness. -8 Agreement, conformity. -9 Capacity. -1 Equivalence (one of the Pramāṇas). -11 Acquaintance. -12 Loss, destruction. -13 (In rhet.) A possible case. -14 Cohabitation. -15 (pl.) Wealth, prosperity; स सर्वभयनिर्मुक्तः संभवानधितिष्ठति Mb.13.64.11. -16 Knowledge (विद्या); अन्यदेवाहुः संभवाद- न्यदाहुरसंभवात् Īśop.13. -17 Occurrence, appearance.

sāketam	साकेतम् N. of the city of Ayodhyā; साकेतनार्यो$ञ्जलिभिः प्रणेमुः R.14.13;13.79;18.36; अरुणद्यवनः साकेतम् Mbh. -ताः (m. pl.) The inhabitants of Ayodhyā.

sāketakaḥ	साकेतकः An inhabitant of Ayodhyā. -कम् = साकेतम्.

sātmya	सात्म्य a. Wholesome, agreeable to nature. -त्म्यः 1 Suitablenes. -2 Habit, habitation, diet. -त्म्यम् = सरूपता q. v.; नृपाश्चैद्यादयः सात्म्यं हरेस्तच्चिन्तया ययुः Bhāg. 7.1.4.

sāmudra	सामुद्र a. (-द्री f.) [समुद्रे भवः अण्] Sea-born, marine, as in सामुद्रं लवणम्. -द्रः A mariner, voyager; a sea-faring merchant; कोट्यापरान्ताः सामुद्रा रत्नान्युपहरन्तु ते Rām.2.82.8. -द्रम् 1 Sea-salt. -2 The cuttle-fish bone. -3 A mark or spot on the body. -Comp. -निष्कुटाः inhabitants of the sea-coast. -बन्धुः the moon.

sālvaḥ	साल्वः 1 N. of a country, or its inhabitants (pl. in this sense). -2 N. of a demon slain by Viṣṇu. -Comp. -हन् m. an epithet of Viṣṇu.

sindhuḥ	सिन्धुः [स्यन्द्-द्-अद् संप्रसारणं दस्य धश्च Tv.; Uṇ.1.11] 1 The sea, ocean; तावत् त्रिभुवनं सद्यः कल्पान्तैधितसिन्धवः Bhāg. 3.11.3. -2 The Indus. -3 The country around the Indus. -4 N. of a river in Mālavā; वेणीभूतप्रतनुसलिला तामतीतस्य सिन्धुः Me.29 (where Malli.'s remark सिन्धुर्नाम नदी तु कुत्रापि नास्ति is gratuitous); पारासिन्धुसंभेदमवगाह्य नगरी- मेव प्रविशावः Māl.4. 9/1 (see Dr. Bhāndārkar's note ad loc.). -5 The water ejected from an elephant's trunk. -6 The juice exuding from the temples of an elephant. -7 An elephant. -8 N. of Varuṇa. -9 White borax. -1 A kind of musical mode (राग). -pl. The inhabitants of the Sindhu country. -f. 1 A great river or river in general; पिबत्यसौ पाययते च सिन्धूः R.13.9; Me.48; Ś.5.21; Ku.3.6;5.85. -2 The river Sindhu. -Comp. -उत्थम्, -उपलम् rock-salt. -कन्या N. of Lakshmī -कफः cuttle-fish bone. -खेलः the country Sindha. -ज, -जन्मन् a. 1 aquatic. -2 river-born. -3 Sea-born, born in the Sindha country. (-जः) the moon. (-जम्) rock-salt. -जा f. N. of Lakṣmī. -नन्दनः, -पुत्रः the moon. -नाथः the ocean. -पर्णी, -वेषणम् Gmelina Arborea (Mar. थोरशिवणी). -पिबः N. of Agastya. -पुष्पः a conch-shell. -मन्थजम् rock-salt. -राजः, -पतिः N. of Jayadratha; Ve.3. -लवणम् rock-salt. -वारः a horse of good breed (brought from Sindha or Persia). -शयनः N. of Viṣṇu. -सङ्गमः confluence of rivers; (also with the ocean). -सागरः the country between the mouths of the Indus and the sea. -सौवीराः N. of a people inhabiting the country round the Indus.

sīmantakaḥ	सीमन्तकः 1 N. of a particular kind of inhabitant of hell. -2 Hair-parting. -कम् 1 Red lead, vermilion. -2 A kind of ruby.

saindhavaka	सैन्धवक a. (-की f.) Relating to the Saindhavas. -कः A miserable inhabitant of Sindhu.

sauvīrakaḥ	सौवीरकः 1 The jujube tree. -2 An inhabitant of Suvīra. -3 N. of Jayadratha. -कम् Sour barleygruel.

sthāpanama	स्थापनम [स्था-णिच्-ल्युट्] 1 (a) The act of causing to stand, fixing; founding, establishing, instituting; Mb. 12.255.3. (b) Regulating, directing. -2 Fixing the thoughts, concentration of the mind, steady application, abstraction. -3 A dwelling, habitation. -4 A ceremony performed on a woman's perceiving the first signs of living conception; cf. पुंसवन. -5 Fastening, rendering immovable; उत्थापनैरुन्नयनैश्चालनैः स्थापनैरपि । परस्परं जिगीषन्तावुपचक्रतुरात्मनः ॥ Bhāg.1.44.5. -6 Founding, erecting (a temple, image &c.). -7 Preservation, prolongation (of life). -8 A means of stopping (the flow of blood), styptic. -9 Storage (of grain). -1 Establishment of a proposition. -Comp. -वृत्त a. one who is past all restoration to strength.

sraughna	स्रौघ्न a. (-घ्नी f.) 1 Belonging to, or coming from, Srughna. -2 Residing in Srughna. -घ्नः An inhabitant of Srughna. -घ्नम् The gate leading to Srughna; cf. P.IV.3.86.

Macdonell Search

52 results


akṣetratara	n. quite uncultivated region, very uninhabitable region.

adhivāsa	m. inhabitant; neigh bour; dwelling, abode.

antarvaṃśika	m. superintend ent of the harem; -vat, a., f. -î & -nî, pregnant; -vastra, n. under-garment; -vâni, a. learned; -vâsa, m. abiding in (--°ree;); -vâsas, n. under-garment; -vâsika, m.=-vamsika; -vi sha, a. poisonous within; -vedi, m. pl. inhabitants of Antarvedi; -vedî, f. N. of a country between the Ganges and the Yamunâ.

aparānta	a. living in the extreme west; m. western region: pl. its inhabitants; end, death; lower part of an elephant's hind foot; -ka, n. kind of song.

apitva	n. participation; cohabita tion.

āryāvarta	m. land of the Âryans (between Himâlaya and Vindhya): pl. its in habitants.

āvantya	m. king or inhabitant of Avanti.

auraśa	m. inhabitant of Urasa.

kṣetrakarman	n. agriculture; -karma-krit, a. husbandman; -karshaka, m. husbandman; -ga, a. growing in the fields; m. wife's son begotten by another man; -gâta, pp. id.; -gña, a. having local knowledge; conversant with (g.); m. soul; -tara, n. place very suitable for cultivation or habitation; -tâ, f. residence; -pa, m. field-watcher; -pati, m. owner of a field; -pâla, m. field-watcher; tutelary deity of the fields; -raksha, m. field-watcher; -víd, a. knowing the place; expert; knowing the body.

gauḍa	a. made of sugar; m. n. (Sugar land), N. of a country (central Bengal); m. pl. its inhabitants; î, f. rum distilled from sugar; î-ya, a. relating to the Gaudas.

grāma	m. inhabited place, village; community, clan; host; multitude, aggregate of (--°ree;); scale in music: pl. inhabitants, people.

cola	m. jacket, doublet: pl. N. of a people (inhabitants of the modern Tanjore); sg. prince of Kola; -ka, m. pl. the Kolas; -mandala, n. province of Kola, Koromandel coast.

chardana	a. emetic; n. vomiting; -i, f. vomiting, nausea; 1. -ís, n. protection; secure habitation; 2. -is, n. vomiting.

tridiva	n. third (=highest) heaven, always with g. divah (V.); heaven (C.): -gata, pp. gone to heaven, dead; -½îsvara, m. ep. of Indra; -½okas, m. inhabitant of heaven, god.

traipura	a. relating to Tripura; m. pl. inhabitants of Tripurî; sg. prince of the Kedis; n. Siva's exploit in connexion with Tripura.

daṇḍaka	m. handle; pole, flagstaff (on a car); n., â, f. N. of a forest in the Deccan; m. pl. inhabitants of the Dandaka forest; sg. N. of a prince; -karman, n. punishment.

dākṣiṇātya	a. coming from, belonging to, or living in, the South; m. pl. inhabitants of the Deccan.

duryaśas	n. dishonour; -yuga, n. evil age; -yoga, m. deceit; transgression; -yoná, n. habitation; -yodhana, a. hard to combat; m. N. of Dhrita-râshtra's eldest son; -yoni, a. of impure extraction, base-born.

nāraka	a. (î) infernal, hellish; m. inhabitant of hell; á, m. hell, infernal regions.

naimiṣa	n. N. of a sacred forest: î-ya, a. relating to the Naimisha forest; m. pl. inhabitants of the Naimisha forest.

pañcanakha	a. having five claws; m. beast with five claws; -nada, n. land of the five rivers, Panjâb; m. pl. inhabitants of the Panjâb; sg. N. of a river; -padî, a. f. having (taken) five steps; f. five steps; the five strong cases; -na dîyate, does not accompany him even five steps; -pala, a. weighing five palas: î, f. weight of five palas; -purânîya, a. worth five purânas (a coin); -pushpa maya, a. (î) consisting of five flowers; -phut- tika, a. weaving five phuttikas in a day; m. N.; -bandha, m. fifth part of the value of a thing; -bâna, m. the five-arrowed god, Kâma; -bindu-prasrita, n. kind of figure in dancing.

pāṭaliputra	n. N. of the capital of Magadha or Behar, the Palibothra of the Greeks, near the modern Patna at the old confluence of the Sone and Ganges; m. pl. the inhabitants of Pâtaliputra: -ka, n. id., -nâmadheya, a. named Pâtaliputra.

pārthiva	a. (î) terrestrial, earthly: with vrata, n. manner of the earth; m. in habitant or son of earth; prince, king, war rior; a. royal: î, f. daughter of earth, Sîtâ; -tâ, f., -tva, n. royal dignity, kingship;-nandinî, f. king's daughter, princess; -½ri shabha, m. illustrious king; -sreshtha, spv. best of kings; -sutâ, f. king's daughter; -½ât magâ, f. king's daughter; -½indra, m. most excellent of kings.

puṣkalāvata	m. inhabitant of Pushkalâvatî; n. N. of the residence of Push kala, son of Bharata: î, f. N. of a town.

pratibimba	(m.) n. reflected disc (of the sun or moon in the water); reflected image, reflexion, shadow, likeness; -bim bana, n. reflexion; comparing; -bimbita, (den.) pp. reflected, in (--°ree;); -bimbî-kri, re flect, resemble (ac.).

pratiśaṅkā	f. supposition, con sidering to be (--°ree;); -satru, m. combatant, antagonist, foe; -sabda, m. echo: -ka, m. id., -ga, a. following the sound, -vat, a. echoing; -sama, m. cessation;-sayita, pp. √ sî; n. importunity; -sara, m. fracture; -sarâsana, n. adversary's bow; -sasin, m. mock moon; -sâkham, ad. for every Vedic school; -sâkhâ, f. minor branch: pl. all the Vedic schools; -sâpa, m. counter-curse; -sâsana, n. secondary authority (--°ree;); -syâya, m. cold, catarrh; -sraya, m. refuge, assistance; asylum, shelter; dwelling, abode, habitation; repository of (g.); --°ree; a. dwelling; -sravá, a. answering (V.); m.promise, word, assurance; -srava- na, n. answering; promising; assenting; -srut, f. echo; answer; -sruti, f. answer; promise; echo; -slokam, ad. at every sloka.

prayāga	m. Place of sacrifice: cele brated place of pilgrimage at the confluence of the Yamunâ and the Ganges; also known as a kingdom: pl. inhabitants of Prayâga; N.; -yâkaka, a. entreating (-artham); -yâkana, n. imploration; -yâgá, m. preliminary offer ing (gnly., five, sts. nine or eleven); -y&asharp;na, n. setting out, going forth, departure; march, journey; day's journey; gait; attack (--°ree;); riding on (in.); expiration of life, decease; beginning; back of a horse (where the rider sits): -ka, n. march, journey, day's march, -kâla, m. time of death, -pataha, m. march ing drum, -bha&ndot;ga, m. interruption of a journey.

prāggṅgam	ad. on the east of the Ganges; -gamana-vat, a. going forward; -gâmin, a. preceding or intending to precede; -guna, a. having the previously mentioned quality; -grîva, a.having the neck directed eastward; -ganman, n. previous birth or existence; -gâta, (pp.) n., -gâti, f. previous existence; -gyotish-a, a. lighted from the east; relating to the city of Prâggyotisha; m. prince or country of Prâggyotisha: pl. inhabitants of--; n. N. of a city supposed to have been inhabited by the demon Naraka; -dakshina, a. (east-southern, i.e.) south-east ern: â, f. south-east; â, ad. south-easterly: -pravana, a. sloping towards the south-east; -desa, m. eastern country; -daihika, a. be longing to a former life; -dvâr, f. door facing east; -dvâra, n. id.; space in front of a door; a. having a door facing eastward; -bhâra, m. [having the weight in front, inclined], de clivity; inclination; (subsiding) mass, great quantity; -bhâva, m. previous existence.

bhūkampa	m. earthquake; -kâs yapa, m. king; -kshîra-vâtikâ, f. N. of a locality; -gata, pp. existing or living on earth; -griha, n. underground chamber, cel lar; -geha, n. id.; -gola, m. terrestrial globe; -kara, a. moving on or inhabiting the earth; m. inhabitant of the earth.

madhyatas	ad. from, in, or into the midst of, out of, among (g. or --°ree;); of mid dle sort; -tâ, f. mediocrity; -desa, m. middle region; waist; Midland (the country lying between the Himâlaya, the Vindhya, Vina sana in the west and Prayâga in the east): pl. the inhabitants of Madhya-desa: î-ya, a. be longing to or living in Midland; -desya, a. id.; -deha, m. middle of the body; -nagara, n. interior of a city; -nihita,pp. put inside.

marudhanvan	m. arid waste, wilderness, desert; -patha, m. arid tract, sandy waste, desert; -bhava, m. inhabitant of the desert; -bhûti: -ka, m. N.; -bhûmi, f. desert region, wilderness; N. of a country (Mârwâr); -mandala, n. (desert region), N. of a country; -mahî, f. desert land, wilder ness; -vaka, m. a flower; -sthala, n., -stha lî, f. desert tract, wilderness, sandy waste.

māthura	a. (î) belonging to, com ing from, or born in Mathurâ; m. inhabitant of Mathurâ; N. of the proprietor of a gaming-house: -ka, m. inhabitant of Mathurâ; -des ya, a. coming from the region of Mathurâ.

māvilambam	ad. without de lay (in commands); -vilambitam, (pp.) n. ad. id.

mithunīcārin	a. practising cohabitation; -bhâva, m. cohabitation, with (in.).

maula	a. [from mûla] derived from roots (poison); ancient, of long standing (custom); aboriginal, indigenous (inhabitants); holding office from previous generations, hereditary (minister): (withpârthivâh, m. pl.= mûla-prakritayah); m. hereditary minister.

rāṣṭri	f. female ruler; -ika, m. in habitant of the kingdom, subject; ruler of a country; -iya, m. brother of a king (in the atrical language): -syâla, m. id.

raivata	a. (î) wealthy (RV.1); m. (C.) N. of a mountain: -ka, m. id. (pl. its inhabitants); N. of a janitor.

laya	m. [√ 1. lî] adherence; disap pearance or absorption in (lc., --°ree;); extinc tion, dissolution, destruction, death; rest, repose (rare); mental lethargy or inactivity; sport; time in music (of which there are three: druta, madhya, and vilambita): -m gam, become attached to any one (lc.); dis appear, be dissolved, or absorbed in (lc.); -m yâ, id.; be destroyed, perish.

vaṅga	m. Bengal (proper): pl. its inhabitants; a tree (v. r.): -ka, m. a tree; -lipi, f. Bengal writing.

vatsa	m. [vat(a)s-á, yearling], calf: young of an animal; child (vc. often as a term of endearment=my dear); year (only in tri-vatsá); N.; N. of a country: pl. its inhabitants.

vāsa	m. halting, esp. for the night. staying overnight; resting, dwelling, sojourn, in (lc., --°ree;); abode, habitation; seat of (g.); day's journey (rare); situation, condition (rare): -m vas, take up one's abode, abide, dwell, live: --°ree;, a. abiding, living in (C.).

vāstava	a. (î) (relating to an actual thing: vastu) substantial, real, true, genuine; -ka, a. id.; m. realist; gardener; -yã, a. remaining on the spot (vâstu), left (V.); resident, settled, dwelling; m.inhabitant, resident.

viḍamba	a. imitating any one (--°ree;); m. derision; desecration: -ka, a. (--°ree;) imitat ing, bearing a striking resemblance; bringing disgrace on (--°ree;); -dambana, a. imitating, acting like; n., â, f.imitation, copying, dis guise, playing the part of any one, illusive assumption of a form (sp. of a god in human form); derision, scorn, mockery; disgrace, degradation: (&abrevcirc;)-m kri, copy, imitate; make a laughing-stock of (ac.); -dambita½îsvara, a. imitating (=the image of) Siva; -dambin, a. (--°ree;) imitating, assuming the appearance of, strikingly like; mocking=throwing into the shade, surpassing; degrading, disgracing.

vilakṣa	a. having no fixed aim; missing its mark (arrow); embarrassed, abashed, ashamed: -tva, n. abst. n.; -laksh ana, a. varying in character, different; differ ing from (ab., --°ree;); various, manifold (rare); not admitting of exact definition (rare); -lakshî-kri, cause to miss the mark, disap point (any one); disconcert, abash; -laksh ya, a. having no fixed aim; -lagna, pp. (√ lag) clinging to, etc.; n. rise of a con stellation; -la&ndot;ghana, n. leaping over (g.); striking against; offence, injury: â, f. get ting over, surmounting; -la&ndot;ghin, a. (--°ree;) overstepping, transgressing; striking against, ascending to (the sky); -la&ndot;ghya, fp. to be crossed (river); to be got over, tolerable: -tâ, f. tolerableness; -lagga, a. shameless; -lapana, n., -lapita, n. wailing, lamenta tion; -labdhi, f. removal; -lamba, a. hang ing down (arms); m.tardiness, delay: °ree;--, slowly; ab. so late; in. id.; too late; -lam ba-ka, m. N. of a king; -lambana, n., â, f. delay, procrastination; -lambita, pp. √ lamb; n. delay: -gati, a. having a slow gait; f. a metre; -lambin, a.hanging down, hanging to, leaning against (lc., --°ree;); --°ree;, from which -depend, suffused with (tears); delaying, reluctant; -laya, m. disappearance, loss, de struction, end; -layana, a. dissolving; n. dissolution, destruction; liquefaction; kind of product of milk; -lasana, n. sportiveness (of a woman); play (of lightning); -lasita, pp. √ las; n. manifestation; sportiveness; pranks, goings on (sg. & pl.); play (of light ning); -lâpa,m. lamentation; -lâpana, cs. √ 1. lî] a. causing to disappear, removing; n. destruction, death; -lâpayitri, m. [fr. cs. of √ 1. lî] destroyer; -lâpin, a. wailing, lament ing; uttering sounds.

viṣayaka	a. having -as its ob ject, regarding (--°ree;); -grâma, m. world of sense; -gña, a. specialist; -tâ, f. being the object of (g.); relation to, dependence on (--°ree;); -tva, n. being the object of, occurrence or treat ment in (--°ree;); limitation of anything (g.) to (--°ree;); relation to, dependence on, liability to (--°ree;); -vat, a. directed to objects of sense; objective; -vartin, a. directed to (g.); -vâsin, a. dwelling in a country; m. inhabitant; -½âtmaka, a. directed to objects of sense, in dulging in sensual pleasures; -½adhikrita, (pp.) m. governor of a province; -½adhipa, m. id.; king; -½anta, m. boundary of the country.

vaidiśa	m. king of Vidisâ: pl. in habitants of Vidisâ; n. N. of a town situated on the Vidisâ.

śaraṇa	a. [√ 3. sri] protecting, guarding (V., E.); m. (C.) N. of a poet; n. shelter, hut, habitation (V., C.); protection, refuge (C.): --°ree;, refuge with or for: -m gam, i, yâ, etc. go to (ac.) for protection, seek refuge with (ac., rarely g.).

saṃvega	m. violent excitement or agitation; vehemence, intensity, high degree; -veda, m. perception, consciousness; -ved ana, n. knowledge; sensation, perception; announcement, information; -vedya, fp. to be known or learned from (--°ree;); intelligible to (--°ree;); to be made known or communicated to (lc.): -tâ, f. intelligibleness to (in.); -vesá, m. entrance (V.); lying down, sleeping (C.); chamber (P., rare); -vesana, a. (î) causing to lie down (V.); n. lying down, sleeping (V., C.); cohabitation (S., C.); -veshta, n. envelopment in (--°ree;); covering: --°ree; a. wrapped in; -veshtana, n. rolling together.

saṃvadana	n. conversation, talk; -vánana, a. (î) V.: conciliating, propitiat ing; C.: encouraging (liberality, --°ree;); n. (V., C.) means of conciliation; subduing spell; -vara, m. n. incorr. for sambara;-várana, 1. m. N. (C.); n. enclosure (as place of sacri fice; V.); concealment, secrecy (C.); 2. n. (C.) choice (of a husband): -srag, f. wreath given by a girl to the man of her choice; -varanîya, fp. to be concealed; -vargá,a. √ vrig] rapacious (Agni; V.); -várgam, abs. snatching up, sweeping together (RV.); -varta, m. [rolling together: √ vrit] dense mass (of people); cloud charged with rain; end or dissolution of the world; N. (C.;á, RV.1): -ka, a. (rolling together), destroying all things at the end of the world (fire etc.); m. fire of universal destruction: pl. fires of hell; -vartikâ, f. (rolled up leaf=) young lotus petal; -vardhana, a. increasing, pro moting; m. N.; n. growing up (of a child); rearing (of a child); success; promoting; -vardhanîya, fp. to be reared (child); to be maintained (servants); to be increased or fos tered (virtue); -valana, n., â, f. (hostile) en counter; mixture, union; -vasati, f. dwell ing together; -vásana, n. dwelling-place (RV.1); (sám)-vasu, m. fellow-dweller (V.); -vaha, m. N. of one of the seven winds; -v&asharp;k, f. colloquy (V.); -vâdá, m. conversation (V., C.), with (in. ± saha, lc., --°ree;); agreement, conformity, correspondence, similarity, equal ity (C.): (a)-ka, a. agreeing; m. N.; -vâd ana, n. agreement; -vâdin, a. conversing; agreeing or harmonizing, with (g., --°ree;); -vâ ra, m. contraction of the vocal chords (in pronouncing a sound), obtuse articulation (opp. vivâra); impediment (v. r.); -vârya, fp. to be concealed; -vâsa, m. dwelling to gether, with (in. ± saha, --°ree;); cohabitation, with (--°ree;); settlement, dwelling; common abode (rare); -vâsin, a. 1. clothed in (--°ree;); 2. dwelling together; --°ree;, dwelling in, inha biting; m. fellow-dweller; -vâha, m. ex tortion, oppression: -ka, a.stroking (--°ree;); m., i-kâ, f. shampooer; -vâhana, n. passage (of clouds); stroking with the hand (±hasta-, of limbs etc., --°ree;); -vâhya, fp. to be borne; to be exhibited (in a-).

saṃśayita	pp. √ sî; n. doubt, un certainty; -sayitavya, fp. dubious; -saya½u pamâ, f. comparison expressed in the form of a doubt; -sarana, n. taking refuge with any one; -sânti, f. extinction;-sita, pp. √ sâ: -vâk, a. speaking sharply, -½âtman, a. firmly resolved; -siti, f. sharpening (Br.); -sîta, a. cold; -sîti, f. doubt; -sîlana, n. practice; frequent intercourse with (in.); -suddhi, f. purity; -sushka, a. dried up, dry, withered, sere, emaciated; -soka-ga, a. produced from moist heat; m. vermin pro duced from damp heat; -sodhana, a. (î) purifying; n. purification; -sraya, m. con nexion, association with (g., --°ree;); league for mutual protection; refuge, shelter, protec tion, asylum; residence, habitation; reference, relation; resorting to (lc., --°ree;; rare); recourse, addiction or devotion to: ab. in consequence of (--°ree;); with the help of, by means of (--°ree;): --°ree; a. dwelling, living in, staying with (a teacher), standing in (a boat), being in or on, growing (tree) near; relating or referring to; devoted to, practising; -srayanîya, fp. to be resorted to, -taken refuge with: -tâ, f. abst. n.; -srayitavya, fp. to be sought refuge in (fortress); -srayin, a. having sought the protection or entered the service of any one; dwelling, resting or standing in, being in or on (--°ree;); m.dependent, servant; -srava, m. hearing; ear-shot (lc. within hearing of, g.); promise; -sravana, n. hearing, -about (--°ree;); ear-shot: lc. within hearing, aloud; (sám)- srita, pp. √ sri; m. dependent, servant: -vat, pp. act. clinging to, having wedded (in.); -sri tavya, fp. incorr. for -srayitavya; -slish- ta-karman, a. in whose actions good and evil are not kept apart, indifferent as to the morality of his actions; -slesha, m. con nexion, union, contact, with (in., --°ree;); em brace: -m labh, attain; -sleshana, n. con necting; means of binding together, bond; -sleshin, a. connecting.

samāvartana	n. return home (of a pupil after the completion of his reli gious studies); -vaha, a. bringing, producing (--°ree;); -(â)vâya, m. metr. for -(a)vâya; -vâ sa, m. abode, habitation; -vritti,f.=-âvar tana; -vesa, m. entering; absorption in (--°ree;); simultaneous occurrence, co-existence (ord. mg.); agreement with (--°ree;); -sraya, m. con nexion with (--°ree;); shelter, refuge, asylum (ord. mg.); dwelling-place, habitation; re lation, reference (rare); resorting to (--°ree;): ab. in consequence of, owing to; a. (--°ree;) dwelling or situated in; relating to; -sraya- na, n. resorting or attaching oneself to (--°ree;); -srayanîya, fp.to be sought refuge with; taken service with; m. master (opp. samâ srita, servant); -srayin, a. occupying, ob taining possession of (--°ree;); -srita, pp. √ sri; m. servant: -tva, n. having betaken oneself to (the protection of, --°ree;); -slesha, m. em brace; -svâsa, m. recovery of breath, relief, encouragement; consolation; -svâsana, n. encouraging, comforting; consolation; -svâs ya, fp. to be consoled.

sarvadeva	m. pl. all the gods; -devatâ-maya, a. (î) containing all deities; -devatyã, a. sacred to or representing all the gods; -deva-maya, a. (î) containing or representing all gods; -desîya, a. coming from every country; -daivatya, a. representing all gods; -dravya, n. pl. all things; -dhar ma-maya, a. containing --, -vid, a. knowing all laws; -nara, m. every one; -nâma-tva, n. pronominal nature; -nâman, n. (general name), pronoun; -nâma-sthâna, n. case termination added to the strong base; -nâsa, m. complete lack; loss of everything, com plete ruin: -m kri, lose everything; -niyan tri, m. all-subduer: -tva, n. abst. n.; -patta maya,a. made of fabrics of all kinds; -path îna, a. occupying the whole road; -prabhu, m. lord of all; -prâna, m.: in. with all one's might; -prâyaskittá, a. (&isharp;) atoning for every thing (Br.); n. (V.) expiation for everything; a certain libation in the Âhavanîya; -prâ yaskitti, f. complete atonement; -bhaksha, a. eating or devouring everything, omnivor ous; -bhakshin, a. id.; -bhâva, m. whole heart or soul; complete satisfaction:in., °ree;--, with one's whole soul (love etc.): pl. all ob jects; -bhûta, pp. being everywhere; n. pl. °ree;--, all beings: with na, no being: -krit, a. framing all beings, -maya, a. (î) containing or representing all beings, -½âtman, m. soul of all beings; -bhûmi, a. owning the whole earth; -bhogya, fp. advantageous to all; -ma&ndot;gala, a. universally auspicious: â, f. ep. of Durgâ (sts. also of Lakshmî); -manorama, a. delighting every one; -máya, a. (î) con taining everything; -mahat, a. greatest of all: -tara, cpv. greater than all the rest; -mâmsa½ada, a. eating every kind of flesh; -mâya, m. N. of a Râkshasa; -medhá, m. universal offering (a ten days' Soma sacrifice); -medhya-tva, n. universal purity; -yagña, m. every sacrifice: pl. all sacrifices; -yatna, m. every effort: in. with all one's might, to the best of one's ability; -yatna- vat, a. making every possible effort; -yoni, f. source of all; -yoshit, f. pl. all women; -ratna, m. N.: -maya, a. formed of all gems; entirely studded with jewels, -samanvita, pp. possessed of all jewels; -rasa, m. all kinds of juices or fluids (pl. or °ree;--); every taste: pl. all kinds of palatable food; -râtra, m. (?) the whole night: °ree;-or -m, ad. the whole night through; (sárva- AV., or sarvá- SB.)-rûpa, a. (V.) having all colours; having or assum ing all forms; of all kinds; -½ritu-ka, a. habitable in every season (house); -li&ndot;ga, a. having all genders, adjectival; -loká, m. V., C.: the whole world; C.: the whole people; every one: pl. or °ree;--, all beings; every one: -bhayamkara, a. appalling to the whole world, -mahesvara, m. ep. of Siva and of Krishna; -loha, a. entirely red; n. metals of all kinds (°ree;--): -maya, a. (î) entirely of iron; -vâram, ad. all at once, simultaneously; -vikrayin, a. selling all kinds of things; -vigñân-in, a. knowing everything: (-i)-tâ, f. omniscience; -víd, a. omniscient; -vinâsa, m. entire destruction; -vinda, m. a certain mythical being; -vishaya, a. relating to everything, general; (sárva)-vîra, a. all-heroic, consisting of, relating to, accompanied by or leading all men or heroes (V.); -ved asá, a. attended by a gift of all one's goods (sacrifice; V.); bestowing all his property on priests after a sacrifice (C., rare); n. en tire property (V.): -dakshina, a. attended with a gift of all one's property as a sacrificial fee (sacrifice; V., C.); -vedin, a. omniscient; knowing all the Vedas; -vainâsika, a. be lieving in complete annihilation; m. Bud dhist; -vyâpad, f. complete failure; -vyâp in, a. all-pervading; -vrata, n. universal vow; a. all-vowing; -sakti, f. entire strength: in. with all one's might; -sa&ndot;kâ, f. suspicion of every one.

Dictionary of Sanskrit Search

"bita" has 9 results

avilambita	name of a fault in pronouncing a word where there is the absence of a proper connection of the breath with the place of utterance; 'अविलम्बितः वर्णान्तरासंभिन्नः' Kaiyaṭa's Mahābhāṣyapradīpa.on M.Bh I.1.1. There is the word अवलम्बित which is also used in the same sense; confer, compare ग्रस्तं निरस्तमवलम्बितं निर्हतम् ० M. Bh on I.1.1.

vilambita	a kind of tone where the interval between the utterance of two letters as also the time required for the utterance of a letter is comparatively longer than in the other two kinds, viz. द्रुत and मध्य; confer, compare ये हि द्रुतायां वृत्तौ वर्णाः त्रिभागाधिकास्ते मध्यमायाम्,ये मध्यमायां वर्णास्त्रिभागाधिकास्ते विलम्बितायाम् Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P.I.1.70: confer, compare also द्रुतविलम्बितयोश्चानुपदेशात् P. I.1.69 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 11.

gonardīya	literally inhabitant of Gonarda which was the name of a district. in the province of Oudh in the days of the Mahabhasyakara according to some scholars. Others believe that Gonarda was the name of the district named Gonda at present The expression गोनर्दीय अाह occurs four times in the Mahabhasya where it refers to a scholar of grammar in Patafijali's time; cf M.Bh. on I. 1.21 ; I. 1.29; III. I.92; VII. 2.101. As Kaiyata paraphrases the words गेानर्दीयस्त्वाह as भाष्यकारस्त्वाह, scholars say that गेीनर्दीय was the name taken by the Mahabhasyakara himself who was a resident of Gonarda. Hari Diksita, however, holds that गोनर्दीय was the term used for the author of the . Varttikas; confer, compare Brhacchabdaratna.

drutā	one of the three Vrttis or styles of utterance mentioned in the Pratisakhya works and quoted in the Mahabhasya; confer, compareतित्रो वृत्तीरुपदिशन्ति वाचो विलम्बितां मध्यमां च दुतां च । अभ्यासार्थे दुतां वृत्तिं प्रयोगार्थे तु मध्यमाम् । शिष्याणामुपदेशार्थे कुर्याद् वृत्ति विलम्बिताम् । Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) XIII. 18, 19; confer, compare ये हि द्रुतायां वृत्तौ वर्णास्त्रिभागाधिकास्ते मध्यमायां, ये मध्यमायां वर्णास्त्रिभागाधिकास्ते विलाम्बितायाम् । Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. I.1.70, Vart. 4. The utterance of a letter takes ，1/3 rd time more in the मध्यमवृत्ति than in the द्रुतवृत्ति, while in the विलम्बितवृत्ति it takes 1/3 rd more than in the मध्यमवृत्ति. In short, the utterance of the same letter takes in the three vrttis, Druta, Vilambita and Madhyama the quantity of time in the proportion of 9:12:16 respectively.

padmanābha	a grammarian who wrote a treatise on grammar known as the Supadma Vyākaraņa. He is believed to have been an inhabitant of Bengal who lived in the fourteenth century A. D. Some say that he was a resident of Mithilā.

mādhurīrvṛti	a gloss not composed by, but simply explained by an inhabitant of Mathuraa or Madhuraa Such a gloss is referred to in the Mahaabhaasya on P.IV.3.101 Vaart.3, which possibly might be referring to an existing gloss on the SUtras of Paanini, which was being explained at Mathura, at the time of Patanjali. The term मधुरा was used for मथुरा in ancient times and the word माथुरी वृत्ति is also used for माधुरी वृति.

mugdhabodha	literally instructions to the ignorant: a treatise on grammar similar to the Astadhyayi of Panini but much shorter, written by Bopadeva or Vopadeva an inhabitant of the greater Maharastra in the Vardha district, in the thirteenth century. After the fall of the Hindu rulers in Bengal, treatises like भाषावृत्ति and others written by eastern grammarians fell into the back-ground and their place was taken up by easier treatises written by Bopadeva and others.Many commentaries were written upon the Mugdhabodha, of which the Vidyanivsa is much known to grammarians

rāma	inhabitant of Mithila who wrote a commentary by name विद्वत्प्रबोधिनी on the Sarasvata Prakriya.

śālāturīya	name of the great grammarian Panini given to him on account of his being an inhabitant of शलातुर् an old name of the modern Lahore or a name of a place near Lahore; confer, compare P IV.3.14

Vedabase Search

455 results


vidyādhara-ādayaḥ	the inhabitants of Vidyādhara-loka, and so on	SB 4.18.19

bhāva-ādi-mādhurye	the sweetness of the loving moods (namely śānta-rasa, dāsya-rasa, sakhya-rasa, vātsalya-rasa and mādhurya-rasa) of the inhabitants of Vṛndāvana	CC Madhya 22.155

vraja-vāsi-jana-ādiṣu	among the eternal inhabitants of Vṛndāvana	CC Madhya 22.154

jana-ājīvya-druma-ākīrṇam	dense with trees, which were the means of living for the inhabitants	SB 10.13.59

jana-ājīvya-druma-ākīrṇam	dense with trees, which were the means of living for the inhabitants	SB 10.13.59

jana-ālayaiḥ	by the inhabitants of the Janaloka planets	SB 3.11.32

alokaḥ	without light (or without inhabitants)	SB 5.20.36

amīṣām	of these inhabitants of Bhāratavarṣa	SB 5.19.21

amīṣām	of all those (inhabitants of Vṛndāvana)	SB 10.1.61

anaghāḥ	O sinless inhabitants of Vaikuṇṭha	SB 6.1.44

antaḥpura-vartinaḥ	the inhabitants of the palace	SB 6.14.49

deva-anugāḥ	the inhabitants of other planets following the principles of the demigods	SB 6.13.2

deva-anugānām	the inhabitants of the upper planets like the Gandharvas and Cāraṇas, who follow the demigods	SB 8.8.26

anya-grāmī	inhabitants from different villages	CC Madhya 7.103

gandharva-apsarasaḥ, yakṣāḥ, rakṣaḥ-bhūta-gaṇa-uragāḥ, paśavaḥ, pitaraḥ, siddhāḥ, vidyādhrāḥ, cāraṇāḥ	all inhabitants of different planets	SB 2.6.13-16

apsarasaḥ	the inhabitants of the Apsarā planet	SB 4.18.17

apsarasaḥ	inhabitants of Apsaroloka	SB 4.20.35-36

apsarasaḥ	the inhabitants of Apsaroloka	SB 7.4.14

apsarasaḥ	the inhabitants of Apsaroloka	SB 8.5.40

apsarasām	and the inhabitants of Apsaroloka	SB 7.15.71

vraja-jana-ārti-han	O one who diminishes all the painful conditions of the inhabitants of Vṛndāvana	CC Adi 6.67

asat-saṃsthāne	habitat not fit for a gentleman	SB 5.5.30

vraja-āvāsam	inhabitation of Vraja	SB 10.11.35

ayodhyā-vāsinaḥ	the inhabitants of Ayodhyā	SB 9.8.18

bhāva-ādi-mādhurye	the sweetness of the loving moods (namely śānta-rasa, dāsya-rasa, sakhya-rasa, vātsalya-rasa and mādhurya-rasa) of the inhabitants of Vṛndāvana	CC Madhya 22.155

vraja-vāsīra bhāve	in the moods of the inhabitants of Vṛndāvana, Vraja	CC Madhya 22.153

saṃsthā-bhedaḥ	different situations of habitation	SB 3.10.9

vraja-bhṛt	the inhabitants of Vrajabhūmi	SB 2.7.33

bhujaga-uttamāḥ	the best of the inhabitants of the serpent loka	SB 8.18.9-10

gandharva-apsarasaḥ, yakṣāḥ, rakṣaḥ-bhūta-gaṇa-uragāḥ, paśavaḥ, pitaraḥ, siddhāḥ, vidyādhrāḥ, cāraṇāḥ	all inhabitants of different planets	SB 2.6.13-16

nāgāḥ ca	the inhabitants of Nāgaloka	SB 8.8.16

vidyādharyaḥ ca	and the Vidyādharīs, another group of inhabitants of the heavenly planets	SB 10.3.6

cāraṇa	the inhabitants of the Cāraṇa planet	SB 2.10.37-40

cāraṇa	inhabitants of Cāraṇaloka	SB 4.20.35-36

cāraṇa	the inhabitants of Cāraṇaloka	SB 8.2.5

cāraṇa	the inhabitants of Cāraṇaloka	SB 8.8.19

gandharva-apsarasaḥ, yakṣāḥ, rakṣaḥ-bhūta-gaṇa-uragāḥ, paśavaḥ, pitaraḥ, siddhāḥ, vidyādhrāḥ, cāraṇāḥ	all inhabitants of different planets	SB 2.6.13-16

śrī-cāraṇāḥ ūcuḥ	the inhabitants of the Cāraṇa planet said	SB 7.8.51

cāraṇāḥ	the inhabitants of the Cāraṇa planet	SB 8.4.2

cāraṇāḥ	the inhabitants of Cāraṇaloka	SB 8.18.9-10

siddha-cāraṇāḥ	the Siddhas and Cāraṇas, other inhabitants of the heavenly planets	SB 10.3.6

cāraṇaiḥ	and the inhabitants of Cāraṇaloka	SB 6.17.4-5

siddha-gandharva-cāraṇaiḥ	by such celestial persons as the inhabitants of Gandharvaloka, Siddhaloka and Cāraṇaloka	SB 9.16.26

dākṣiṇātya-jana	the inhabitants of South India	CC Madhya 9.1

deva-anugāḥ	the inhabitants of other planets following the principles of the demigods	SB 6.13.2

deva-anugānām	the inhabitants of the upper planets like the Gandharvas and Cāraṇas, who follow the demigods	SB 8.8.26

devatā-prāyāḥ	were inhabitants of heaven	SB 10.1.61

vraja-dhanam	the special wealth of the inhabitants of Vraja	CC Madhya 14.228

diva-okasām	of the inhabitants of the upper planetary system	SB 8.17.28

diva-okasām	and inhabitants of heaven	SB 10.33.33

diva-okasām	on the part of the inhabitants of heaven	SB 12.12.20

jana-ājīvya-druma-ākīrṇam	dense with trees, which were the means of living for the inhabitants	SB 10.13.59

dvārakā-okasām	the inhabitants of Dvārakā	SB 1.11.25

dvārakā-okasaḥ	inhabitants of Dvārakā	SB 10.85.23

dvārakā-okasaḥ	the inhabitants of Dvārakā	SB 11.1.20

jambū-dvīpa-okasaḥ	the inhabitants of Jambūdvīpa	SB 5.2.1

kuśa-dvīpa-okasaḥ	the inhabitants of the island known as Kuśadvīpa	SB 5.20.16

gandharva-apsarasaḥ, yakṣāḥ, rakṣaḥ-bhūta-gaṇa-uragāḥ, paśavaḥ, pitaraḥ, siddhāḥ, vidyādhrāḥ, cāraṇāḥ	all inhabitants of different planets	SB 2.6.13-16

kinnara-gaṇāḥ	the inhabitants of the Kinnara planet	SB 7.8.55

sura-gaṇāḥ	the inhabitants of the upper planetary systems	SB 7.9.8

vidyādhara-gaṇāḥ	the inhabitants of Vidyādhara-loka	SB 8.18.9-10

pitṛ-gaṇān	the inhabitants of the Pitā planets	SB 2.10.37-40

gandharva-apsarasaḥ, yakṣāḥ, rakṣaḥ-bhūta-gaṇa-uragāḥ, paśavaḥ, pitaraḥ, siddhāḥ, vidyādhrāḥ, cāraṇāḥ	all inhabitants of different planets	SB 2.6.13-16

gandharva	inhabitants of the Gandharva planet	SB 4.1.22

gandharva	inhabitants of the Gandharva planet	SB 4.18.17

gandharva	inhabitants of Gandharvaloka	SB 4.20.35-36

gandharva	the inhabitants of Gandharvaloka (appointed singers in the planets of the demigods)	SB 5.5.21-22

gandharva	inhabitants of Gandharvaloka	SB 5.25.7

gandharva	the inhabitants of Gandharva-loka	SB 7.4.14

gandharva	of the inhabitants of Gandharvaloka	SB 7.15.71

gandharva	among the inhabitants of Gandharvaloka	SB 8.8.19

siddha-gandharva-cāraṇaiḥ	by such celestial persons as the inhabitants of Gandharvaloka, Siddhaloka and Cāraṇaloka	SB 9.16.26

gandharva	the inhabitants of Gandharvaloka	CC Adi 13.106

gandharva	the inhabitants of Gandharvaloka	CC Antya 2.10

śrī-gandharvāḥ ūcuḥ	the inhabitants of Gandharvaloka (who are usually engaged as musicians of the heavenly planets) said	SB 7.8.50

gandharvāḥ	and the inhabitants of Gandharvaloka	SB 8.8.12

kinnara-gandharvāḥ	the Kinnaras and Gandharvas, inhabitants of various planets in the heavenly planetary system	SB 10.3.6

gandharvaiḥ	the inhabitants of Gandharvaloka	SB 8.2.5

gandharvān	the inhabitants of the Gandharva planets	SB 2.10.37-40

gandharvān	the inhabitants of Gandharvaloka	SB 9.7.3

ghoṣān	habitations for the milkmen	SB 4.18.31

gopa-gopīṣu	all the inhabitants of Vṛndāvana, the gopas and the gopīs, associating with Nanda Mahārāja and Yaśodā and following in their footsteps	SB 10.8.51

gopa-gopīṣu	all the inhabitants of Vṛndāvana, the gopas and the gopīs, associating with Nanda Mahārāja and Yaśodā and following in their footsteps	SB 10.8.51

gopyaḥ	the gopī inhabitants of Gokula	SB 10.6.4

kulīna-grāma-vāsī	the inhabitants of Kulīna-grāma	CC Adi 10.80

kulīna-grāma-vāsī	the inhabitants of Kulīna-grāma	CC Madhya 10.89

kulīna-grāma-vāsī	the inhabitants of Kulīna-grāma	CC Madhya 16.16-17

kulīna-grāma-vāsī	the inhabitants of Kulīna-grāma	CC Antya 12.9

grāmera loka	the inhabitants of the village	CC Madhya 5.53

kulīna-grāmī jana	the inhabitants of Kulīna-grāma	CC Adi 10.48

anya-grāmī	inhabitants from different villages	CC Madhya 7.103

kulīna-grāmī	the inhabitants of the village known as Kulīna-grāma	CC Madhya 14.248

kulīna-grāmī	the inhabitants of Kulīna-grāma	CC Antya 10.140-141

grāmīke	to the inhabitants of the village	CC Madhya 18.27

kulīna-grāmīre	unto the inhabitants of Kulīna-grāma	CC Madhya 15.98

gṛha-pālāḥ	all the inhabitants of the house, especially the doormen	SB 10.4.1

guhyakān	the inhabitants of the Yakṣa planet	SB 2.10.37-40

vraja-jana-ārti-han	O one who diminishes all the painful conditions of the inhabitants of Vṛndāvana	CC Adi 6.67

jagannātha-vāsī	the inhabitants of Jagannātha Purī	CC Antya 10.62

jagat	all the inhabitants of the universe	SB 12.9.13

jagatām	by the inhabitants of the universe	SB 4.12.26

jambū-dvīpa-okasaḥ	the inhabitants of Jambūdvīpa	SB 5.2.1

jana-ālayaiḥ	by the inhabitants of the Janaloka planets	SB 3.11.32

jana-ājīvya-druma-ākīrṇam	dense with trees, which were the means of living for the inhabitants	SB 10.13.59

jana-loka-nivāsinām	among the inhabitants of Janaloka	SB 10.87.8

vraja-jana-ārti-han	O one who diminishes all the painful conditions of the inhabitants of Vṛndāvana	CC Adi 6.67

kulīna-grāmī jana	the inhabitants of Kulīna-grāma	CC Adi 10.48

jana	inhabitants	CC Adi 10.81

dākṣiṇātya-jana	the inhabitants of South India	CC Madhya 9.1

vraja-jana	the inhabitants of Vrajabhūmi	CC Madhya 9.128

vraja-jana	the inhabitants of Vrajabhūmi	CC Madhya 9.130

vraja-jana	inhabitants	CC Madhya 13.143

vraja-jana	the inhabitants of Vṛndāvana	CC Madhya 13.144

vraja-jana	to all the inhabitants of Vṛndāvana	CC Madhya 13.147

vraja-vāsī yata jana	all the inhabitants of Vṛndāvana-dhāma	CC Madhya 13.150

vraja-jana	to the inhabitants of Vṛndāvana	CC Madhya 13.157

vraja-vāsi-jana-ādiṣu	among the eternal inhabitants of Vṛndāvana	CC Madhya 22.154

vraja-jana	the inhabitants of Vrajabhūmi	CC Antya 19.42

vraja-jane	to the inhabitants of Vṛndāvana	CC Madhya 13.146

vraja-vāsi-jane	in the inhabitants of Vraja, or Vṛndāvana	CC Madhya 22.149

vraja-janera	of all the inhabitants of Vṛndāvana	CC Madhya 13.145

vraja-janera	of the inhabitants of Vṛndāvana	CC Madhya 13.146

vraja-janera	of the inhabitants of Vṛndāvana	CC Antya 19.36

kāśī-vāsī	the inhabitants of Benares	CC Madhya 25.69

saba kāśī-vāsī	all the inhabitants of Kāśī (Vārāṇasī)	CC Madhya 25.165

nava-khaṇḍa-vāsī	the inhabitants of the nine khaṇḍas	CC Antya 2.10

khaṇḍa-vāsī	the inhabitants of Khaṇḍa	CC Antya 10.140-141

khaṇḍa-vāsī	the inhabitants of Khaṇḍa	CC Antya 12.9

kīkaṭāḥ	a degraded country or the inhabitants of such a place	SB 7.10.19

kimpuruṣa	the inhabitants of Kimpuruṣa-loka	SB 8.18.9-10

śrī-kimpuruṣāḥ ūcuḥ	the inhabitants of Kimpuruṣa-loka said	SB 7.8.53

kimpuruṣāḥ	the inhabitants of Kimpuruṣa-loka, or insignificant living entities	SB 7.8.53

kimpuruṣaiḥ	the inhabitants of the tract of land known as Kimpuruṣa	SB 5.19.1

kimpuruṣān	the monkey-shaped inhabitants of the Kimpuruṣa planet	SB 2.10.37-40

kinnara	the inhabitants of the Kinnara planet	SB 2.10.37-40

kinnara	inhabitants of the Kinnara planets	SB 4.20.35-36

kinnara	inhabitant of the Kinnara planet	SB 4.30.6

kinnara-gaṇāḥ	the inhabitants of the Kinnara planet	SB 7.8.55

kinnara-gandharvāḥ	the Kinnaras and Gandharvas, inhabitants of various planets in the heavenly planetary system	SB 10.3.6

kinnara	the inhabitants of Kinnaraloka	CC Antya 2.10

śrī-kinnarāḥ ūcuḥ	the inhabitants of the Kinnara planet said	SB 7.8.55

kinnarāḥ	the inhabitants of Kinnaraloka	SB 8.18.9-10

kosalāḥ	all those inhabitants of Kosala	SB 9.11.22

kosalān	the inhabitants of Kosala-deśa, Ayodhyā	SB 5.19.8

śubha-kṛt	very auspicious to the inhabitants of the universe	SB 5.22.13

kulīna-grāmī jana	the inhabitants of Kulīna-grāma	CC Adi 10.48

kulīna-grāma-vāsī	the inhabitants of Kulīna-grāma	CC Adi 10.80

kulīna-grāma-vāsī	the inhabitants of Kulīna-grāma	CC Madhya 10.89

kulīna-grāmī	the inhabitants of the village known as Kulīna-grāma	CC Madhya 14.248

kulīna-grāmīre	unto the inhabitants of Kulīna-grāma	CC Madhya 15.98

kulīna-grāma-vāsī	the inhabitants of Kulīna-grāma	CC Madhya 16.16-17

kulīna-grāmī	the inhabitants of Kulīna-grāma	CC Antya 10.140-141

kulīna-grāma-vāsī	the inhabitants of Kulīna-grāma	CC Antya 12.9

vraja-kumuda	of the lotuslike inhabitants of Vrajabhūmi	CC Madhya 8.211

kurubhiḥ	the inhabitants of the land known as Kuru	SB 5.18.34

kuśa-dvīpa-okasaḥ	the inhabitants of the island known as Kuśadvīpa	SB 5.20.16

sura-lińginoḥ	dressed like inhabitants of Vaikuṇṭha	SB 3.15.33

loka	planets of inhabitants	SB 1.3.3

loka-pitāmahaḥ	the grandfather of all planetary inhabitants	SB 3.10.1

sarva-loka	by all the inhabitants of every planet	SB 3.28.17

loka	with light (or with inhabitants)	SB 5.20.36

loka-vanditaiḥ	by Lord Brahmā and Lord Śiva, who are praised by all the inhabitants of the three worlds	SB 10.6.34

jana-loka-nivāsinām	among the inhabitants of Janaloka	SB 10.87.8

grāmera loka	the inhabitants of the village	CC Madhya 5.53

saba loka	all the village inhabitants	CC Madhya 5.54

vrajavāsī loka	the inhabitants of Vṛndāvana	CC Madhya 18.136

lokāḥ	the inhabitants of the planets	SB 4.14.20

lokāḥ	all the inhabitants of the various planets	SB 7.3.7

lokāḥ	(the inhabitants of) the planets	SB 10.74.2

sa-lokāḥ	with the inhabitants of all the worlds	SB 12.10.20-21

sa-lokān	with the inhabitants of all the planets	SB 11.6.26-27

lokānām	for all the inhabitants of the universe	SB 5.22.17

sarva-lokasya	of all planets and their inhabitants	SB 8.24.52

svarge loke miṣati	while the inhabitants of the heavenly planets, Svargaloka, were watching this wonderful scene	SB 10.13.11

vraja-lokera	of the inhabitants of Goloka Vṛndāvana	CC Madhya 9.128

vraja-lokera	of the inhabitants of Vrajabhūmi	CC Madhya 9.131

vraja-lokera	of the inhabitants of Vṛndāvana	CC Madhya 13.148

madhūn	the inhabitants of Mathurā (Vrajabhūmi)	SB 1.11.9

bhāva-ādi-mādhurye	the sweetness of the loving moods (namely śānta-rasa, dāsya-rasa, sakhya-rasa, vātsalya-rasa and mādhurya-rasa) of the inhabitants of Vṛndāvana	CC Madhya 22.155

mahā-uragaiḥ	the inhabitants of the serpent loka	SB 8.2.5

manuṣyāḥ	the inhabitants of Bhūrloka, the human beings	SB 6.3.19

māra' vraja-vāsī	You want to kill the inhabitants of Vṛndāvana	CC Madhya 13.145

martyāḥ	inhabitants of the earthly planets	SB 4.20.35-36

māthura-śūrasenāḥ	the inhabitants of Mathurā and Śūrasena	SB 11.30.18

mātṛ	the inhabitants of Mātṛloka	SB 2.10.37-40

svarge loke miṣati	while the inhabitants of the heavenly planets, Svargaloka, were watching this wonderful scene	SB 10.13.11

tat-paura-mukhāt	from the mouths of other inhabitants	SB 4.8.15

nabha-okasaḥ	the inhabitants of the sky, or the birds	SB 2.6.13-16

nadīyā-nivāsī	an inhabitant of Nadia	CC Madhya 6.18

nadīyā-vāsī	inhabitants of Nadia	CC Madhya 16.219

nadīyā-vāsī	inhabitant of the district of Nadia	CC Antya 12.54

nāgāḥ	the inhabitants of the Nāga planet	SB 2.6.13-16

śrī-nāgāḥ ūcuḥ	the inhabitants of Nāgaloka, who look like serpents, said	SB 7.8.47

nāgāḥ ca	the inhabitants of Nāgaloka	SB 8.8.16

nāgān	the serpentine inhabitants of Nāgaloka	SB 2.10.37-40

nara	the inhabitants of the earthly planets	SB 4.24.12

narān	the inhabitants of earth	SB 2.10.37-40

nava-khaṇḍa-vāsī	the inhabitants of the nine khaṇḍas	CC Antya 2.10

navadvīpa-vāsī	the inhabitants of Navadvīpa	CC Madhya 3.153-155

navadvīpa-vāsī	all the inhabitants of Navadvīpa	CC Madhya 3.188

nirmanuje	without human habitation	SB 1.6.15

nadīyā-nivāsī	an inhabitant of Nadia	CC Madhya 6.18

nivāsinaḥ	the inhabitants	SB 3.13.44

jana-loka-nivāsinām	among the inhabitants of Janaloka	SB 10.87.8

nabha-okasaḥ	the inhabitants of the sky, or the birds	SB 2.6.13-16

jambū-dvīpa-okasaḥ	the inhabitants of Jambūdvīpa	SB 5.2.1

vana-okasaḥ	the inhabitants of the forest	SB 5.19.7

kuśa-dvīpa-okasaḥ	the inhabitants of the island known as Kuśadvīpa	SB 5.20.16

pura-okasaḥ	being the inhabitants of the above-mentioned three residential airplanes	SB 7.10.59

vraja-okasaḥ	inhabitants of Vraja	SB 10.6.33

vraja-okasaḥ	the inhabitants of Vrajabhūmi in distant places	SB 10.6.41

vraja-okasaḥ	to the inhabitants of Vraja	SB 10.7.6

vraja-okasaḥ	all the inhabitants of Vrajabhūmi, Vṛndāvana	SB 10.12.15

vraja-okasaḥ	the inhabitants of Vraja	SB 10.34.19

vraja-okasaḥ	the inhabitants of Vraja	SB 10.41.8

dvārakā-okasaḥ	inhabitants of Dvārakā	SB 10.85.23

dvārakā-okasaḥ	the inhabitants of Dvārakā	SB 11.1.20

dvārakā-okasām	the inhabitants of Dvārakā	SB 1.11.25

okasām	of the inhabitants	SB 2.8.15

vraja-okasām	by the inhabitants of the land of Vṛndāvana	SB 3.2.28

rasā-okasām	of the inhabitants of the lower regions	SB 3.18.3

rasā-okasām	of the inhabitants of Rasātala	SB 3.18.11

diva-okasām	of the inhabitants of the upper planetary system	SB 8.17.28

vraja-okasām	of the inhabitants of Gokula	SB 10.6.4

vraja-okasām	to all the inhabitants of Vraja	SB 10.11.37

vraja-okasām	of the inhabitants of Vrajabhūmi, Vṛndāvana	SB 10.12.12

vraja-okasām	for the inhabitants of Vrajabhūmi, Vṛndāvana	SB 10.12.36

vraja-okasām	of all the inhabitants of Vraja, Vṛndāvana	SB 10.13.26

vraja-okasām	of the inhabitants of Vrajabhūmi	SB 10.14.32

okasām	belonging to the inhabitants	SB 10.33.3

diva-okasām	and inhabitants of heaven	SB 10.33.33

pura-okasām	for the inhabitants of the city	SB 10.54.60

diva-okasām	on the part of the inhabitants of heaven	SB 12.12.20

vraja-okasām	of the inhabitants of Vrajabhūmi	CC Madhya 6.149

padam	place of habitation	SB 4.31.16

pāhi	may You become the King of Vraja and maintain all its inhabitants	SB 10.5.12

gṛha-pālāḥ	all the inhabitants of the house, especially the doormen	SB 10.4.1

pannagāḥ	inhabitants of the planets where serpents live	SB 4.20.35-36

gandharva-apsarasaḥ, yakṣāḥ, rakṣaḥ-bhūta-gaṇa-uragāḥ, paśavaḥ, pitaraḥ, siddhāḥ, vidyādhrāḥ, cāraṇāḥ	all inhabitants of different planets	SB 2.6.13-16

tat-paura-mukhāt	from the mouths of other inhabitants	SB 4.8.15

paurāḥ	the inhabitants of the neighborhood	SB 9.11.29

paurāḥ	all the inhabitants of the house	SB 10.2.15

paurāṇām	of the inhabitants	SB 4.25.54

piśācān	the inhabitants of Piśācaloka	SB 2.10.37-40

loka-pitāmahaḥ	the grandfather of all planetary inhabitants	SB 3.10.1

gandharva-apsarasaḥ, yakṣāḥ, rakṣaḥ-bhūta-gaṇa-uragāḥ, paśavaḥ, pitaraḥ, siddhāḥ, vidyādhrāḥ, cāraṇāḥ	all inhabitants of different planets	SB 2.6.13-16

pitaraḥ	the inhabitants of Pitṛloka	SB 4.18.18

pitaraḥ	the inhabitants of Pitṛloka	SB 7.8.37-39

śrī-pitaraḥ ūcuḥ	the inhabitants of Pitṛloka said	SB 7.8.44

pitaraḥ	the inhabitants of Pitṛloka	SB 8.5.40

pitaraḥ	the inhabitants of Pitṛloka	SB 8.18.8

pitaraḥ	the inhabitants of Pitṛloka	SB 8.23.26-27

pitṛ-gaṇān	the inhabitants of the Pitā planets	SB 2.10.37-40

pitṛ	the inhabitants of Pitṛloka	SB 4.19.42

pitṛ	inhabitants of Pitṛloka	SB 4.20.35-36

pitṛ	the inhabitants of Pitṛloka	SB 5.18.32

pitṛ	of all the inhabitants of Pitṛloka	SB 5.22.10

pitṛ	the inhabitants of Pitṛloka	SB 6.13.2

pitṛ	with the inhabitants of Pitṛloka	SB 8.23.20-21

prajābhiḥ	who are the inhabitants	SB 5.19.10

yat-prajāḥ	the inhabitants of the place	SB 1.10.27

prajāḥ	all the inhabitants	SB 9.11.24

prajāḥ	the inhabitants	SB 11.5.38-40

vraja-vāsi-prati	toward the inhabitants of Vrajabhūmi	CC Madhya 4.95

devatā-prāyāḥ	were inhabitants of heaven	SB 10.1.61

preta	the inhabitants of Pretaloka	SB 2.10.37-40

pura-okasaḥ	being the inhabitants of the above-mentioned three residential airplanes	SB 7.10.59

pura-okasām	for the inhabitants of the city	SB 10.54.60

varṣa-puruṣāḥ	the inhabitants of those varṣas	SB 5.20.22

tat-varṣa-puruṣāḥ	the inhabitants of those tracts of land	SB 5.20.27

tat-varṣa-puruṣāḥ	the inhabitants of that island	SB 5.20.32

tat-varṣa-puruṣaiḥ	the inhabitants of Hari-varṣa	SB 5.18.7

puruṣāṇām	of the inhabitants	SB 5.20.6

gandharva-apsarasaḥ, yakṣāḥ, rakṣaḥ-bhūta-gaṇa-uragāḥ, paśavaḥ, pitaraḥ, siddhāḥ, vidyādhrāḥ, cāraṇāḥ	all inhabitants of different planets	SB 2.6.13-16

rakṣaḥ	the inhabitants of the demoniac planet	SB 2.10.37-40

rasā-okasām	of the inhabitants of the lower regions	SB 3.18.3

rasā-okasām	of the inhabitants of Rasātala	SB 3.18.11

sa-siddhāḥ	with the inhabitants of Siddhaloka	SB 6.3.14-15

sa-lokān	with the inhabitants of all the planets	SB 11.6.26-27

sa-lokāḥ	with the inhabitants of all the worlds	SB 12.10.20-21

saba loka	all the village inhabitants	CC Madhya 5.54

saba kāśī-vāsī	all the inhabitants of Kāśī (Vārāṇasī)	CC Madhya 25.165

saṃsthā-bhedaḥ	different situations of habitation	SB 3.10.9

asat-saṃsthāne	habitat not fit for a gentleman	SB 5.5.30

sarpān	the inhabitants of Sarpaloka (snakes)	SB 2.10.37-40

sarva-loka	by all the inhabitants of every planet	SB 3.28.17

sarva-lokasya	of all planets and their inhabitants	SB 8.24.52

sarveṣām	to all the inhabitants	SB 5.22.16

siddha	the inhabitants of the Siddha planet	SB 2.10.37-40

siddha	inhabitants of Siddhaloka	SB 4.20.35-36

siddha	inhabitants of Siddhaloka	SB 5.25.7

siddha	and the inhabitants of Siddhaloka	SB 6.3.27

siddha	by the inhabitants of Siddhaloka	SB 6.7.2-8

siddha	by the inhabitants of Siddhaloka	SB 6.17.4-5

siddha	by the inhabitants of Siddhaloka	SB 8.2.5

siddha	the inhabitants of Siddhaloka	SB 8.8.19

siddha	the inhabitants of Siddhaloka	SB 8.18.9-10

siddha-gandharva-cāraṇaiḥ	by such celestial persons as the inhabitants of Gandharvaloka, Siddhaloka and Cāraṇaloka	SB 9.16.26

siddha-cāraṇāḥ	the Siddhas and Cāraṇas, other inhabitants of the heavenly planets	SB 10.3.6

siddha	the inhabitants of Siddhaloka	CC Adi 13.106

gandharva-apsarasaḥ, yakṣāḥ, rakṣaḥ-bhūta-gaṇa-uragāḥ, paśavaḥ, pitaraḥ, siddhāḥ, vidyādhrāḥ, cāraṇāḥ	all inhabitants of different planets	SB 2.6.13-16

siddhāḥ	the inhabitants of Siddhaloka	SB 4.18.19

siddhāḥ	the inhabitants of Siddhaloka, who have all mystic powers	SB 5.5.21-22

sa-siddhāḥ	with the inhabitants of Siddhaloka	SB 6.3.14-15

siddhāḥ	the inhabitants of Siddhaloka	SB 7.4.14

śrī-siddhāḥ ūcuḥ	the inhabitants of Siddhaloka said	SB 7.8.45

siddhāḥ	the inhabitants of the Siddha planet	SB 8.4.2

siddhānām	and the inhabitants of Siddhaloka, who are expert in yogic power	SB 6.17.26

śrī-pitaraḥ ūcuḥ	the inhabitants of Pitṛloka said	SB 7.8.44

śrī-siddhāḥ ūcuḥ	the inhabitants of Siddhaloka said	SB 7.8.45

śrī-vidyādharāḥ ūcuḥ	the inhabitants of Vidyādhara-loka prayed	SB 7.8.46

śrī-nāgāḥ ūcuḥ	the inhabitants of Nāgaloka, who look like serpents, said	SB 7.8.47

śrī-gandharvāḥ ūcuḥ	the inhabitants of Gandharvaloka (who are usually engaged as musicians of the heavenly planets) said	SB 7.8.50

śrī-cāraṇāḥ ūcuḥ	the inhabitants of the Cāraṇa planet said	SB 7.8.51

śrī-yakṣāḥ ūcuḥ	the inhabitants of the Yakṣa planet prayed	SB 7.8.52

śrī-kimpuruṣāḥ ūcuḥ	the inhabitants of Kimpuruṣa-loka said	SB 7.8.53

śrī-vaitālikāḥ ūcuḥ	the inhabitants of Vaitālika-loka said	SB 7.8.54

śrī-kinnarāḥ ūcuḥ	the inhabitants of the Kinnara planet said	SB 7.8.55

śubha-kṛt	very auspicious to the inhabitants of the universe	SB 5.22.13

śuddha-vraja-vāsī	a pure inhabitant of Vṛndāvana	CC Madhya 14.217

sura-lińginoḥ	dressed like inhabitants of Vaikuṇṭha	SB 3.15.33

sura-gaṇāḥ	the inhabitants of the upper planetary systems	SB 7.9.8

māthura-śūrasenāḥ	the inhabitants of Mathurā and Śūrasena	SB 11.30.18

śūrasenānām	of the inhabitants of Śūrasena	SB 6.14.32

svarge loke miṣati	while the inhabitants of the heavenly planets, Svargaloka, were watching this wonderful scene	SB 10.13.11

svargiṇām	of the inhabitants of the heavenly planets	SB 8.8.7

tāńrā	they (the inhabitants of Kulīna-grāma)	CC Madhya 16.73

tat-paura-mukhāt	from the mouths of other inhabitants	SB 4.8.15

tat-varṣa-puruṣaiḥ	the inhabitants of Hari-varṣa	SB 5.18.7

tat-varṣa-puruṣāḥ	the inhabitants of those tracts of land	SB 5.20.27

tat-varṣa-puruṣāḥ	the inhabitants of that island	SB 5.20.32

tatratyaiḥ	by local inhabitants	SB 1.10.36

te	they (all the inhabitants and the brothers)	SB 9.11.24

ye te	all the inhabitants of Vrajabhūmi	SB 10.12.15

te	they (the inhabitants of Vṛndāvana)	SB 10.36.5

teṣām	of all of them (the sons of Kārtavīryārjuna and the other kṣatriya inhabitants)	SB 9.16.17

teṣām	of all the inhabitants of Vṛndāvana	SB 10.8.52

tīrtha-vāsī	inhabitants of a holy place	CC Antya 15.35

śrī-pitaraḥ ūcuḥ	the inhabitants of Pitṛloka said	SB 7.8.44

śrī-siddhāḥ ūcuḥ	the inhabitants of Siddhaloka said	SB 7.8.45

śrī-vidyādharāḥ ūcuḥ	the inhabitants of Vidyādhara-loka prayed	SB 7.8.46

śrī-nāgāḥ ūcuḥ	the inhabitants of Nāgaloka, who look like serpents, said	SB 7.8.47

śrī-gandharvāḥ ūcuḥ	the inhabitants of Gandharvaloka (who are usually engaged as musicians of the heavenly planets) said	SB 7.8.50

śrī-cāraṇāḥ ūcuḥ	the inhabitants of the Cāraṇa planet said	SB 7.8.51

śrī-yakṣāḥ ūcuḥ	the inhabitants of the Yakṣa planet prayed	SB 7.8.52

śrī-kimpuruṣāḥ ūcuḥ	the inhabitants of Kimpuruṣa-loka said	SB 7.8.53

śrī-vaitālikāḥ ūcuḥ	the inhabitants of Vaitālika-loka said	SB 7.8.54

śrī-kinnarāḥ ūcuḥ	the inhabitants of the Kinnara planet said	SB 7.8.55

gandharva-apsarasaḥ, yakṣāḥ, rakṣaḥ-bhūta-gaṇa-uragāḥ, paśavaḥ, pitaraḥ, siddhāḥ, vidyādhrāḥ, cāraṇāḥ	all inhabitants of different planets	SB 2.6.13-16

uragaiḥ	the inhabitants of Nāgaloka	SB 4.1.22

mahā-uragaiḥ	the inhabitants of the serpent loka	SB 8.2.5

uśīnarāṇām	to the inhabitants of the state of Uśīnara	SB 7.2.33

bhujaga-uttamāḥ	the best of the inhabitants of the serpent loka	SB 8.18.9-10

śrī-vaitālikāḥ ūcuḥ	the inhabitants of Vaitālika-loka said	SB 7.8.54

vana-okasaḥ	the inhabitants of the forest	SB 5.19.7

loka-vanditaiḥ	by Lord Brahmā and Lord Śiva, who are praised by all the inhabitants of the three worlds	SB 10.6.34

tat-varṣa-puruṣaiḥ	the inhabitants of Hari-varṣa	SB 5.18.7

varṣa-puruṣāḥ	the inhabitants of those varṣas	SB 5.20.22

tat-varṣa-puruṣāḥ	the inhabitants of those tracts of land	SB 5.20.27

tat-varṣa-puruṣāḥ	the inhabitants of that island	SB 5.20.32

antaḥpura-vartinaḥ	the inhabitants of the palace	SB 6.14.49

vāsa	habitation	CC Adi 10.91

vāsaḥ	inhabitation	SB 3.2.16

vasati	habitation	CC Madhya 17.62-63

vasati	habitation	CC Madhya 18.26

vṛndāvana-vāsī	the inhabitants of Vṛndāvana	CC Adi 8.49

kulīna-grāma-vāsī	the inhabitants of Kulīna-grāma	CC Adi 10.80

vraja-vāsī	inhabitants of Vrajabhūmi	CC Adi 10.101

navadvīpa-vāsī	the inhabitants of Navadvīpa	CC Madhya 3.153-155

navadvīpa-vāsī	all the inhabitants of Navadvīpa	CC Madhya 3.188

vraja-vāsī	the inhabitants of Vṛndāvana (Vrajabhūmi)	CC Madhya 4.95

vraja-vāsi-prati	toward the inhabitants of Vrajabhūmi	CC Madhya 4.95

kulīna-grāma-vāsī	the inhabitants of Kulīna-grāma	CC Madhya 10.89

māra' vraja-vāsī	You want to kill the inhabitants of Vṛndāvana	CC Madhya 13.145

vraja-vāsī yata jana	all the inhabitants of Vṛndāvana-dhāma	CC Madhya 13.150

śuddha-vraja-vāsī	a pure inhabitant of Vṛndāvana	CC Madhya 14.217

kulīna-grāma-vāsī	the inhabitants of Kulīna-grāma	CC Madhya 16.16-17

nadīyā-vāsī	inhabitants of Nadia	CC Madhya 16.219

vāsī	the inhabitants	CC Madhya 21.53

vraja-vāsi-jane	in the inhabitants of Vraja, or Vṛndāvana	CC Madhya 22.149

vraja-vāsi-jana-ādiṣu	among the eternal inhabitants of Vṛndāvana	CC Madhya 22.154

kāśī-vāsī	the inhabitants of Benares	CC Madhya 25.69

saba kāśī-vāsī	all the inhabitants of Kāśī (Vārāṇasī)	CC Madhya 25.165

nava-khaṇḍa-vāsī	the inhabitants of the nine khaṇḍas	CC Antya 2.10

jagannātha-vāsī	the inhabitants of Jagannātha Purī	CC Antya 10.62

khaṇḍa-vāsī	the inhabitants of Khaṇḍa	CC Antya 10.140-141

kulīna-grāma-vāsī	the inhabitants of Kulīna-grāma	CC Antya 12.9

khaṇḍa-vāsī	the inhabitants of Khaṇḍa	CC Antya 12.9

nadīyā-vāsī	inhabitant of the district of Nadia	CC Antya 12.54

tīrtha-vāsī	inhabitants of a holy place	CC Antya 15.35

ayodhyā-vāsinaḥ	the inhabitants of Ayodhyā	SB 9.8.18

vraja-vāsīra bhāve	in the moods of the inhabitants of Vṛndāvana, Vraja	CC Madhya 22.153

vidyādhara-ādayaḥ	the inhabitants of Vidyādhara-loka, and so on	SB 4.18.19

vidyādhara	the inhabitants of Vidyādhara-loka	SB 8.2.5

vidyādhara-gaṇāḥ	the inhabitants of Vidyādhara-loka	SB 8.18.9-10

vidyādharāḥ	the inhabitants of Vidyādhara-loka	SB 7.4.14

śrī-vidyādharāḥ ūcuḥ	the inhabitants of Vidyādhara-loka prayed	SB 7.8.46

vidyādharyaḥ ca	and the Vidyādharīs, another group of inhabitants of the heavenly planets	SB 10.3.6

vidyādhra	the inhabitants of the Vidyādhara planet	SB 2.10.37-40

gandharva-apsarasaḥ, yakṣāḥ, rakṣaḥ-bhūta-gaṇa-uragāḥ, paśavaḥ, pitaraḥ, siddhāḥ, vidyādhrāḥ, cāraṇāḥ	all inhabitants of different planets	SB 2.6.13-16

vraja-bhṛt	the inhabitants of Vrajabhūmi	SB 2.7.33

vraja-okasām	by the inhabitants of the land of Vṛndāvana	SB 3.2.28

vraja-okasām	of the inhabitants of Gokula	SB 10.6.4

vraja-okasaḥ	inhabitants of Vraja	SB 10.6.33

vraja-okasaḥ	the inhabitants of Vrajabhūmi in distant places	SB 10.6.41

vraja-okasaḥ	to the inhabitants of Vraja	SB 10.7.6

vraja-āvāsam	inhabitation of Vraja	SB 10.11.35

vraja-okasām	to all the inhabitants of Vraja	SB 10.11.37

vraja-okasām	of the inhabitants of Vrajabhūmi, Vṛndāvana	SB 10.12.12

vraja-okasaḥ	all the inhabitants of Vrajabhūmi, Vṛndāvana	SB 10.12.15

vraja-okasām	for the inhabitants of Vrajabhūmi, Vṛndāvana	SB 10.12.36

vraja-okasām	of all the inhabitants of Vraja, Vṛndāvana	SB 10.13.26

vraja-okasām	of the inhabitants of Vrajabhūmi	SB 10.14.32

vraja-okasaḥ	the inhabitants of Vraja	SB 10.34.19

vraja	to the inhabitants of Vṛndāvana	SB 10.37.25

vraja-okasaḥ	the inhabitants of Vraja	SB 10.41.8

vraja-jana-ārti-han	O one who diminishes all the painful conditions of the inhabitants of Vṛndāvana	CC Adi 6.67

vraja-vāsī	inhabitants of Vrajabhūmi	CC Adi 10.101

vraja-vāsī	the inhabitants of Vṛndāvana (Vrajabhūmi)	CC Madhya 4.95

vraja-vāsi-prati	toward the inhabitants of Vrajabhūmi	CC Madhya 4.95

vraja-okasām	of the inhabitants of Vrajabhūmi	CC Madhya 6.149

vraja-kumuda	of the lotuslike inhabitants of Vrajabhūmi	CC Madhya 8.211

vraja-lokera	of the inhabitants of Goloka Vṛndāvana	CC Madhya 9.128

vraja-jana	the inhabitants of Vrajabhūmi	CC Madhya 9.128

vraja-jana	the inhabitants of Vrajabhūmi	CC Madhya 9.130

vraja-lokera	of the inhabitants of Vrajabhūmi	CC Madhya 9.131

vraja-jana	inhabitants	CC Madhya 13.143

vraja-jana	the inhabitants of Vṛndāvana	CC Madhya 13.144

vraja-janera	of all the inhabitants of Vṛndāvana	CC Madhya 13.145

māra' vraja-vāsī	You want to kill the inhabitants of Vṛndāvana	CC Madhya 13.145

vraja-jane	to the inhabitants of Vṛndāvana	CC Madhya 13.146

vraja-janera	of the inhabitants of Vṛndāvana	CC Madhya 13.146

vraja-jana	to all the inhabitants of Vṛndāvana	CC Madhya 13.147

vraja-lokera	of the inhabitants of Vṛndāvana	CC Madhya 13.148

vraja-vāsī yata jana	all the inhabitants of Vṛndāvana-dhāma	CC Madhya 13.150

vraja-jana	to the inhabitants of Vṛndāvana	CC Madhya 13.157

śuddha-vraja-vāsī	a pure inhabitant of Vṛndāvana	CC Madhya 14.217

vraja-dhanam	the special wealth of the inhabitants of Vraja	CC Madhya 14.228

vraja-vāsi-jane	in the inhabitants of Vraja, or Vṛndāvana	CC Madhya 22.149

vraja-vāsīra bhāve	in the moods of the inhabitants of Vṛndāvana, Vraja	CC Madhya 22.153

vraja-vāsi-jana-ādiṣu	among the eternal inhabitants of Vṛndāvana	CC Madhya 22.154

vraja-janera	of the inhabitants of Vṛndāvana	CC Antya 19.36

vraja-jana	the inhabitants of Vrajabhūmi	CC Antya 19.42

vrajam	all the inhabitants of Vraja	SB 2.7.29

vrajasya	of all the inhabitants of Vraja	SB 10.13.36

vrajavāsī loka	the inhabitants of Vṛndāvana	CC Madhya 18.136

vrajera	of the inhabitants of Vraja	CC Antya 7.37

vṛndāvana-vāsī	the inhabitants of Vṛndāvana	CC Adi 8.49

vṛndāvanam	with the forest of Vṛndāvana and its inhabitants	SB 10.15.9

yaiḥ	by whom (the inhabitants of Bhārata-varṣa)	SB 5.19.26

gandharva-apsarasaḥ, yakṣāḥ, rakṣaḥ-bhūta-gaṇa-uragāḥ, paśavaḥ, pitaraḥ, siddhāḥ, vidyādhrāḥ, cāraṇāḥ	all inhabitants of different planets	SB 2.6.13-16

śrī-yakṣāḥ ūcuḥ	the inhabitants of the Yakṣa planet prayed	SB 7.8.52

yat-prajāḥ	the inhabitants of the place	SB 1.10.27

vraja-vāsī yata jana	all the inhabitants of Vṛndāvana-dhāma	CC Madhya 13.150

ye te	all the inhabitants of Vrajabhūmi	SB 10.12.15

Ayurvedic MedicalDictionary Dr. Potturu with thanks

Purchase Kindle edition


adhiṣṭhāna	location, habitat, abode.
bitahasti	a linear measurement equal to 9 inches or 22.86 cent
deśa	environment, locality, habitat.
janapada	habitation; village.
janapadodhvamśa	(janpada.vidhvamśa) epidemics; dosease(s) that spread rapidly and extensively in habitation(s).
pravilambita	body parts hanging loose due to accident.

Wordnet Search

"bita" has 10 results.


bita	āśrita, saṃśrita, upāśrita, avalambin, avalambita, adhīna, abhyādhīna, āyatta, vaśa, tantra, nighna, sambaddha, nibaddha kasyacit ādhāreṇa āśrayeṇa vā tiṣṭhati। parāvalambinaḥ kṣupāḥ anyasmin kṣupe āśritāḥ santi।
bita	nilambita, udbaddha, pralambita, lambita, ālambita, āndolita, āsthagita kiyatkālaparyantaṃ nirvarttitaḥ। nilambitaiḥ karmakaraiḥ punarniyuktyarthaṃ uccanyāyālaye āvedanaṃ samarpitam।
bita	manda, manthara, mandagati, mandagamana, mandagāmin, adruta, aśīghra, vilambita, vilambin yasya vegaḥ balam vā alpībhavati। tasya vāhanasya gatiḥ mandā jātā।
bita	vilambita, pralambita dīrghakālīnam। nyāyālayaḥ vilambitāni kāryāṇi śīghraṃ āpūrayiṣyati।
bita	cumbanam, cumbitam, pariṇiṃsā, nikṣaṇam, praṇikṣaṇam samāghrāṇasya kriyā। mātā prasannā bhūtvā vāraṃvāraṃ putrasya cumbanaṃ karoti।
bita	pratibimbita yasya pratibimbaṃ dṛśyate। kaumudyāṃ jale pratibimbitaḥ candraḥ sukhāyate।
bita	gupta, pālita, rakṣita, saṃrakṣita, adhigupta, anugupta, abhigupta, abhirakṣita, abhisaṃgupta, abhyupapanna, ālambita, ārakṣita, ūta, gopāyita, gupita, daṃśita, datta, dayita, trāṇa, trāta, pratipālita, paritrāta, pāta, sanātha, avita samyak gopyate yat। cauraḥ guptānāṃ sampattīnām anveṣaṇaṃ karoti।
bita	drutavilambitaḥ, sundarī varṇavṛttaviśeṣaḥ। drutavilambite pratyekasmin caraṇe ekaḥ nagaṇaḥ dvau bhagaṇau tathā ca ekaḥ ragaṇaḥ asti।
bita	vilambitagatiḥ mātrikaḥ chandoviśeṣaḥ। vilambitagateḥ pratyekasmin caraṇe saptadaśa varṇāḥ santi।
bita	ullambita, samullambita yad lambate। chadeḥ ullambitāṃ rajjuṃ dṛṣṭvā sarpasya bhramaḥ jātaḥ।

Help

Credits